JP2021041246A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance game amusement by increasing execution frequency of performance that suggests a result of prior identification.SOLUTION: In a final stop mode of change display of identification holding information, a result of impartment determination is shown. With respect to special information stored to acquisition information storage means, first suggestive performance showing a possibility for the impartment determination result to be made can be executed. When an impartment non-support result is displayed in the final stop mode of the identification holding information based on the special information to be an object of the first suggestive performance, in the case that special information is stored to the acquisition information storage means, jackpot holding information is preferentially selected from the special information stored, and second suggestive performance showing a possibility for the selected special information to end up in the impartment determination result can be executed. There is also provided sorting means sorting game balls that have passed a prescribed ball entry opening to destinations. There may be provided: first acquisition information storage means storing special information when the game balls are sorted into a first ball entry part; and second acquisition information storage means storing the special information when the balls are sorted into a second ball entry part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 69

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

For example, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a launching means (launching device), an operating port, a display means, etc. are provided, and special information acquired based on a game ball launched by the launching means winning a prize in the operating port. Is stored in the acquisition information storage means up to a predetermined number (plurality). When the processing condition (the condition for starting the grant determination) is satisfied, the stored special information is read from the acquired information storage means, and whether or not the read special information corresponds to the grant information is given. Judgment (hit / fail judgment) is performed. Then, when the grant determination is performed, the display means (for example, the display means such as the first result display unit or the second result display unit of the main display unit) starts the change display (for example, variation display) of the identification information. When a predetermined change time elapses, the change display ends, and the result of the grant determination is displayed depending on the final stop mode of the identification information.

In this type of gaming machine, before the determination of granting the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is performed, it is pre-specified whether the special information corresponds to the granted information, and the result of this pre-specification. It is decided by lottery whether or not to execute the suggestion effect (notice effect) that suggests. Then, when it is decided to execute the suggestion effect (notice effect), the suggestion effect is the effect means (design display) prior to the change display of the identification information based on the special information that has been specified in advance. It is executed in an apparatus, an indicator lamp unit, a speaker unit, etc. (for example, Patent Documents 1 to 3).
See).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-342804 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-215914 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-11408

The configurations related to these suggestion effects are commonplace, and it is necessary to further improve this type of game machine (game machine that performs suggestion effects) to enhance the game interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the frequency of execution of an effect suggesting a predetermined result in advance and enhancing the game entertainment.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is stored. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the special information of
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting correspondence result that the special information to be granted is corresponding to the granting information.
The change display of the identification information is started based on the result of the grant determination, the change display is ended when a predetermined change time elapses, and the identification information change that displays the result of the grant determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information. Means and
A first indicating that the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means may be determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination.
The first prior identification means for identifying the prior identification information before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, and
The first suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting the content of the first pre-determination information with a determination probability based on the type of the specific target special information.
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special target specific target by the first prior identification means is started. Before, or before the change display ends, the first suggestion effect execution means for executing the first suggestion effect, and
It is a game machine equipped with
When it is displayed that the special information is a non-granting result that does not correspond to the given information by the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior specific means. In the case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage means,
A selection means for preferentially selecting the special information having the lowest determination probability from the stored special information.
The second pre-specified information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the special information selected by the selection means is the target of the grant determination is the target of the grant determination. The second pre-identification means to identify before becoming
With the second suggestion effect execution decision means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect suggesting the content of the second prior determination information based on the determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information. ,
When the second suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the second suggestion effect, the change display is performed before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display. The second suggestion effect execution means for executing the second suggestion effect before the end of
With
Further, the acquisition condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting ball entry section or the second starting ball entry section.
As the acquired information storage means
When a game ball enters the first starting ball entry portion, the first acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to the first specified number, and the first acquisition information storage means.
A second acquisition information storage means that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a second specified number when a game ball enters the second start ball entry unit.
Is equipped with
The transition determination means is characterized in that the grant determination is performed for each of the first acquisition information storage means and the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is stored. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the special information of
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting correspondence result that the special information to be granted is corresponding to the granting information.
The change display of the identification information is started based on the result of the grant determination, the change display is ended when a predetermined change time elapses, and the identification information change that displays the result of the grant determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information. Means and
A first indicating that the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means may be determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination.
The first prior identification means for identifying the prior identification information before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, and
The first suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting the content of the first pre-determination information with a determination probability based on the type of the specific target special information.
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special target specific target by the first prior identification means is started. Before, or before the change display ends, the first suggestion effect execution means for executing the first suggestion effect, and
It is a game machine equipped with
When it is displayed that the special information is a non-granting result that does not correspond to the given information by the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior specific means. In the case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage means,
A selection means for preferentially selecting the special information having the lowest determination probability from the stored special information.
The second pre-specified information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the special information selected by the selection means is the target of the grant determination is the target of the grant determination. The second pre-identification means to identify before becoming
With the second suggestion effect execution decision means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect suggesting the content of the second prior determination information based on the determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information. ,
When the second suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the second suggestion effect, the change display is performed before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display. The second suggestion effect execution means for executing the second suggestion effect before the end of
With
Further, a first ball entry section in which a game ball can enter, a second entry section different from the first entry section, and a second entry section.
A distribution means capable of alternately distributing the destination of the game ball that has passed through the predetermined entry port to the first entry portion and the second entry portion.
Equipped with
As the acquired information storage means
When a game ball enters the first ball entry section, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is used.
The first acquisition information storage means for storing up to the first specified number, and
When a game ball enters the second ball entry section, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is used.
A second acquisition information storage means that stores up to the second specified number,
It may be characterized by having.
Further, in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the special information whose determination probability does not become the minimum may be the given information.

According to the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the effect suggesting a predetermined result in advance, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine of each embodiment. The perspective view which shows the main structure of the pachinko machine of each embodiment developed. The perspective view which shows the main structure of the pachinko machine of each embodiment developed. The rear view which shows the structure of the pachinko machine of each embodiment. The front view which shows the structure of the game board of each embodiment (excluding the third embodiment). (A) A front view of the operating port device showing the case where the electric accessory is in the closed state, and (b) a front view of the operating port device showing the case where the electric accessory is in the open state. A partial front view showing the inner frame (resin base) and the game ball launching mechanism. An exploded perspective view of the game ball launch mechanism. Front view of the game ball launch mechanism. (A) is a 1-1 sectional view of FIG. 9, (b) is a 2-2 sectional view of FIG. 9, and (c) is a 3-3 sectional view of FIG. (A) and (b) are schematic vertical sectional views for explaining a support member and a mechanism for driving the support member. An explanatory view (schematic cross-sectional view) for explaining the relationship between a ball feed case member, a ball feed lever, a ball feed support member, a receiving port, and the like in a ball feed device. (A) to (c) are schematic explanatory views (4-4 cross-sectional view of FIG. 12) showing how the game ball is sent out. (A) to (c) are schematic explanatory views (rear view observed from the launch rail side, excluding the base member and the like) showing how the game ball is sent out. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. Explanatory drawing for explaining contents of various counters used for winning or failing lottery. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning / failing table for the low probability mode, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning / failing table for the high probability mode. (A) Explanatory drawing for explaining the distribution table for the first result display unit, (b) Explanatory drawing for explaining the distribution table for the second result display unit, (c) is the variation for the jackpot. An explanatory diagram for explaining the time table, (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the fluctuation time table for deviation, and (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the fluctuation time table for deviation (application example). The explanatory view for demonstrating the structure of the holding ball storage area. The flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control unit. A flowchart showing a winning process for the operating port. A flowchart showing an information acquisition process. A flowchart showing a winning process for thru. A flowchart showing normal processing. A flowchart showing a game time control process. A flowchart showing a data setting process. A flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. A flowchart showing a stop result setting process for a probabilistic jackpot. A flowchart showing a variable display time setting process. A flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. A flowchart showing a process for electric service support. A flowchart showing a process for electric service support. A flowchart showing an electric function opening / closing process. A flowchart showing a return ball detection process. (A) is a schematic front view showing how the game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball, and (b) is a schematic front view of the game ball launching mechanism showing a case where a return ball is generated. (A) to (c) are schematic front views of a game ball launching mechanism showing a case where a return ball is generated. (A) is a flowchart showing the return ball elimination process, and (b) is a schematic front view of the game ball launching mechanism showing how the return ball is eliminated. (A) is a flowchart showing a game ball launch control process, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a modified example in which a part of the game ball launch control process of FIG. 41 (a) is modified. A flowchart showing a launch control process. A time chart showing the relationship between the cancellation operation execution flag, the launch permission signal, the launch cycle, the ball feed motion, and the launch motion. A time chart showing the relationship between the cancellation operation execution flag, the launch permission signal, the launch cycle, the ball feed motion, and the launch motion. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the cancellation operation execution flag of the first embodiment, the launch permission signal, the launch cycle, the ball feed motion, and the launch motion, and (b) is the time showing the characteristics of the modified example 8. chart. An explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the first notice effect among the advance notice effects of the first embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the second notice effect among the notice effects of the first embodiment, and (b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the concept of the target acquired information. The explanatory view for demonstrating the outline of the hold notice of 1st Embodiment. The explanatory view for demonstrating the outline of the hold notice of 1st Embodiment. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the voice lamp control device and the display control device. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the hold notice concerning the upper actuating opening in the MPU of the main control device. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the hold notice concerning the lower operation port in the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the setting process of the hold command. The flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing in MPU of a display control device. Flowchart showing pending command correspondence processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot correspondence setting process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the reach correspondence setting process. (A) is a flowchart showing a non-reach correspondence setting process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a modified example of the jackpot correspondence setting process. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the probability of winning the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the distribution lottery rate, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the probability of winning the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition. A flowchart showing the winning process for a big hit. A flowchart showing a winning process for reach. A flowchart showing a winning process for non-reach. A flowchart showing a variation display control process. A flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. A flowchart showing the setting process of the advance notice effect. A flowchart showing the setting process of the advance notice effect. (A) Explanatory drawing for explaining the occurrence lottery table corresponding to the big hit, (b) Explanatory drawing for explaining the occurrence lottery table corresponding to the loss, (c) To explain the occurrence lottery table corresponding to the reach. (D) Explanatory drawing for explaining the occurrence lottery table corresponding to gasselech. The flowchart which shows the 1st flag erasing process. The flowchart which shows the 2nd flag erasing process. A flowchart showing the second notice effect execution determination process. A flowchart showing the second notice effect execution determination process. (A) is a flowchart showing the effective information determination process for big hits, and (b) is a flowchart showing the effective information determination process. A flowchart showing a process for changing. A flowchart showing a process for changing. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for explaining the content of the advance notice production. (A)-(b) Explanatory drawing for explaining the content of the advance notice production. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rank of the reserved information, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the first embodiment. Explanatory drawing for explaining the condition which the hold information is set as the trigger of execution of the hold notice. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rank of the reserved information in the modified example 4, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the modified example 4. The flowchart which shows the 2nd notice effect execution determination processing of the modification 4. (A) is a flowchart showing the second advance notice effect execution determination process of the modified example 4, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rank of the reserved information in the further modified example of the modified example 4. (A) and (b) are flowcharts showing the first flag erasing process of the modification example 5. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the modified example 8, and (b) and (c) are explanatory views for explaining the modified example 9. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the modified example 9, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the modified example 9. (A) to (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the method for specifying the target acquired information number. The flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing in MPU of the display control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the reach winning process of the second embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the non-reach winning process of the second embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the first flag erasing process according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the second flag erasing process according to the second embodiment. The flowchart which shows the 2nd notice effect execution determination processing of 2nd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are explanatory views which show the modification of the 2nd Embodiment, and (c) are explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the 2nd Embodiment and the 3rd Embodiment. The front view which shows the structure of the game board of 3rd Embodiment. The front view explaining the distribution means of the 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of the third embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. The explanatory view for demonstrating the structure of the holding ball storage area of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the winning process for the operation opening of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the information acquisition process of the third embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the data setting process of the third embodiment. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the setting process of the variation display time of 3rd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating hold notice of 3rd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating hold notice of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for hold notice of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the setting process of the hold command of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the winning process for a big hit of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the establishment winning process for reach of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the establishment winning process for non-reach of the 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the flag erasing process of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the 2nd notice effect execution determination processing of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the 2nd notice effect execution determination processing of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the return ball elimination process of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the time measurement process after the end of the fourth embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the features of the application example of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the return ball detection process of the modified example 11. (A) is a front view of the game ball launching mechanism of the modified example 12, and (b) is a flowchart showing a return ball detection process of the modified example 12. (A) is a front view of the game ball launching mechanism of the modified example 13, and (b) a flowchart showing a return ball detection process of the modified example 13. The flowchart which shows the firing control processing of the modification 14. A time chart showing the relationship between the ball feed stop flag, the cancellation operation execution flag, the launch permission signal, the launch cycle, the ball feed motion, and the launch motion of the modified example 15. The flowchart which shows the return ball detection processing of the modification 15. The flowchart which shows the return ball elimination processing of the modification 15. (A) is a flowchart showing the preparation flag management process of the modified example 15, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of the firing control process of the modified example 15, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the modified example of the modified example 15. is there. The flowchart which shows the game ball launch control processing of the modification 15. (A) is a schematic plan view for explaining the modified example 16, and (b) is a schematic front view for explaining the modified example 17. The schematic plan view for demonstrating the modification 18. (A) is a schematic front view for explaining the modified example 19, (b) is a schematic front view for explaining the modified example 20, and (c) is a schematic front view for explaining the modified example 21. Vertical cross section. (A) is a schematic front view for explaining the modified example 22, and (b) and (c) are schematic plan views for explaining the modified example 22. (A) is a schematic front view for explaining a comparative example, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of FIG. 62 (a). (A) and (b) are schematic front views for explaining the modified example 23. A time chart for explaining a modification 24. (A) is a flowchart showing the in-cycle elapsed time measurement process in the modified example 24, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a changed portion of the content of the return ball elimination process in the modified example 24. (A) and (b) are schematic plan views for explaining a fifth embodiment. (A) is a 5-5 cross-sectional view of FIG. 130 (a), and (b) is a 6-6 cross-sectional view of FIG. 130 (a). (A) is a schematic plan view for explaining a fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic vertical sectional view for explaining a modified example 25. (A) and (b) are schematic front views for explaining the modified example 26. (A) and (b) are schematic vertical sectional views for explaining the modified example 27. (A) and (b) are schematic plan views for explaining the modified example 27.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3.
Is a perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

<Overview of Pachinko Machine 10>
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10.
And a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward.
The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates and the like on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. In the present specification, "front" refers to "a direction approaching the player with respect to the game machine", and "rear" refers to "a direction away from the player with reference to the game machine".

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It is supposed to be movable. In addition, it should be noted.
As shown in FIG. 3, the game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is a cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 1).
By performing the unlocking operation using the unlocking key for (see), each is released.

<Structure on the front side of the game machine main body 12>
Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 has a resin base 21 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11.
It is mainly composed of. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PE formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.
It is in a state of being exposed on the front side of the inner frame 13 through.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like. Further, through gates 35 are provided in the left portion of the center frame 42 (hereinafter referred to as the left-handed region L) and the right portion of the center frame 42 (hereinafter referred to as the right-handed region R), which will be described later. There is.

On the back side of the game board 24, a detection sensor (not shown) is provided corresponding to each of the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating opening 33, and the lower operating opening 34, and the general winning opening 31 is provided.
When a ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by the corresponding detection sensor, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. .. In this case, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out. Is executed, three game balls are paid out when the ball enters the upper operating port 33, and four game balls are paid out when the ball enters the lower operating port 34. Is executed. The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to enhance the advantage of the lower operating port 34 with respect to the upper operating port 33, it is preferable to set a larger number of payouts related to the lower operating port 34 than the number of payouts related to the upper operating port 33. Further, in order to enhance the advantage of the variable winning device 32 with respect to the operating ports 33 and 34, it is preferable to set a larger number of payouts related to the variable winning device 32 than the number of payouts related to the respective operating ports 33 and 34. Further, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, and the general winning opening 31 are all opened upward.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. Also, game board 2
In No. 4, a large number of nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the game area PE after passing through the opening. It also includes aspects that are not discharged from. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out port 37, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 33, the lower operation port 34 or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the upper actuating port 33 and the lower actuating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction, more specifically in the vertical direction, so that the upper operating port 33 faces upward. The lower operating port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The details of the electric accessory 34a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A shows a case where the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state (unsupported state or non-guided state), and FIG. 6B shows a case where the electric accessory 34a is in an open state (supported state or guided state). Shows the case.

The operating port case 33a constituting the upper operating port 33 projects toward the front side, and the lower side length of the operating port case 33a (that is, the left and right width of the lower part of the upper operating port 33) is such that the electric accessory 34a is closed. In some cases, the length is larger than the distance between the left and right electric accessories 34a. Further, when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the distance between the operation port case 33a and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Has been adjusted.

According to the above configuration, the game ball cannot win the lower operating opening 34 in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, and the lower operating opening 34 can be won by opening the electric accessory 34a. In particular, at this time, during the operation in which the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operation port case 33a of the operation port 33 becomes an obstacle, so that the electric accessory 34a operates downward until the electric accessory 34a is sufficiently opened. It is impossible to win a game ball in the mouth 34, and it is possible to win a prize only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully opened. That is, the game ball that has fallen from above hits the side surface of the operating port case 33a and is repelled to the outside, and does not directly win the lower operating port 34. As a result, the electric accessory 34
When a is opened in an extremely short time, it becomes extremely difficult to win a prize in the lower operating port 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued, winning a prize in the lower operating port 34 becomes easy.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are arranged side by side. More specifically, since the electric accessory 34a is arranged side by side in the vertical direction, when the electric accessory 34a is opened, the game ball that has flowed down toward the upper side of the operating port device is moved to the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 33. You can win any of the mouths 34. In other words, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are awarded depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 8A (see FIG. 1) described later. The structure is difficult to aim at. In addition to the configuration in which the operating port case 33a of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the operating port case 33a of the upper operating port 33 may have a two-stage configuration of a narrow upper part and a wide lower part, or upper operation. A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on both the left and right sides of the mouth 33, or an obstacle nail may be planted diagonally below the operating port case 33a.

Here, when the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is the low frequency support mode (described later), the electric accessory 34a per unit time is higher than that in the high frequency support mode (described later). The frequency of opening is relatively low. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, it is difficult to make the lower operating port 34 win a game ball or to make a winning / failing determination based on the winning of the lower operating port 34.

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. The opening / closing door 32b is connected to a drive unit such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 24, and is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. (
When the player wins the transition to the open / close execution state), the game ball can be switched to a predetermined open state in which it is easy to win a prize.

Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened up to a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds), with the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) as one round. There is an aspect to be done.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area PE. The decorative member 39 extends forward from the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further, the window panel 62 The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball can be seen in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

In the main display unit 43, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open / close execution mode (or in the open / close execution mode) due to the jackpot winning, the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode is displayed. Round display unit R for clearly indicating the number of times that is released
S, the first result display unit AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. A second result display unit BS is set to clearly indicate. The first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS constitute a specific example of the identification information changing means. Further, the variation display (for example, the variation display of numbers performed on the 7-segment LED, the blinking display displayed by the LED) executed by the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS is a change display of the identification information. The final stop mode of the identification information is configured by the stop result of the change display (variation display), and as will be described later, the result of the game (whether or not to shift to the open / close mode) is determined by this final stop mode. Etc.) is displayed. Further, a symbol whose variation display and stop display are displayed on the first result display unit AS based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 (first operating port) is referred to as a "first special symbol", and the lower operating port 33
A symbol that is variablely displayed and stopped displayed on the second result display unit BS based on the winning of the (second operating port) may be referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, in the first embodiment, an embodiment in which the first operating port and the second operating port are arranged vertically is illustrated, but even if the vertical positions of the first operating port and the second operating port are reversed, the first operating port The first operating port and the second operating port may be arranged on the left and right.

In the round display unit RS, the display of the number of times of opening is started at the start of the open / close execution mode.
The display ends when the open / close execution mode ends.

In the first result display unit AS, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the upper operating port 33, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit AS and the variable display is displayed. After the is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the second result display unit BS, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the lower operating port 34, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and the variable display is displayed. After the is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the corresponding result display unit AS,
The time when the fluctuation display is started on the BS, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the fluctuation display is stopped corresponds to one game. However, one game is not limited to the above contents.
For example, in a configuration in which a single result display unit is provided and variable display is performed on the single result display unit regardless of whether any of the operating ports 33 and 34 is won, the single result is displayed. The period until the variation display is started on the display unit and the variation display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed is defined as one game.

The accessory display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35. In this case, the accessory display unit 44 performs a variable display of the pattern triggered by a winning of the through gate 35, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the through gate 35. The result of is specified by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, the state shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operating port 34 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are composed of a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device can be used. May be good.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of the symbol. Further, the variable display unit 36 has a symbol display device 4
The center frame 42 is arranged so as to surround 1. This center frame 42
The upper part of the machine extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is not deteriorated due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ..

The design display device 41, together with a display lamp unit 63 (described later) that performs illuminations in the game and a speaker unit 64 (described later) that emits sound effects in the game, produces an effect in the game. A specific example of the device is constructed, and a notice effect is performed. The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. That is, when the first result display unit AS performs the variable display, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display, and when the second result display unit BS performs the variable display, it is displayed. At the same time, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 presets the opening / closing execution mode for the game to shift to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

A first hold lamp unit 45 corresponding to the first result display unit AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided on the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 33 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first holding lamp unit 45. Further, a second holding lamp unit 46 corresponding to the second result display unit BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the lower operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second holding lamp unit 46. As described above, the upper part of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, so that the first
The visibility of the holding lamp unit 45 and the second holding lamp unit 46 is not hindered by the falling of the game ball.

At the bottom of the center frame 42, there is a third holding lamp section 47 corresponding to the accessory display section 44.
Is provided. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is suspended up to 4 times.
The number of hold lamps is displayed by lighting the third hold lamp unit 47. In addition, each hold lamp unit 45 to 47 may be displayed by a part of the symbol display device 41 or the like.

As shown in FIG. 1, a firing handle 8 is attached to the lower right side of the front surface of the game machine main body 12 (front door frame 14).
A is arranged so that it can be rotated. The launch handle 8A includes a touch sensor 87 for detecting that the player is touching the player, and a stop switch 89 operated to stop the launch of the game ball. Further, the launch handle 8A is the launch handle 8
It has a built-in variable resistor 88 for detecting the amount of rotation operation applied to A (see FIG. 16).

To be further described with reference to FIG. 5, the inner rail portion 5A and the outer rail portion 5B are attached to the game board 24, and the inner rail portion 5A and the outer rail portion 5B are arranged substantially in parallel with each other. The guide rail portion 5E is configured so that the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 7A (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PE. The guide rail portion 5E is
It is provided in a substantially arcuate path from the lower center of the game board 24 toward the upper left end side of the game board 24.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game ball launch mechanism 7A is attached below the attachment portion of the game board 24 on the resin base 21. Then, the launch handle 8 provided on the front door frame 14
By operating A, the game ball is launched. Next, the game ball launch mechanism 7A will be described in detail.

<Game ball launch mechanism 7A>
As shown with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8, the game ball launch mechanism 7A has a launch rail 74 that defines the launch direction of the game ball and a game ball at a predetermined launch position 74W (near the lower end of the launch rail 74). It includes a launching device 75 for launching, a ball feeding device 76 for supplying a game ball to the launching position 74W, and a support member 77 for supporting the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 76 at the launching position 74W.
Then, the components of this (launch rail 74, launch device 75, ball feed device 76, support member 7).
7 etc.) is attached to a portion on the lower side of the resin base 21 (inner frame 13) via a metal base member 78. That is, the base member 78 on which the component is mounted is fixed below the attachment portion of the game board 24 on the inner frame 13, so that the component is integrated with the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the base member 78 is an aluminum member formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (the upper end is horizontal, the lower end rises to the left, and the right end extends vertically). Is. Then, by screwing the peripheral side of the base member 78, the resin base 21 (inner frame 13)
It is fixed to. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 11, at a portion of the base member 78 where the support member 77 is mounted, an elongated hole 78a having an obliquely rising rightward shape is provided so as to penetrate the front and back surfaces of the base member 78. ing. In the resin base 21, the elongated hole 21a is also provided at a portion that is aligned in the front-rear direction with the elongated hole 78a.

As shown in FIG. 7, the launch rail 74 is a front portion of the inner frame 13, and is arranged diagonally upward from right to left below the attachment portion of the game board 24 in an inclined manner. Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the launch rail 74 is formed with a groove portion 74M having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and the groove portion 74M is formed.
It is configured so that the front-rear position of the game ball is defined by fitting the game ball into {see FIG. 10 (a)}. Further, the inclination angle of the launch rail 74 (the inclination angle of the groove 74M, the angle formed by the launch path with respect to the horizontal) is about 25 to 35 degrees. Here, the launch rail 74
A specific example of the launch path constructing means is constructed, and the launch path constructing means regulates the launch direction of the game ball.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a passage detection sensor 74b for detecting the passage of the game balls is mounted in the middle of the launch rail 74 (for example, a distance of 3 to 5 game balls from the launch position 74W). Has been done. As the passage detection sensor 74b, for example, a penetration type proximity switch can be used. As shown in FIG. 10B, the proximity switch has a substantially rectangular plate-like outer shape, and the proximity switch includes a detection hole 74c penetrating in the plate thickness direction. This detection hole 74c
Has a size that allows a game ball to pass through, and the axis of the detection hole 74c is substantially parallel to the launch path of the launch rail 74. The detection hole 74c has a substantially hexagonal shape, and one top portion 74d is aligned with the bottom portion 74e of the groove portion 74M of the launch rail 74. Then, the substantially V-shaped groove portion 74M of the launch rail 74 "is the inner wall portion 74g, 7 forming the top portion 74d in the detection hole 74c.
It is roughly flushed with "4h". Therefore, the game ball passing through the launch rail 74 has a detection hole 74.
It is said that it can pass through c.

As the passage detection sensor 74b, a magnetic detection type proximity sensor can be used, and the passage detection sensor 74b converts a change in the magnetic field due to the passage of the game ball through the detection hole (through hole) 74c into an electric signal. , Output to the main control board 201. In this case, the LOW level signal is output when the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect the game ball, and the HI level signal is output when the game ball is detected. Then, the MPU 202 has an input interval of the HI level passage detection signal (first embodiment) and an input time of the HI level passage detection signal (FIG. 113).
The presence or absence of the return sphere can be determined based on the measurement (see the modified example 11 of the above). However, the passage detection sensor 74b may output the HI level signal when the game ball is not detected, and may output the LOW level signal when the game ball is detected. Further, the electric signal may be output only when the game ball is detected. Further, the passage detection sensor 74b is not limited to the proximity sensor, and other types of sensors such as an optical sensor (see the modification 18 described later) may be used. Further, two passage detection sensors are provided on the launch rail 74 along the passage direction of the game ball, and the presence or absence of the return ball is determined depending on which of the two passage detection sensors detects the game ball first. (Refer to the modified example 12 of FIG. 114, the modified example 13 of FIG. 115, and the like).

As shown in FIG. 9, the support member 77 is mounted on the base member 78 at a position above the lower end of the launch rail 74 so as to be movable in an obliquely upward tilting direction. In other words
As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, behind the base member 78, the launch rail 74.
Solenoid 7 is located diagonally above the lower end of the solenoid 7 using a predetermined bracket (not shown).
7a is attached. A part of the plunger 77b protrudes downward from the solenoid 77a, and a transmission member 77d (
For example, the rear ends (approximately rod-shaped) are connected. Then, when the solenoid 77a (built-in coil) is excited, the amount of protrusion of the plunger 77b decreases, and when the excitation of the solenoid 77a (built-in coil) is stopped, the amount of protrusion of the plunger 77b increases.

The transmission member 77d is inserted into the elongated hole 21a of the resin base 21 and the elongated hole 78a of the base member 78 with its rear end arranged in the resin base 21. And the transmission member 77d
The front end portion of the support member 77 is integrated with the back surface of the support member 77. Therefore, the plunger 77b and the support member 77 can be integrally operated via the transmission member 77d. The solenoid 77a is connected to a main control device 81 as a drive control means. Further, in the first embodiment, the solenoid is exemplified as the driving means for driving the support member 77, but the mode of the driving means is not limited to the solenoid. For example, other actuators such as motors can also be used.

In the normal state (when the game ball is supported at the launch position 74W), as shown in FIG. 11A, as shown in FIG. 11A.
The excitation of the solenoid 77a (built-in coil) is stopped, and the amount of protrusion of the plunger 77b is increased. At this time, as shown in FIG. 10C, since the lower end side of the support member 77 is located at the rear upper part of the game ball F arranged at the launch position, the game ball is supported at the launch position.
On the other hand, when a game ball (hereinafter referred to as a return ball) that runs backward on the launch rail 74 occurs, FIG.
As shown in (b), the solenoid 77a is excited to reduce the amount of protrusion of the plunger 77b. Therefore, as shown in the virtual line of FIG. 9, the support member 77 rises, and the support member 77 evacuates from the rear of the game ball F arranged at the launch position 74W. Then, the game ball F on the launch rail 74 is discharged from the lower end of the launch rail 74, passes through a connecting passage (not shown), and is guided to the lower plate 72.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, a space portion 7D is provided between the upper end portion of the launch rail 74 and the lower end portion of the guide rail portion 5E. Rail part 5B
Of these, the inclination angles of the portion BDs constituting the lower end portion side of the guide rail portion 5E are substantially equal. That is, it is launched by the launcher 75, passes through the launch rail 74 to its upper end, and
The game ball F that jumps over the interval portion 7D and reaches the partial BD rolls the outer rail portion 5B and rises the outer rail portion 5B while being pressed against the inner side surface BE of the outer rail portion 5B by centrifugal force. (By being guided by the guide rail portion 5E), it is possible to reach the game area PE. Then, the game ball launched by the launching device 75 but could not jump over the interval portion 7D, or jumps over the interval portion 7D and is guided to the guide rail portion 5E, but the guide rail does not reach the game area PE. The game ball that has returned from the part 5E falls to the interval part 7D as a foul ball. Then, the foul ball that has fallen through the interval portion 7D is discharged to the lower plate 72 through the foul ball passage. The foul ball passage is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 73 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. In the first embodiment, the interval portion 7
The width of D is said to be about 45 mm to 55 mm.

Here, in the present specification, the "return ball" means that the game ball at the launch position 74W is launched by the launching device 75 in the launching direction (direction of the guide rail portion 5E when viewed from the launching device 75 side). It refers to a game ball that cannot complete the 74 and runs backward on the launch rail 74 and returns to the launch position 74W. In particular, as shown in JP-A-2007-130160, etc., the launch rail 74
If is installed on a steep slope (for example, at 50-80 degrees), it is likely that a "return ball" will occur if the launch device 75 gives the game ball a low firing intensity. Also, the launch rail 7
If a subsequent game ball is launched before the "return ball" on 4 returns to the launch position 74W, the return ball may collide with the subsequent game ball, and the return ball may be flipped in the launch direction. When the interval portion 7D is narrow, the launch rail 74 is completed and the guide rail portion 5E is entered, but the guide rail portion 5E runs backward, jumps over the interval portion 7D, and reaches the launch rail 74. Launch rail 7
It may run backwards in 4 and become a "return ball". Then, even when this "return ball" is generated, if the operation of the launch handle 8A is continued, the game balls that continue from the ball feeding device 76 are sequentially sent to the launch rail 74, and a plurality of game balls that continue on the launch rail 74 There is a possibility that pieces (2 pieces, 3 pieces, 4 pieces, 5 pieces, etc.) of game balls will be accumulated. It should be noted that the accumulation of a plurality of game balls on the launch rail 74 may be hereinafter referred to as "ball accumulation" or "ball clogging".

A player who tries to solve such a "ball pool" by himself / herself holds the game ball stored in the upper plate 71 by hand and prevents the game ball from being supplied from the ball feeding device 76 to the launch rail 74. While doing so, the game balls accumulated on the launch rail 74 are repeatedly launched several times with a weak launch intensity (a launch intensity sufficient to reach the interval portion 7D). As a result, it is conceivable that a large number of game balls on the launch rail 74 are sequentially reached at the interval portion 7D, dropped from the interval portion 7D, and discharged to the lower plate 72 through the foul ball passage.

However, if such a measure is taken, not only the game is interrupted and the game cannot be smoothly executed, but also the player is different from the original game (the firing intensity is finely adjusted and the firing rail 74 is used). (Recovering the game ball) is forced to be performed, which is troublesome. In particular, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 200
As shown in Japanese Patent Publication No. 7-130160, when the launch rail 74 is installed on a steep slope,
Even if the firing handle 8A is subjected to a normal rotation operation (a rotation operation normally performed to perform a game instead of a full rotation operation), the game ball in which a ball pool is generated reaches the gap 7D. It is difficult to give the possible firing intensity. Moreover, when the launch rail 74 is installed on a steep slope in this way, if the number of game balls accumulated on the launch rail 74 becomes large, it is practically possible to bring the large number of game balls to the interval portion 7D. It is impossible, and the player cannot solve the "ball jam" by himself. In addition, the "cannot be solved by oneself"
If a situation occurs in "a case where a predetermined profit can be obtained by inserting a game ball into a predetermined part within a time limit (so-called a case where a V acquisition round described later has arrived)", the "profit" that should be originally obtained can be obtained. It is terrible for the player because the "opportunity for acquisition" will be deprived.

Further, even if the launch rail 74 is installed on a steep slope, if the number of game balls accumulated on the launch rail 74 is relatively small, the launch handle 8A is fully rotated to be particularly large from the launch device 75. It is also possible to give a firing intensity. In this case, the launched game ball is driven to the back (deepest part) of the right-handed area R (it is driven with a strength that cannot be won in the winning opening), and the game ball has no benefit to the player (winning, etc.). ), So-called "waste ball". In this way, it is a great loss for the player to generate a "waste ball", so it is desirable to collect the "waste ball" without making it a "waste ball".

If the frequency of "ball pools" is high, or if it is difficult to solve the "ball pools" on your own, it is necessary to have a pachinko hall clerk solve the "ball pools". It becomes. In this case, it is necessary for the pachinko hall clerk to once unlock the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1), open the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13, and remove the return ball from the launch rail 74. Is. In this case, the player stops the game for a while (until the work of removing the return ball is completed, the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, and the cylinder lock 17 is locked). Is required. On the other hand, in the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, since the discharge means is provided and the generation of ball pools can be suppressed regardless of the installation angle of the launch rail 74, the game can proceed smoothly.

As shown in FIG. 8, the launching device 75 is arranged on the base member 78 further below the mounting portion of the support member 77. The launching device 75 is a solenoid type launching device, and is electrically connected to a power supply / launching control device 98 described later. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a plunger 75a having an axial center substantially parallel to the path of the launch rail 74 and a striking portion 75b mounted on the upper end (left end) of the plunger 75a are provided. Then, based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply / emission control device 98, it is possible to repeat excitation / non-excitation at regular time intervals, and "the upper end (left end) of the plunger 75a is the induction rail portion 5E ( It is possible to repeat "advancing (protruding) in the direction of (see FIG. 7)" and "retracting in the direction away from the guidance rail portion 5E" (reciprocating in a direction substantially parallel to the path of the launch rail 74). ..

Further, the protrusion speed of the plunger 75a is adjusted based on the amount of operation of the launch handle 8A.
The striking force (the rate of fire and the amount of flight of the launching ball) that the launching device 75 loads on the game ball is adjusted. That is, since the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 8A is detected through the variable resistor 88, the game ball is launched with a firing intensity corresponding to the detected rotation operation amount. The launching device 75 is not a solenoid type launching device, and for example, a launching device using a motor and a launching mallet may be used.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the normal state (when the game ball is supported at the launch position 74W), an empty space 77u is provided below the support member 77, and the rear center portion of the game ball F is empty. It is open to the rear (in the direction of the launcher 75) through the space 77u. And
When the launching device (solenoid) is excited, the striking portion 75b enters the empty space 77u and enters the empty space 77u.
By hitting the rear center of the game ball F, the game ball F is launched.

Next, the ball feeding device 76 will be described. The ball feeding device 76 is a device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 71 one by one to the launch position 74W (near the lower end of the launch rail 74). As shown in FIG. 8, the ball feed device 76 includes a ball feed case member 76a, a ball feed solenoid 76b, and a ball feed lever 76c. Further, the ball feed device 76 (ball feed case member 76a) is supported by the base member 78 by using the ball feed support member 79a. Here, the ball feed support member 79a is a member made of fat that is long to the left and right, and is attached to the front surface portion of the base member 78 and near the upper edge thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 12, the ball feed case member 76a has a substantially box shape (for example, made of resin) that is open to the rear, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 71 flow down to the launch rail 74 side. It functions as a passage forming member. Further, a ball feed lever 76c and a ball feed solenoid 76b are incorporated in the ball feed case member 76a (see FIGS. 13 and 14).
Further, on the left end side of the ball feed case member 76a, a receiving port 76d capable of receiving the game ball stored in the upper plate 71 inside the ball feed case member 76a is provided. Then, the game ball F guided from the ball dish portion 71 is introduced into the ball feed case member 76a from the receiving port 76d.

As shown in FIG. 12, the game ball F entered from the receiving port 76d is a portion inside the ball feeding case member 76a and located behind the lower right corner of the receiving port 76d (hereinafter referred to as a standby position).
It is guided to 76e. That is, the entrance 7 is behind the lower edge of the entrance 76d and behind the lower left corner.
Floor portions 76f and 76g that regulate the guiding direction of the game ball received in 6d are provided. Of these, since the floor portion 76g behind the lower left corner portion is inclined downward to the right, the game ball that has reached the floor portion 76g is guided to the standby position 76e. In addition, the floor portion 7 behind the lower edge portion of the receiving port 76d
Since 6f is inclined backward, the game ball that has reached the floor portion 76f is guided backward. Then, the game ball received at the reception port 76d is received by the reception port 76d, guided backward by the floor portion 76f, and then guided to the right by the floor portion 76g and the course change protrusion 79g described later. The standby position 76e is reached. That is, the entrance 76d is the game ball F.
The floor portions 76f and 76g and the course change protrusion 79g guide the game balls that have entered from the reception entrance 76d to the standby position 76e.

At the right end of the ball feed support member 79a, as shown in FIG. 8, mounting portions 79b that project forward in a U shape and form mounting holes that penetrate vertically are provided at two locations at intervals in the vertical direction. Has been done. Further, at the right end of the ball feed case member 76a, a mounted portion 76i that can be engaged with the mounting portion 79b is formed in a shaft shape that protrudes downward from a support surface having a thickness in the vertical direction. Then, at the right end of the ball feed case member 76a, the support surface of the mounted portion 76i is supported on the upper surface of the mounting portion 79b, and the shaft portion of the mounted portion 76i is inserted into the mounting portion 79b to feed the ball. The case member 76a is rotatably supported with its right end as a rotation fulcrum.

At the left end of the ball feed support member 79a, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12, the engagement receiving portion 79e
Is provided. Further, the engaging claw portion 76j protrudes rearward from the left end portion of the back surface of the ball feed case member 76a, and the ball feed support member 79a overlaps the left end portion of the ball feed support member 79a with the left end portion of the ball feed case member 76a. When the ball feed case member 76a is pushed in, the engaging claw portion 76j elastically engages with the engaging receiving portion 79e. As a result, the ball feed case member 76a is fixed to the ball feed support member 79a.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 12, the left side of the front wall portion 79f of the ball feed support member 79a protrudes greatly to the front side, and the amount of protrusion gradually decreases toward the right side.
9 g and a ball receiving rear side wall portion 79h which is continuous with the right side portion of the course change protrusion 79 g and is formed one step higher than the periphery are provided. Of these, 79 g of the course change protrusion is the floor portion 7.
A game ball that is above 6 g and rolls on the floor portion 76 g is provided at a slidable position.
Then, as described above, the traveling direction of the game ball guided backward by the floor portion 76g is changed to the right side, and the game ball is guided to the standby position 76e. Further, the ball receiving rear side wall portion 79h is located behind the standby position 76e, and the game ball guided to the standby position 76e is placed on three sides together with the lower end edge side of the floor portion 76g and the upper edge portion 76w of the ball feed lever 76c. Support from.

As shown in FIG. 8, the ball feed lever 76c includes a lever body 76k, a shaft support portion 76m provided at the right end of the lever body 76k, and a ball receiving portion 76n provided at the left end of the lever body 76k. A metal plate 76p mounted on the upper surface of the lever body 76k is provided. Further, the metal plate 76p is provided at a portion on the upper surface of the lever body 76k between the shaft support portion 76m and the ball receiving portion 76n. The ball receiving portion 76n is configured in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front, and is internally 1
It forms a space that can accept only the game ball of the ball (see FIG. 13).

The lever body 76k is swingably supported by the ball feed case member 76a by using the support pin 76r inserted into the shaft support portion 76n. Further, the ball receiving portion 76n is opened in a U shape on the left side and is opened in the front-rear direction in front view, and can accept one game ball. Further, the upper surface of the bottom portion 76s of the ball receiving portion 76n has a downward inclination toward the rear (direction toward the launch rail 74).

As shown in FIG. 13, the ball feed solenoid 76b is a metal plate 76p of the ball feed lever 76c.
It is installed facing the. Then, as shown in FIG. 13A, when the ball feed solenoid 76b is not energized, the ball feed lever 76c is lowered by its own weight so that the left side portion of the ball feed lever 76c is lowered around the support pin 76r. Rotate. However, when the left side portion of the ball feed lever 76c is rotated so as to descend, the ball feed case member 76a
The regulation protrusion 76t provided on the ball feed lever 76c supports the ball feed lever 76c from below. That is, the regulation protrusion 76t protrudes from the back surface of the front wall portion 76u constituting the ball feed case member 76a, and limits the moving range of the ball feed lever 76c. The left end of the ball feed lever 76c is the regulation protrusion 76.
The position of the ball feed lever 76c when supported by t is hereinafter referred to as a "lowering position".

When the left end of the ball feed lever 76c is supported by the regulation protrusion 76t, the ball feed solenoid 76b is energized and a magnetic force is generated. As shown in FIG. 13B, the ball feed lever 76c is supported. The metal plate 76p rotates about the pin 76r in the direction approaching the ball feed solenoid 76b. As a result, the left end side of the ball feed lever 76c rises, and the position of the ball feed lever 76c at this time is hereinafter referred to as an "elevation position". By setting the ball feed solenoid 76b to the energized state or the non-energized state in this way, the ball feed lever 76c can swing with reference to the support pin 76r.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, the ball receiving rear side wall portion 79h is located behind the ball receiving portion 76n when the ball feed lever 76c is in the raised position, and the ball receiving portion 76n and the ball receiving rear side wall portion 79h are located. Side wall 7
The game ball cannot enter between 9h. Further, as shown in FIG. 13C, there is no ball feed support member 79a on the lower side of the ball receiving rear side wall portion 79h, and the direction of the launch rail 74 (launch rail 74 mounted on the base member 78). It is open to the public.

Next, the ball feeding operation performed by the ball feeding device 76 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. Here, in FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (c), the game balls F1 that have entered the ball feed case member 76a from the receiving port 76d are taken into the ball receiving portion 76n one by one by the ball feeding lever 76c and are set at the launch position. In order to explain how the ball feed case member 76a is supplied, it is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the ball feed case member 76a is cut in a plane parallel to the base member 78 (4-4 cross section in FIG. 12). (C
) Shows the case where the ball feed solenoid 76b is in the non-energized state, and FIG. 13B shows the case where the ball feed solenoid 76b is in the energized state. Further, also in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the game balls F1 entering the ball feed case member 76a from the receiving port 76d are taken into the ball receiving portion 76n one by one by the ball feeding lever 76c and supplied to the launch position. It is a rear view seen from the rear of the game machine, and shows the relationship between the launch rail 74, the ball feed lever 76c, and the ball feed case member 76a, in order to explain the situation. Further, FIGS. 14A and 14C show the ball feed solenoid 7.
When 6b is in the non-energized state, FIG. 14B shows a case where the ball feed solenoid 76b is in the energized state. Further, in FIGS. 14 (a) to 14 (c), the virtual line displayed in front of the receiving port 76d (the time and effort in the drawing) shows the course change protrusion 79g and the ball receiving rear side wall portion 79h.

As described above, the game ball F1 guided to the standby position 76e has the lower end edge of the floor portion 76g, the upper edge portion 76w of the ball receiving portion 76n of the ball feeding lever 76c in the descending position, and the ball receiving rear side wall portion. 7
At 9h, it becomes a state of being supported from three sides (a state of being supported from three sides and not descending). Here, as shown in FIG. 13A, the ball receiving portion 76n of the ball feed lever 76c includes an opening 76v that opens to the left side, and this opening 76v is directed in the direction of the floor portion 76g described above. ing. However, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A, when the ball feed lever 76c is in the lowered state, the upper edge portion 76w of the ball receiving portion 76n and the lower end portion of the floor portion 76g Since the distance is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, it is stopped at the standby position 76e.

From this state, when the ball feed solenoid 76b is energized and the ball feed lever 76c is in the ascending state, as shown in FIGS. 13 (b) and 14 (b), the upper edge 7 of the ball receiving portion 76n
Since 6w rises and the distance between the upper edge portion 76w and the lower end portion of the floor portion 76g slightly exceeds the diameter of the game ball, the game ball F1 (standby position 76e) located at the head of the floor portion 76g Game ball)
Enters the ball receiving portion 76n. However, as described above, since the ball receiving portion 76n forms a space in which only one game ball can enter, the game ball F2 following the game ball F1 is the lower end portion (standby position 76e) of the floor portion 76g. ) Stops.

As shown in FIGS. 13 (b) and 14 (b), when the ball feed solenoid 76b is energized, the ball receiving rear side wall portion 79h is arranged behind the game ball F1 housed in the ball receiving portion 76n. Therefore, although the bottom portion 76s (see FIG. 8) of the ball receiving portion 76n has an upper surface inclined rearward (in the direction of the launch rail 74), the game ball F1 is larger than the ball receiving portion 76n. Down (down)
Flowing down to the launch rail 74 side) is restricted. Ball feed solenoid 76b in this state
Is in the non-energized state, the ball feed lever 76 is shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 14 (c).
c rotates to the descending position. At this time, the ball receiving portion 76n moves below the rear side wall portion 79h, and the ball receiving portion 76n moves.
Since the rear of the ball receiving portion 76n is opened, the game ball F1 housed in the ball receiving portion 76n moves along the upper surface of the bottom portion 76s and moves to the lower end side (launch position 74W) of the launch rail 74. ..

As shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 14 (c), when the ball feed solenoid 76b is in a non-energized state, the ball of the next game ball F2 is formed by the upper edge portion 76w of the ball receiving portion 76n. The flow to the receiving part 76n is regulated. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the on / off operation of the ball feed solenoid 76b, the game balls F (F1, F2, F3, etc.) are placed in the standby position 76 one by one.
After being temporarily held by e, it will be guided to the launch position 74W. The on / off of the ball feed solenoid 76b and the excitation / non-excitation of the launching device 75 (solenoid) are configured to be synchronized with each other. That is, based on the operation of the launch handle 8A and when the condition for launching the game ball F2, which will be described later, is satisfied, first, one game ball F2 is launched by the ball feed device 76 on the launch rail 74. It is supplied above and held at the launch position 74W by the positioning member 77. After that, the launching device 75 is driven and controlled, and the game ball F2 is launched toward the game area PE.

<Structure of front door frame 14>
The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially polygonal shape, a substantially elliptical shape, or a substantially perfect circular shape whose upper portion is rounded in an arc shape, and the above-mentioned window panel 62 is fitted therein. Window panel 6
No. 2 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. Further, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided around the window portion 61. An indicator lamp unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various lamp units. Further, on both the left and right sides of the indicator lamp unit 63, speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 7A side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 72 does not reach the game area PE (see FIG. 2) among the game balls launched by the game ball launching mechanism 7A and the function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 71. It has a function as a saucer for storing a game ball (so-called foul ball) discharged from the gap portion 74D and a game ball (return ball) that has returned from the launch rail 74. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through the passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

<Structure on the back side of the game machine body 12>
Next, the configuration on the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), the main control device 81
And the voice lamp control device 82 is mounted.

The main control device 81 includes a main control board that controls the main control of the game and a power failure monitoring board that monitors the power supply, and the main control board and the power failure monitoring board are formed in a board box 83 made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and constructed. The substrate box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. These box bases and box covers are separated prevention means (or
It is inseparably connected by a box coupling portion 85 as a coupling means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Then, since they are inseparably connected by these box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 8 is opened when the internal space of the substrate box 83 is opened.
It is configured to require destruction or partial excision of 3. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling treatment.

Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box connecting portion 85, the box base and the box cover can be connected. It is designed so that it cannot be opened and is connected to the box cover.
The joining process by the box joining portion 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions 85. Then, when the board box 83 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box connecting portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box connecting portion 85 are used. Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of the opening of the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 83 has been opened illegally by looking at the board box 83.

A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 83 so as to project laterally. These coupling pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and are bonded between the substrate box 83 and the mounting base by the coupling pieces and the coupling pieces. Processing is done. As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, if the seal is peeled off from the sticking point,
The adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

The voice lamp control device 82 includes a voice lamp control board that controls voice and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the voice lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed in a substrate box 84.

As shown in FIG. 4, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism unit 92 and a control device collecting unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91.
The back pack 91 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the voice lamp control device 82, and the like from the rear. doing.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and is a tank 95 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the amusement park are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. It is equipped with a payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game ball paid out from the payout device 96 is discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism unit 92 is mounted with a back pack board provided with a power switch for performing an AC power ON operation and a power OFF operation, for example, while supplying a main power source of AC 24 volts.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal plate 99 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when the game balls are insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. Output terminal for signal output each time the door frame 14 is rented, output terminal for signal output when the game machine main body 12 is opened, output terminal for signal output when the front door frame 14 is opened, state transition such as opening / closing execution mode An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal at the time (or during the transition to the state). And through these output terminals
A signal regarding the state of the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine.

The control device collective unit 93 includes a payout control device 97, a power supply, and a launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply and launch control device 98 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is housed in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by accommodating a power supply and a launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and further, the player determines The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the launch handle 8A. Specifically, the drive control of the launching device 75 (solenoid constituting the launching device 75) constituting the game ball launching mechanism 7A and the ball feeding device 76 (ball feeding solenoid 76b) is executed.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 98 is provided with a power supply switch. By operating the power switch, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between the on state (on state) and the cutoff state (off state). Further, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and holding function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. The details of the electrical configuration related to the hold notice will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

The MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81.
The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 202, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. It is an element in which a certain RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the function of the ROM 203 or the function of the RAM 204 is provided as another element.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. MPU20
A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211g, 74b, etc. provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of 2. In this case, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. In addition, various detection sensors 211a to 211g,
As a part of 74b, a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, and a lower operating port 34
A plurality of detection sensors provided in a winning-winning ball-entry unit (payout-compatible ball-entry unit) such as a through gate 35 are connected, and a winning judgment (ball-entry) to each ball-entry part is made by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. Judgment) is performed. Further, in the MPU 202, the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 3
The jackpot generation lottery is executed based on the winning of 4 and the support generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 35.

A solenoid 77a (a drive source for the support member 77), a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and a voice lamp control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU 202. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the result of the prize winning determination to the prize-winning ball winning unit. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when the winning of the general winning opening 31 is specified, 10
A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output, and when a prize is specified for the variable winning device 32, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output, and the upper operating port. 33
When a prize is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output.
When a prize is specified for the lower operating port 34, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a fluctuation command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the voice lamp control device 82. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 22 of the ROM 203
5 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34, and a main display. The unit 43 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the MPU202 is opened and closed so that the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in the open / close execution mode.
The drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in. Further, when the electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b is executed in the MPU 202 so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. In addition, for each game round, MPU202
The display control of the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the main display unit 43 is executed, and the main display unit 4 is in the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 32.
The display control of the round display unit RS in 3 is executed.

The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and launch control device 98, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 is based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.
The payout device 96 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls.

Details of the power supply, the launch control device 98, and the like will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. The power supply and launch control device 98 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, on the power supply / launch control board 98a constituting the power supply and launch control device 98, FIG.
As shown in the above, a power supply circuit 98b is provided, and the power supply circuit 98b provides the main control board 201, the payout control device 97, and the like with the required operating power based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply. Along with generating, the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. Further, in addition to the power supply circuit 98b, the power supply and the launch control board 98a are provided with a launch control circuit 98c that controls the launch of the game ball. Then, the game ball launch mechanism 7A is driven when the "predetermined launch conditions" shown below are satisfied.

Further, a firing handle 8A is connected to the input side of the input / output port of the power supply / firing control board 98a. Specifically, a touch sensor 87 for detecting that the firing handle 8A is touched by the player, and a variable resistor 8 for detecting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 8A.
8 and a stop switch 89 which is operated to stop the firing of the game ball even when the firing handle 8A is operated by the player are connected. Further, on the output side of the input / output port, a launching device 75 (solenoid constituting the launching device 75) and a ball feeding device 76 (ball feeding device 76)
The ball feed solenoid 76b) is connected, and these launch devices 75 and the ball feed device 76 are driven and controlled by the power supply / launch control device 98 (launch control circuit 98c).

Further, the main control device 81 is connected to the input / output port of the power supply / emission control board 98a. The detection signals from the touch sensor 87 and the stop switch 89 are input to the main control device 81 via the power supply / emission control device 98. The details will be described later, but in the main control device 81, whether or not to launch is set based on these signals, and a signal indicating that is used as a power source.
It is configured to be input to the launch control device 98. That is, the power supply / launch control device 98 (launch control circuit 98c) controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 7A based on the information from the main control device 81 and the launch handle 8A.

The launch control circuit 98c described above includes a transmission circuit 98d that satisfies the conditions and a launch permission receiving circuit 9
8e and IC98f for launching are provided. Of these, the transmission circuit 98d that satisfies the conditions
Is the MP of the main control device 81 when the predetermined firing conditions of the game ball are satisfied.
It has a function of transmitting a condition satisfying signal of a predetermined signal form to the U202. Further, the receiving circuit 98e for permission to launch is "from the transmitting circuit 98d for satisfying the conditions to the MPU2 of the main control device 81.
"One condition is that the HI level condition satisfying signal is transmitted to 02", and "M
The HI level launch permission signal (signal corresponding to the launch permission) transmitted from the PU 202 ”is received. Further, the launch permission receiving circuit 98e has a function of continuously supplying a signal corresponding to the launch permission signal to the launch IC 98f when the launch permission signal is received.

The MPU 202 newly starts transmitting the HI level emission permission signal each time it starts receiving the HI level condition satisfying signal, and launches the HI level when the reception of the HI level condition satisfying signal is completed. End the transmission of the permission signal. Here, "touch sensor 87"
The condition is satisfied when "a signal indicating that the firing handle 8A is being touched by the player is not received from the stop switch 89" and "a signal indicating that the player is not manually operated is not received from the stop switch 89". The transmission circuit 98d transmits an HI level condition satisfaction signal (a signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction) to the MPU 202 of the main control device 81.

When the launch IC 98f receives the HI level launch permission signal or the corresponding signal from the launch permission receiving circuit 98e, the launch IC 98f is directed to the launch device 75 of the game ball launch mechanism 7A and the ball feed device 76, respectively. It has a function to output a drive signal on a regular basis. in this case,
The launch IC 98f outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and its output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feed device 76 than in the launch device 75 so that the game ball is launched after one game ball is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 74. (See FIG. 43).

The larger the amount of rotation of the firing handle 8A, the stronger the firing strength of the game ball by the launching device 75. In this case, the launch handle 8A is provided with a variable resistor 88 as an operation amount detecting means for detecting the operation amount of the handle portion, and the launch IC 98f is provided with a launch device 75 through a voltage input from the variable resistor 88. The voltage of the drive signal supplied to the vehicle is adjusted to adjust the firing intensity.

To be further described with reference to FIG. 15, the voice lamp control device 82 is provided with each hold lamp unit 45 to the variable display unit 36 based on various commands input from the main control device 81.
It drives and controls the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided on the 47 and the front door frame 14, and also controls the display control device 212.

In the display control device 212, based on the command input from the voice lamp control device 82,
The display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed. In this case, the voice lamp control device 82 determines the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 81. , Determine whether or not reach occurs and the content of reach production.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 17A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the above symbol row Z1, "1" to ""
Nine kinds of main symbols of "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1
And the lower symbol row Z3 is composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2,
Nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then the main symbol of "9" and "1"
The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged with the main symbol of, and the sub symbol is 1 between each of these main symbols.
They are arranged one by one. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and 20
It is composed of individual symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. In addition, FIG. 17
As shown in (b), on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become.

Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variation display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is displayed as stopped. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. To.

Further, in the case of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result described later, the variation display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed in the state where the combination of the symbols with different numbers is formed, and then the explicit moving image is displayed. It is supposed to be displayed. In addition, in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, which will be described later, all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with different numbers is formed.
The variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, and then the common moving image is displayed. The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate.

Further, a first hold display area Ga is set on the left side at the lower part of the display screen G.
A second hold display area Gb is set on the right side of the lower part of the display screen G. Of these, in the first hold display area (non-priority side hold display area) Ga, the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 are in the left-right direction. The sections are displayed so that they are installed side by side. Specifically, when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the first holding display area Ga includes the first unit holding display areas Ga1 and the second. The unit hold display area Ga2, the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set. For example, when the number of holdings is one when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1, and the game ball is placed in the upper operating port 33. When the number of reserved images is four, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Ga1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4. The display contents in the first reserved display area Ga will be described in detail later.

Further, in the second hold display area (priority side hold display area) Gb, the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operating port 34 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The section is displayed so that it will be displayed. Specifically, when the game ball wins the lower operating port 34, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the second holding display area Gb includes the first unit holding display areas Gb1 and the second. The unit hold display area Gb2, the third unit hold display area Gb3, and the fourth unit hold display area Gb4 are set. For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball wins the lower operating port 34 is 1, the holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Gb1, and the game ball wins the lower operating opening 34. When the number of reserved images is 4, the reserved image is displayed in all of the 1st unit reserved display area Gb1 to the 4th unit reserved display area Gb4. The display contents in the second reserved display area Gb will be described in detail later.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot generation lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 43, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, a display setting of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a lottery for generating jackpots, and a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the first result display unit AS of the main display unit 43. And the second result display unit BS and the fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time in the symbol display device 41 are used. Further, the electric accessory 34 of the lower operating port 34
It is decided to use the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not a is set to the electric service open state.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the update value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. The lottery counter buffer 2
It is stored in 31 as appropriate. The RAM 204 is provided with a hold ball storage area 232 including a first result display unit hold area Ra, a second result display unit hold area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total hold number storage area. Then, in the reserved ball storage area 232, the upper operating port 3
Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in chronological order according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower operating port 34 or the lower operating port 34.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI
Is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33, and the second RAM 204 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34.
It is stored in the hold area Rb for the result display unit.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 221 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, as the pass / fail tables, the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) in FIG. 19 (a) and the pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high) in FIG. 19 (b). Probability pass / fail information group) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability corresponding state) and a high probability mode (high probability corresponding state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 19A, the value of the random number that wins the big hit (that is, the winning information) is two. .. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 19B, the number of random numbers (that is, winning information) for winning the jackpot is 21. Is. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary. Further, in the present embodiment, common information is provided for the number of winning random numbers in the low-probability mode and the number of winning random numbers in the high-probability mode, but the winning is achieved in the low-probability mode. It is also possible not to provide common information between the number of random numbers and the number of winning random numbers in the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in the upper operating port 33, R
It is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of AM204, and is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results are (1) an mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2).
By providing differences in the three conditions of the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends, a plurality of jackpot results Is set.

The mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is high so that the frequency of winning the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high or low. Frequent winning mode and low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed 15 times (high-frequency use times) from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high-frequency time). ) Elapses, or until the number of winnings in the large winning opening 32a reaches 10 (high frequency number). On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed twice (the number of times for low frequency use) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (0.2 sec (number of times for low frequency)).
It is continued until the elapse of the low frequency time) or until the number of winnings in the large winning opening 32a reaches 6 (low frequency number).

In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, in the situation where the launching handle 8A is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 7a is such that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec. Drive controlled. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low-frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

The number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, 1
The opening limit time for one opening and the opening limit number for one opening are variable in the high-frequency winning mode from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of winning a prize is high, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 32 is not substantially won in the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode. It is good to have a configuration. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, for one opening. The product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the open limit number may be set longer than the open limit time. Further, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one large winning opening 32a are not as described above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former. It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a prize is not substantially generated in the variable winning device 32.

As a support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34, the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is compared in a situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening state per unit time is relatively high and low. And are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric accessory open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more opening. The time is set long. In this case, when the electric accessory open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, the electric accessory 34a is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be held after one electric accessory opening lottery is set is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode. Has been done.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 34 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the lower actuation port 3
The probability that a prize will be generated in the upper operating port 33 is higher than that in 4, but in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a prize will be generated in the lower operating port 34 is higher than that in the upper operating port 33. Then, when a prize is won in the lower operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is held is shortened. (That is, shortening the one-time variable display time on the accessory display unit 44) and increasing the winning probability, by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions, the low frequency support mode can be obtained. The advantage of the high frequency support mode may be enhanced.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, as the distribution table, the distribution table for the first result display unit of FIG. 20A (first).
The distribution information group) and the distribution table (second distribution information group) for the second result display unit of FIG. 20B are set.

In the distribution table for the first result display unit, as shown in FIG. 20A, as the distribution destination of the game result, the normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence special game result) and the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result (
Unspecified high probability correspondence game result or latent probability change state), explicit 2R probability change jackpot result (
Explicit high probability correspondence game result or sudden probability change state) and 15R probability change jackpot result (high probability correspondence special game result) are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (low probability corresponding special gaming state).

As for the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. The result. In other words, the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (unspecified high probability corresponding gaming state).

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. .. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (
This is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the explicit high probability corresponding game state).

The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (high probability corresponding special gaming state).

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state means a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 20A, in the distribution table for the first result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result. Ori, "
"10 to 14" corresponds to the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, and "15 to 19" corresponds to the explicit 2R.
It corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, and "20 to 29" corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, since the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result are set as the probability variation jackpot results, the mode of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing the three types of probability variation jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest, and the opening / closing execution is executed. In the mode, the low-frequency winning mode is set, but in the support mode, the high-frequency support mode is set. The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is the next highest, and in the open / close execution mode, the low-frequency winning mode is set and the previous mode is maintained in the support mode. The unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is the lowest. As a result, the monotonousness of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In particular, in the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the win / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, but the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. That is, when an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the normal game state, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, but the support mode is maintained in the low frequency support mode. Then, as a game state, even though the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is common to the low frequency support mode, it is possible to create a game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode. It is possible to predict whether the winning / failing lottery mode is a high-probability mode or a low-probability mode, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display unit, as shown in FIG. 20B, only the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set as the distribution destinations of the game results. Then, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the distribution mode of the game result when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 and the winning to the lower operating port 34. It is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on.

Here, regardless of whether the distribution table is for the first result display unit or the distribution table for the second result display unit, the probability that the probability variation jackpot result will be the same when the jackpot is won is the same. There is. That is, in the distribution table for the first result display unit, the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result,
The number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 20. Further, in the distribution table for the second result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 20. Therefore, the probability that the winning / failing lottery mode will be the high probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the jackpot is won based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. It is the same as in the case of (specifically, 2/3). However, if the jackpot is won based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 and the probability variation jackpot result occurs, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is always obtained, whereas the jackpot is won based on the winning of the upper operating port 33. If the result is a probabilistic jackpot, 1/4
With a probability of, an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained, and with a probability of 1/2, a 15R probability variation jackpot result is obtained. That is, the probability of occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player among the probability variation jackpot results, is higher when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. It will be higher than if you win a big hit based on the prize.

In addition, in the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, although the winning / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode as described above, the support mode maintains the previous mode, so that the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the explicit result When compared with the 2R probability variation jackpot result,
Since the electric accessory 34a is less likely to be in the open state, the chance of receiving the payout of the game ball is reduced, and the possibility that the distribution lottery is performed based on the distribution table for the second result display unit is reduced.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player between the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that a prize will be generated in the lower operating port 34 among the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, and accordingly, the winning frequency of the lower operating port 34 will be increased accordingly. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode increases.

If the result is lost in the winning / failing lottery, the mode does not shift to the open / close execution mode, and the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203. However, in the game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the game machine in which the stop display result after the variation display is the special display result, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variation display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started. This is a display state for the player to think that the display state is a variable display state in which the special display result is likely to occur before the display is performed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is established. It is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to end the variable display of the symbol, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may be formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 17 will be described in detail. Either is valid when the variable display of the symbol is first completed in the upper symbol row Z1 and then the variable display of the symbol is completed in the lower symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the middle symbol column Z2. It becomes a reach display by being told. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of the symbol is finished.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. In addition, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. You may.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is the first of the main display unit 43.
It is used in the MPU 202 to determine the fluctuation display time in the result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS and the fluctuation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit B
The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the start of the variation display in S and when the symbol display device 41 determines the variation display time (variation pattern) of the symbol.

More specifically, the variation type counter CS is a loop counter used to determine the change time of the identification information (variation time of the identification information), and the MPU 201 is an execution area of the reserved ball storage area 232 at the start of the variation. The variation display time is determined with reference to the variation type counter CS stored in the ROM 203 and the variation display time table stored in the ROM 203. That is, the main control device 81 determines the fluctuation display time in the first result display unit AS when the fluctuation is performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, and when the fluctuation is performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. 2nd result display unit B
The variable display time in S is determined. Further, the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 use the symbol display device 41 from among the variation modes capable of displaying variations in the variation display time based on the variation display time determined by the main control device 81. The details of the variation mode of the symbol to be displayed are determined. Then, according to the determined variation mode, the display control device 82 is the symbol display device 41.
The symbol is fluctuated and displayed, and the sound is output from the speaker (voice output device) according to the fluctuating display, and the lamp units 45 to 47 and 63 are turned on and blinked.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the variable display time table to be referred to when determining the variable display time, the jackpot variable display time table {FIG. 20 (c)} to be referred to when the jackpot result is obtained in the winning / losing lottery, and the winning / failing lottery. A variation display time table for deviation {FIG. 20 (d)}, which is referred to when the result of deviation is obtained, is prepared. In the first embodiment, a common table is used as the jackpot variable display time table and the missed variable display time table regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode (in the case of the high probability mode and in the case of the low probability mode). Although the case to be used is illustrated, a variable display time table different for each winning / failing lottery mode may be used as at least one display time table of the jackpot variable display time table and the missed variable display time table. In this case, for example, the fluctuation time determined using the fluctuation display time table for the high probability mode tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time determined using the fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode. May be good.

Further, in the first embodiment, the jackpot variable display time table and the off variable display time table are common tables regardless of the support mode (in the case of the high frequency support mode and in the case of the low frequency support mode). Although the case of using is illustrated, a variable display time table different for each support mode may be used as at least one display time table of the variable display time table for big hits and the variable display time table for misses. In this case, for example, the fluctuation time determined using the variable display time table for the high-frequency support mode tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time determined using the variable display time table for the low-frequency support mode. There may be.

Next, a specific example of the variable display time table will be illustrated with reference to FIGS. 20 (c) and 20 (d). First, FIG. 20C is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot variation display time table stored in ROM 203. This jackpot variation pattern table is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result). Referenced 15R jackpot group (group) and 2R referenced in the case of 2R probability variation jackpot (explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result)
It is divided into probabilistic jackpot groups (groups). Then, the value of the variable type counter CS is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is the jackpot random number value at the start of fluctuation, the execution is performed according to the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the area is determined. Here, referring to the 15R jackpot group (group), the fluctuation display time is the first hour (30 seconds) or the second hour (60 seconds) longer than the first hour.
Seconds). Then, the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation display time is
When the count value of the variation type counter CS is any of 0 to 39, the variation display time is set to the first hour (30 seconds), and when the count value is any of 40 to 198, the variation display time is the second hour. (60 seconds). Further, when the variation display time is set to the first time (30 seconds), the variation effect is performed in the mode of normal reach by the control of the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212. Further, when the variable display time is set to the second time (60 seconds), the voice lamp control device 8
Under the control of 2 and the display control device 212, the variation effect is performed in the mode of super reach.

The normal reach is a reach with a short fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which "the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2" are aligned after the short reach (so-called symbols are aligned at the stop of bitterness). In addition, the super reach has a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach, and then the "middle symbol row Z"
It is a variation pattern in which "the symbols in 2" are aligned (for example, reach that develops from long reach or normal reach). As for the variable display time table for the 15R jackpot result, it is selected as the 15R probability variation jackpot result (15R probability variation jackpot) or the normal jackpot result (15R probability variation jackpot).
Since this is the case of 15R normal jackpot), it is easier to select super reach than normal reach in order to give the player a sense of expectation. For this reason, the super reach is a reach with a higher expectation of obtaining a jackpot result than the normal reach. However, in the present embodiment, the 15R probability variation jackpot result (15R probability variation jackpot) or the normal jackpot result (15R)
Since the normal reach is also selected even in the case of a normal jackpot), it is possible to provide playability in which a jackpot can be expected from any reach.

As for the normal reach and the super reach executed by the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212, many different production contents are prepared even if the fluctuation time is the same. For example, in addition to the normal reach where no character is displayed, 2 on the effective line L1
A reach is prepared in which a predetermined character or character information is displayed once or a plurality of times when two symbols become the same symbol and reach a reach state or at other timings to perform a warning effect. In addition, various characters are prepared to be displayed in this case. In addition, there are multiple reach with different production contents, such as a reach that changes the back image quickly and displays it, a reach that adds a notice effect before the start of fluctuation, and a reach that adds a production that becomes a big hit by re-variation. ing. As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of variable effects and enhance the interest of the player. As at least one of the normal reach and the super reach, a plurality of items having different variable display times may be set, and one of them may be selected according to the value of the variable type counter CS.

Further, in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot result (in the case of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result), the variation display time is determined using the 2R probability variation jackpot group (group). However, in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 1.
In any of 98, the variable display time is determined to be the third time (31 seconds). Even when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the one corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS may be selected from the plurality of 2R fluctuation patterns.

In the fluctuation based on the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 2
By the control of 12, one mode is selected from a plurality of prepared variable modes dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the variation effect is performed in the selected mode. As a variation mode for the 2R probability variation jackpot result, for example, together with a predetermined character, after the final reach, "the symbol sequence Z in the middle row Z".
An example of a variation mode in which "the symbols in 2" are aligned can be exemplified.

FIG. 20D is a deviation display time table to be referred to when the result is a loss in the winning / failing lottery. This variable display time table is a group (group) for non-reach that is referred to when reach does not occur, and a group (group) for reach that is referred to when reach occurs.
It is divided into and, and the fluctuation type counter C is used for each of the divided groups.
The value of S is associated with it. Specifically, at the start of fluctuation, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value) (it was a value that is out of order), and the reach random number counter C3 If reach does not occur based on the value of, use it for a non-reach group (group), and the variable display time is 4 hours (for example, 7 seconds) or longer than the 4th hour. It is determined to be one of the fifth time (for example, 10 seconds). When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 149, it is set to the fourth time (variation display time; 7 seconds), and when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 150 to 198, the fifth time is set.
It is set to the time (variable display time; 10 seconds).

Further, at the start of fluctuation, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value) (it was a value that is out of order), and is set to the value of the reach random number counter C3. If reach occurs based on the above, use it for the reach group (group), and the variable display time is the first hour (30 seconds) or the second hour (60 seconds).
Is set to. However, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 195, it is set to the first time (variation display time; 30 seconds), and when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 196 to 198, the second time is set.
It is set to the time (variable display time; 60 seconds).

As described above, the variable display time table of FIG. 20 (d) is a variable display time table used regardless of the probability mode when the result is a failure in the winning / losing lottery, but FIG. 20 (d).
) Can be illustrated as an application example in which the variable display time table is used only when the probability mode is the low probability mode. In this application example, in addition to the variable display time table shown in FIG. 20 (d), a variable display time table used in the high probability mode is provided when the result is a failure in the winning / losing lottery. As the variation display time table used in this high probability mode, for example, the variation display time table shown in FIG. 20E can be exemplified.

The variable display time table shown in FIG. 20E also has a non-reach group (group) referred to when reach does not occur and a reach group (group) referred to when reach occurs.
It is divided into groups), and the value of the variable type counter CS is associated with each of the divided groups. That is, when it is determined that reach does not occur based on the value of the reach random number counter C3, the variable display time is used for the non-reach group (group) for the fourth hour (for example, 7 seconds) or the fourth. It is determined to be one of the fifth hours (for example, 10 seconds), which is longer than the time. However, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 190, it is set to the 4th time (variation display time; 7 seconds), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 191 to 198.
In the case of, it is set to the 5th time (variable display time; 10 seconds). In other words, in the variation of displaying the loss result without generating reach, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the variation display time (fourth hour) is shorter than when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is more likely to be set.

In the variable display time table shown in FIG. 20 (e), when reach is generated based on the value of the reach random number counter C3, the variable display time is used for the reach group (group) for the first time. It is set to (30 seconds) or the second time (60 seconds). However, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 197, it is set to the first time (variation display time; 30 seconds), and when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 198, the second time (variation display time; 60). Seconds). In other words, in the fluctuation that generates reach and displays the loss result, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, a shorter fluctuation display time (fifth hour) is set as compared with the case where the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. It is more likely to be done.

Further, at the start of fluctuation, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value) (it was a value that is out of order), and is set to the value of the reach random number counter C3. If reach is generated based on this, the variable display time is the first hour (30 seconds) regardless of whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode.
Then, the variation effect is performed in the mode of normal reach by the control of the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212. Further, when the variation display time is set to the second time (60 seconds), the variation effect is performed in the mode of super reach under the control of the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212.

Further, in the present embodiment, referring to the variable display time table for big hits and the variable display time table for misses, an embodiment in which one type of normal reach or one type of super reach is selected is illustrated, but a plurality of types of normal reach are illustrated. 1 normal reach may be selected from, or 1 super reach may be selected from a plurality of types of super reach. In this case, multiple types of normal reach (normal reach A, normal reach B) can be distinguished by "expectation that will result in a jackpot at the time of appearance (expectation that the game result will be a jackpot result)", or multiple types of super reach (super reach). A, Super Reach B) may be distinguished by "the degree of expectation that will result in a big hit at the time of appearance". For example, when Super Reach B appears during a change in the design (design) in the symbol display device 41, the expectation that the jackpot result will be displayed as the display result of the change is higher than in the case where Super Reach A appears. You may.

Further, in at least one of the variable display time table for big hits and the variable display time table for misses, the variable display time may be set to be shorter as the number of pending numbers is larger. In particular, in a non-reach group (group), the variable display time may be set to be shorter as the number of common hold number CRNs is larger. Specifically, the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is "1" is "21 sec", and the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is "2" or "3" is "2".
It may be set to "9 sec", and the variable display time in the case of "4" or more may be set to "3 sec". In this case, when a large amount of hold information is stored in the hold ball storage area 232, the fluctuation display time is shortened, and hold digestion (targeting the winning / fail lottery or change display) can be efficiently performed, and the game can be played. The progress of is smooth.

The electric accessory release counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 249, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly, and when the game ball wins the through gate 35, the electric accessory holding area 2 of the RAM 204
It is stored in 33. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4.
For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled in the open state, and C4 = 200.
If it is ~ 249, the electric accessory 34a is not controlled to the open state.

As described above, in the MPU 202, at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. The variable display time table storage area 223 is used. Further, in the MPU 202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE are used to use the first result display unit AS and the second.
The stop result in the result display unit BS is determined, and the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used in the determination.

<Structure of reserved ball storage area 232>
Next, the configuration of the reserved ball storage area 232 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

The holding area Ra for the first result display unit is set in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the upper operating port 33.
This is a holding area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 in chronological order. In addition, the holding area R for the second result display unit
b is a holding area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 in chronological order according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower operating port 34. Here, since the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the hold area Rb for the second result display unit have the same configuration, the first result display unit of the two hold areas Ra and Rb is described below. The configuration of the reserved area Ra will be described.

The hold area Ra for the first result display unit includes four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area, and
It consists of a hold number storage area. Each storage area has a C1 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and C2 for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2.
It is composed of a storage area and a C3 storage area for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. With the four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the upper operating port 33 are reserved and stored.

The C1 storage area is composed of 2 bytes, and the jackpot counter C1 value of any of 0 to 599 is stored by using the lower 10 bits of 0 to 9. The upper 6 bits of 10 to 15 of the C1 storage area are unused areas.

The C2 storage area is composed of 1 byte, and the jackpot type counter C2 value of any of 0 to 29 is stored by using the lower 5 bits of 0 to 4. The upper 2 bits of 5 to 7 in the C2 storage area are unused areas.

The C3 storage area is composed of 1 byte, and the reach random number counter C3 value of any of 0 to 238 is stored using all 8 bits of 0 to 7.

The reserved number storage area is a storage area for storing the number of used storage areas, that is, the number of game balls that have been won and held in the upper operating port 33. The hold number storage area is composed of 1 byte, and any value of 0 to 4 is stored by using the lower 3 bits of 0 to 2. The upper 5 bits of 3 to 7 in the reserved number storage area are unused areas.

Further, in the holding ball storage area 232, the total number of holdings for storing information on the sum of the number of holdings in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the number of holdings in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. A storage area is provided. The total number of pending storage area is composed of 1 byte and is 0 to 0.
Any value of 8 is stored using the lower 4 bits of 0 to 3. The upper 4 bits of 4 to 7 in the total reserved number storage area are unused areas.

The execution area AE shown in FIG. 18 is used when starting the variable display of the result display units AS and BS.
This is an area for moving each value stored in the storage area of the first result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area Rb. The execution area AE has the same configuration as the storage area for one of the hold areas Ra and Rb for each result display unit, that is, the C1 storage area having a 2-byte configuration, the C2 storage area having a 1-byte configuration, and the 1-byte configuration. It is composed of a C3 storage area.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed in advancing the game in each game time by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 will be described. In the MPU 202, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. However, description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
This process is periodically activated by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, the reading process of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 81 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2,
The reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. In particular,
The jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are set.
Store in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 204.

After that, in step S104, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 is executed, and further, in step S105, the winning process for the through hole accompanying the winning of the through gate 35 is executed. , Terminates this timer interrupt processing.

The winning process for the operating port in step S104 and the winning process for the through in step S105 will be described below.

<Prize processing for operating port>
First, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the upper operating port 33 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operating port 33. When it is determined that the game ball has won the upper operating port 33, in step S202, a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is set in the payout control device 97. In the following step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 33.

In step S204, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is read, and the start hold storage number RaN stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold storage number RaN). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper operating port 33, in step S206, whether or not the game ball has won the lower operating port 34 (starting winning) corresponds to the lower operating port 34. Judgment is made based on the detection status of the detection sensor. When it is determined that the game ball has won the lower operating port 34, a prize ball command for paying out four game balls is set in the payout control device 97 in step S207. In the following step S208, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 34.

In step S209, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is read, and the start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold storage number RbN). After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step S205, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, when both step S201 and step S206 are NO, that is, the upper operating port 33
If the game ball does not win in any of the lower operating ports 34, the main winning process is terminated as it is. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output process S501 of the normal process described later.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S205 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S209 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the hold area for the result display unit corresponding in step S302 is set to 1. At the same time as incrementing, the value stored in the total number of reservations storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common number of reservations CRN) is incremented by 1 in step S303.

In the following step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding result display reservation area. That is, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages incremented by 1 in step S302.

That is, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set, the step S10
The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step 3 are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, in step S302. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the 1-incremented first start hold storage number RaN.

Further, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set, the step S103
The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step 2 are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, in step S302. Incremented second start hold memory number R
Store in the storage area corresponding to bN.

In the following steps S305 and S306, the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are the control devices on the sub side, recognize that the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 has won a prize, and the hold described later is performed. The confirmation process for the hold notice and the setting process for the hold command, which are the processes for executing the notice, are executed. These processes will be described in detail later. After that, this information acquisition process is terminated.

The hold command set by the processes of steps S305 and S306 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S501) of the normal process described later. When the voice lamp control device 82 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, the voice lamp control device 82 executes a process for turning on the first hold lamp unit 45. The first hold lamp unit 45 is turned on sequentially from the left side. For example, if the first start hold memory number RaN is 1, the leftmost first hold lamp unit 45 is turned on and the first start hold memory number 45 is turned on. If RaN is 4, all the first hold lamp units 45 are turned on. Further, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is received, the process for turning on the second hold lamp unit 46 is executed. The second hold lamp section 46 is turned on sequentially from the left side. For example, if the second start hold memory number RbN is 1, the leftmost second hold lamp section 46 is turned on and the second start hold memory number 46 is turned on. If RbN is 4, all the second hold lamp units 46 are turned on.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the winning process for through will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. When it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35, the process proceeds to step S402, and it is determined whether or not the bonus reserved memory number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment).

If it is not determined in step S401 that the game ball has won the through gate 35, or if it is determined in step S402 that the value of the accessory holding memory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4. The main winning process is completed without storing.

On the other hand, on condition that the game ball wins the through gate 35 and the number of stored characters SN <4 is set, the process proceeds to step S403, and the number of stored characters SN is incremented by one. Continue,
In step S404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first free storage area of the electric service holding area 233 of the RAM 204. After that, the main winning process is completed.

In the through winning process, a process for lighting the third hold lamp unit 47 is executed. The third hold lamp unit 47 is lit sequentially from the left side. For example, if the accessory hold memory number SN is 1, the leftmost third hold lamp section 47 is lit, and the accessory hold memory number SN is lit.
If is 4, all the third hold lamps 47 are turned on.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S501 to S509 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and steps S511 and S5 are used for the remaining time.
Twelve counter update processes are executed.

In the normal processing, in step S501, output data such as a timer interrupt processing or a command set in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, when an effect command such as a variation command, a type command, or a variation end command is set, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82.

Next, in step S502, the variation type counter CS is updated. In particular,
The variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variable type counter CS is set to the RAM 20.
Store in the corresponding buffer area of 4.

In the following step S503, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. After that, in step S504, a game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game time control process, the jackpot determination and the symbol display device 41
The variable display of the symbol is set by, and the display control of the result display unit AS and BS on the side performing the variable display is performed. The details of the game time control process will be described later.

After that, in step S505, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like.

In step S506, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operating port 34 is executed. In this electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be opened, and the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later.

After that, in step S507, a process of determining whether or not a "return ball" exists on the launch rail 74 is performed. Subsequently, in step S508, when a "return ball" is generated, a process for eliminating the "return ball" is performed. Further, in step S509, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the power supply and the launch control board 98a have a “condition-satisfied transmission circuit 9”.
A process of transmitting a launch permission signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) to the "reception circuit 98e of the launch permission of the power supply and the launch control board 98a" under the condition of receiving the condition satisfaction signal indicating that the condition is satisfied from "8d". I do.

In the following step S510, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated (steps S511 and S512). That is, in step S511, the random number initial value counter CINI
Perform an update of. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. Further, in step S512, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S501 to S509 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 31.

In the game rotation control process shown in FIG. 27, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag (open / close execution state information) is stored in the open / close execution mode flag storage area (open / close execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the processing after step S602, that is, step S
Process for starting game rounds in steps 603 to S605 and steps S606 to S609
This game time control process is terminated without executing any of the game time progress processes of. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the operating ports 33 and 34 have been won.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in the variable display. Specifically, the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS
It is determined whether or not one of the above is in the variable display. In addition, this judgment is RAM204
This is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235. The variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is cleared when the variation display ends.

If the main display unit 43 is not displaying fluctuations, steps S603 to S605
Proceed to the process for starting the game. In the game round start process, first, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the common hold number CRN is "0". When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the start hold storage number is "0" for both the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34. Therefore, the game times control process is terminated as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is set for variable display in step S604. After executing the data setting process of the above, and further executing the variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 in step S605, the game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S604 and the fluctuation start process in step S605 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

In the data setting process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is “0”. When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S702 to S707 is executed, and when the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0". Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit of steps S708 to S713.

Here, when the data setting process is executed, as already explained, the common hold number CR
This is the case where N is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, the second start hold storage number R
It is determined whether or not bN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, when the hold information for variable display is stored for the second result display unit BS, the first start hold storage number RaN Is 1
Regardless of whether or not it is the above, the data stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit is set for the variable display. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display hold area Ra and the second result display hold area Rb, the second result display hold area corresponding to the lower operating port 34 is stored. The hold information stored in Rb has priority.

In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S702, the first hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is decremented by 1. Subsequent step S70
In 3, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, in step S704, the first
The data stored in the first area of the hold area Ra for the result display unit is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area, and from the second area to the first area and the first. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3 area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area.

In the following step S706, the second result display unit flag (second result display unit information) is set in the second result display unit flag storage area (second result display unit information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If it is memorized, it is erased, and if it is not memorized, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for identifying whether the start of the current variation display is either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS.

In the following step S707, a shift command (shift time command) which is information for causing the voice lamp control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted.
Shift occurrence information) is set. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of ROM 203
Therefore, the shift including the information that the hold area for which the data is shifted this time corresponds to the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the information that the hold area corresponds to the upper operating port 33. A time command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 16). In the voice lamp control device 82, the first hold lamp unit 4 of the variable display unit 36 is based on the received shift command.
The process for changing the display in 5 corresponding to the decrease in the number of pending items is executed.

In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S708, the second hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is decremented by 1. Subsequent step S70
In 9, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, in step S710, the second
The data stored in the first area of the hold area Rb for the result display unit is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the holding area Rb for the second result display unit is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area, and from the second area to the first area and the first. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3 area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area.

In the following step S712, the second result display unit flag (second result display unit information) is set in the second result display unit flag storage area (second result display unit information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If it is not stored, the second result display part flag is stored and
If it is memorized, it keeps its state.

In the following step S713, a shift command (shift time command) that is information for causing the voice lamp control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted.
Shift occurrence information) is set. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of ROM 203
Therefore, the hold area that was the target of this data shift is the hold area R for the second result display unit.
Select a shift command that includes information that corresponds to b, that is, information that corresponds to the lower operating port 34, and send the selected shift command to the voice lamp control device 82. Set as. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 26). In the voice lamp control device 82, the second hold lamp unit 4 of the variable display unit 36 is based on the received shift command.
A process for changing the display in 6 corresponding to the decrease in the number of pending items is executed.

Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area (high probability state information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The high-probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the open / close execution mode related to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result, and is deleted when the normal jackpot result occurs thereafter.

If it is not in the high probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed in step S802 with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode as shown in FIG. 19A. Judge whether or not. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed by referring to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode in step S803. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. 19B. Judge whether or not.

After the process of step S802 or step S803, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S802 or step S803 is a big hit. If the jackpot is won, in steps S805 to S811, a process for setting the game result and a process for setting the stop result in the case of the jackpot winning are executed.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display unit flag is not stored, the distribution determination is performed in step S806 with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 20A). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical range of the normal jackpot result, the numerical range of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the numerical range of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the 15R probability variation jackpot. Determine which of the numerical ranges of the result is included.
On the other hand, when the second result display unit flag is stored, the distribution determination is performed in step S807 with reference to the distribution table for the second result display unit (see FIG. 20B). In particular,
It is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the normal jackpot result or the numerical range of the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

After the processing of step S806 or step S807, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a probability variation jackpot result. In the case of a probability variation jackpot result, in step S809, a state in which either stop result is displayed on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the current game round in which the probability variation jackpot result is generated. Executes the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot to set whether to end the fluctuation display with.

The stop result setting process for the probabilistic jackpot will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. Here, as already described, in the distribution table for the first result display unit, as the probability variation jackpot results, there are a plurality of types of game results of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the 15R probability variation jackpot result. However, in the distribution table for the second result display unit, only one type of 15R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result. Therefore, when the game round this time is based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 33, and the game round is the game round in which the game result is distributed in the distribution table for the first result display unit. , A negative determination may be made in step S901, or an affirmative determination may be made. On the other hand, this game round is the lower operating port 34
If the game is based on the winning of the game ball and the game result is distributed in the distribution table for the second result display unit, a positive determination is always made in step S901.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S902 whether or not the above-sorted game result is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. In the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, in step S903, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to with reference to the stop result table for explicit 2R probability variation in the stop result table storage area 224. The address information of the stop result data corresponding to the above is acquired, and in step S904, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. After that, in step S905, the explicit 2R probability variation flag (explicit high probability correspondence information) is stored in the explicit 2R probability variation flag storage area (explicit high probability correspondence information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, and then the stop result is achieved. End the setting process.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to in step S906 with reference to the stop result table for unspecified 2R probability variation in the stop result table storage area 224. The address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of is acquired, and in step S907, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. After that, in step S908, after storing the unspecified 2R probability variation flag (unspecified high probability correspondence information) in the implicit 2R probability variation flag storage area (unspecified high probability correspondence information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. , Ends the stop result setting process.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to in the stop result table storage area 224 for 15R probability variation in step S909. The address information of the stop result data corresponding to the above is acquired, and in step S910, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. After that, in step S911, the 15R probability variation flag (high probability correspondence special information) is stored in the 15R probability variation flag storage area (high probability correspondence special information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, and then the stop result setting process is performed. To finish.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29), after executing the process of step S809, the process proceeds to step S813. On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is not the probability variation jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S808, and the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot in the stop result table storage area 224. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Then step S
At 811 in the normal jackpot flag storage area (low probability correspondence special information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, the normal jackpot flag (low probability correspondence special information)
Is stored, and then the stop result setting process is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S813.

If the result of the lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not a big hit, a negative determination is made in step S804 and the process proceeds to step S812. Step S
In 812, for the time of disengagement for setting which stop result is displayed on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the current game time, which is the disengagement result, to end the variation display. Executes the stop result setting process. In the stop result setting process for the time of deviation, the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to with the stop result table for the time of deviation in the stop result table storage area 224. The address information of is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Then, the process proceeds to step S813.

In step S813, the variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game times is executed in the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS. The variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the variation display time setting process, first, in step S1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer 231 in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 202.

In the following step S1002, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in this game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the probabilistic jackpot flags or the normal jackpot flags is stored in the RAM 204. If any of the flags is stored, a positive determination is made in step S1002 as the reach display occurs. Further, even if none of the above flags are stored, the execution area AE
When the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S1002 as the occurrence of reach display. When specifying the presence / absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 203 is referred to.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1002, ROM 20 in step S1003.
With reference to the variation display time table for reach generation stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 of 3, the variation display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired, and in step S1004, The fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area (variation display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. After that, this setting process ends. In this embodiment, step S1003
The variation display time table for reach generation referred to in FIG. 20 (c) is the reach group of the jackpot variation time table illustrated in FIG. 20 (c) or the deviation variation time table illustrated in FIG. 20 (d). , The mode of the variable display time table for reach generation is not limited to this.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1002, the variation type counter CS of this time refers to the variation display time table for non-reach stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 in step S1005. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the value is acquired, and in step S1006, the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area. After that, this setting process ends. In this embodiment, step S1005
The variation display time table for non-reach reference in FIG. 20 is a non-reach group among the variation time tables for deviation illustrated in FIG. 20 (d), but the mode of the variation display time table for non-reach generation is this. Not limited to.

Further, as described above, the fluctuation display time information when reach does not occur is the common hold number CRN.
The variable display time may be set to be shorter as the number of is larger. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of common hold number CRNs may be used, and the variable display time may be set to be shorter as the number of common hold number CRNs is smaller. .. When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the fluctuation display time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold storage number RaN increases, and the second start hold storage number RbN is "1" or more. If so,
The variation display time may be set to be shorter as the number of second start hold storage numbers RbN is larger. When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the fluctuation display time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold storage number RaN increases, and the second start hold storage number RbN is "1" or more. In the case of, the variation display time becomes longer as the number of the second start reserved storage numbers RbN increases, or may be set to be constant without depending on the respective reserved storage numbers RaN and RbN.

Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable display time table for generation is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs.
The variable display time that is easy to be selected and the variable display time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the player is out of reach. Also, a variable display time table for probabilistic jackpots,
A variable display time table for a normal jackpot, a variable display time table for a missed reach, and a variable display time table for a complete miss may be set individually.

As described above, the fluctuation display time of each game is determined by using the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the number of pending information, and the value of the fluctuation type counter as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game is set with the contents of other reserved information, specifically, the information for jackpot determination, the information for type determination, and the information for reach determination included in the other reserved information as parameters. Determined without doing.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29), after step S813, in step S814, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display unit flag is not stored, the first variation command is set in step S815. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, as well as information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on whether or not reach has occurred. Contains variable display time information. On the other hand, when the second result display unit flag is stored, the second variation command is set in step S816. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, as well as information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on whether or not reach has occurred. Contains variable display time information.

After executing the process of step S815 or step S816, the type command is set in step S817. The type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the 15R probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, information on the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the like as the game result information.

The variation command and the type command set in steps S815 to S817 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The voice lamp control device 82 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. Further, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits the received variation command and type command to the display control device 212 as they are. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to each game time is performed based on the variation command and the type command.

After that, in step S818, among the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS,
The variable display of the pattern is started in the result display unit corresponding to this game time. In this case, R
When the second result display unit flag is not stored in AM204, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to the current game times is the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit flag is stored. If so, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to the current game times is the second result display unit BS. After that, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 27), when the main display unit 43 is in the variable display, the game times progress process of steps S606 to S609 is executed. In the game round progress process, first, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 is "0". The value of the fluctuation display time information is
As described above, it is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 31). Further, the value of the set fluctuation display time information is set every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) is activated.
1 decremented.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S607. In the variable display process, the display mode in the result display unit related to the current game round is changed. After that, the game times control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S608. In the variable end processing, step S809, step S810 or step S81 of FIG. 29
The address information stored in the RAM 204 is specified by any of the processes of 2, and the result display unit is displayed so that the mode of the pattern corresponding to the address information is displayed in the result display unit related to this game round. Control.

In the following step S609, a variable end command is set. After that, the game times control process is terminated. The variable end command set in step S609 is a normal process (FIG. 26).
In step S501 in the above, the sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82. The voice lamp control device 82 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variable end command. Further, the variable end command is issued from the voice lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212.
When the display control device 212 receives the change end command, the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round is confirmed and displayed (final stop display).

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 32 and 33.

In the game state transition process shown in FIG. 32, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS of one game is completed. If it is not the timing when the fluctuation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

When the variation display is finished, in step S1103, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the explicit 2R probability variation flag, the non-explicit 2R probability variation flag, the 15R probability variation flag, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When any of the above flags is stored, in step S1104, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. In the round display start process, first, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display unit RS displays the round information related to the output.

In the following step S1105, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is the high-frequency winning mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the 15R probability variation flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. In the case of not the high frequency winning mode, that is, the low frequency winning mode, "2" is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1106.
The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, in the case of the high frequency winning mode, step S11
At 07, "15" is set in the first round counter area RC1.

After executing the process of step S1106 or step S1107, step S110
Set the opening command at 8. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 26).
This opening command contains information on whether it is a high-frequency winning mode or a low-frequency winning mode. The voice lamp control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. Further, the opening command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the opening command to display the display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode (for example, moving image display). The symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so that After executing the process of step S1108, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, and the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S1109. In the opening and closing process of the large winning opening, the large winning opening 32
When a is closed, the large winning opening 32a is opened by putting the variable winning driving unit 32c into the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more. Further, when the large winning opening 32a is open, the variable winning driving unit is provided on the condition that the opening limit time has elapsed from the opening of the large winning opening 32a or the opening limit number has been won. The driving state of 32c is stopped, and the large winning opening 32a is closed. The opening limit time and the number of opening limits are different between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, as described above.

In the following step S1110, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0".
If is, the ending command is set in step S1111. This set ending command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The voice lamp control device 82 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on receiving the ending command. Further, the ending command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the ending command to end the display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode.

After that, in step S1112, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed. Here, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variation flag or the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any of the flags are stored,
In step S1202, the flag erasing process for erasing the information for specifying the game state is executed. Specifically, when the open / close execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and if they are not already stored, the state is maintained. In the following step S1203, the high probability mode flag is stored, and in step S1204, the high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the game state shifts to the game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. It should be noted that these high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next big hit.

In the following step S1205, a high-frequency support command (high-frequency support setting information), which is information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82. Set as the target command. After that, this migration process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1201 that both the 15R probability variation flag and the explicit 2R probability variation flag are not stored, it is determined in step S1206 whether or not the implicit 2R probability variation flag is stored. If the unspecified 2R probability change flag is stored, step S
In 1207, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support flag is stored, and if the high-frequency support flag is not stored, each process of steps S1208 to S1210 is executed, and then this migration process is terminated. To do. In this case, in step S1208, the flag erasing process is executed. Further, in step S1209, the high probability mode flag is stored. As a result, the game state shifts to the game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The high probability mode is maintained at least until the next big hit.

Further, in step S1210, a low-frequency support command (low-frequency support setting information), which is information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is sent to the voice lamp control device 82. Set as the command to be sent. After that, this migration process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the high frequency support flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, each process of steps S1202 to S1205 is executed, and then this transition process is terminated. In this case, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode is maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs.

When it is determined in step S1206 that the unspecified 2R probability change flag is not stored, it means that the current open / close execution mode is performed based on the fact that the normal jackpot flag is stored. In this case, the processes of steps S121 to S1214 are executed. That is, in step S1211, the flag erasing process is executed. After that, in step S1212, the high frequency support flag is stored, and in step S1213,
In the game count counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of RAM 204, "10"
Set "0". As a result, the game state shifts to the game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode ends when the game times continue 100 times, and then shifts to the normal game state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

In the following step S1214, a high-frequency support command (high-frequency support setting information), which is information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82. Set as the target command. After that, this migration process is terminated.

By the way, the high-frequency support command set in step S1205 or step S1214 and the low-frequency support command set in step S1210 are processed normally (
In step S501 in FIG. 26), the sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82. The voice lamp control device 82 transmits the high frequency support command and the low frequency support command as they are to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 identifies that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode based on the reception of the high-frequency support command, and executes the corresponding process. Further, the display control device 212 identifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes the corresponding process. These will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 32), after the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S1112 is completed, the round display end process is executed in step S1113. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off.

Then, in step S1114, after executing the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the main game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, if the explicit 2R probability change flag, the unspecified 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, and the normal jackpot flag are stored, they are deleted, and if they are not already stored, they are deleted. Maintain the state.

<Processing for electrical support>
Next, the electric service support process in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 34 to 36.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, in the electric service support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag is stored in the supported flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The supporting flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34B is opened and is cleared when the electric accessory 34a is returned to the closed state.

If the supporting flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1302 and the RAM 20
It is determined whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of 4. The support winning flag is the electric accessory 34a
This is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in the lottery for whether or not to set the open state, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored.

If the support winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1303, and RAM2
It is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of 04 is "0". If the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

When the value of the second timer area T2 is "0", in step S1304, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44. If it is the end timing of the variable display, after setting the off display in step S1305,
Ends the main electric service support process. By setting the off display, the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed.

If the value of the second timer area T2 is "0" and it is not the end timing of the fluctuation display, in step S1306, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory hold storage number SN is larger than "0".

If the value of the character hold storage number SN is "0", the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. When the value of the accessory hold storage number SN is larger than "0", it is determined in step S1307 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and in step S1308 whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. ..

If it is not the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode, step S130
An open lottery will be held at 9. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the open lottery is won. Become. Also, at the same time as the open lottery, "750" is entered in the second timer area T2.
(Ie, 1.5 sec) is set. The second accessory timer area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In the following step S1310, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1309 is a support winning. If the support is not won, the process proceeds to step S1312 without executing the process of step S1311, and if the support is won, step S13.
In addition to storing the support winning flag in 11, various counter areas 2 of RAM 204
After setting "3" in the second round counter area RC2 provided in 34, the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1312, the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, it is determined in step S1313 whether or not the game count counter area is "0". The game count counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If the game count counter area is not "0", the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If the number of games counter area is "0", the high frequency support flag is cleared in step S1314. In the following step S1315, a low-frequency support command (low-frequency support setting information), which is information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82. Set as the target command. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S1315 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The voice lamp control device 82 transmits the low frequency support command as it is to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on the reception of the low-frequency support command, and executes the corresponding process.

In the case of the open / close execution mode or not in the high frequency support mode, step S13
An open lottery will be held at 16. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the open lottery is won. Become. Also, at the same time as the open lottery, "147" will be displayed in the second timer area T2.
50 ”(ie, 29.5 sec) is set.

In the following step S1317, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1316 is the support winning. If the support is not won, the processing for main electric service support is terminated as it is. If the support is won, the support winning flag is stored in step S1318, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2, and then the main electric service support process is terminated.

When the support winning flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1319, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is "0". If the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner on the accessory display unit 44, so that the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. When the value of the second timer area T2 is "0", the hit display is set in step S1320. As a result, the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in the state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. In the following step S1321, the support-supporting flag is stored, the support winning flag is cleared, and then the main electric service support process is terminated.

If the supporting flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1322, and the electric accessory 3
After executing the electric service opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of 4a, the main electric service support process is terminated. The electric service opening / closing control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If the electric accessory 34a is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”.

If the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the value of the second timer area T2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1403, a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed, and the second timer area T2 is set to "250" (
That is, 0.5 sec) is set.

Then, in step S1404, after decrementing the value of the second round counter area RC2 by 1, in step S1405, the value of the second round counter area RC2 becomes ".
It is determined whether or not it is "0". If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is, and if the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0", the supporting flag is cleared. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the electric accessory 34a is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1401.
The process proceeds to step S1407. In step S1407, it is determined whether or not the second timer area T2 is "0". If the second timer area T2 is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. When the second timer area T2 is "0", step S140
At 8, the opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed.

After that, in step S1409, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and in step S1410, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. When the mode is not the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode is set, “800” (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1411, and then the main electric service open / close process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of the open / close execution mode or not in the high frequency support mode, after setting "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer area T2 in step S1412, the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated. ..

<Return ball detection process>
Next, the return ball detection process in step S507 of the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

Here, this return ball detection process is based on the length of the cycle in which the passage detection sensor 74b of the launch rail 74 detects the passage of the game ball (the length of the cycle in which the game ball passes through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b). , Detects the presence or absence of a return ball. That is, as shown in Example 1 of FIG. 38 (a), the game balls G1 launched one after another by the launching device 75 from the launching position 74W in a normal state (a state in which the return ball does not exist on the launch rail 74). , Fire cycle (0.6
Fired in seconds). Therefore, when the game ball G1 is continuously fired, the cycle in which the passage detection sensor 74b detects the game ball G1 is the predetermined cycle (0.6 second cycle). On the other hand, as in Example 2 of FIG. 38 (b), the game ball G1 that was launched from the launch position 74W and passed through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b could not completely pass through the launch rail 74. , It is assumed that the launch rail 74 runs backward and becomes a return ball (game ball G1). At this time, the distance between the return ball (game ball G1) that has started the reverse run and the passage detection sensor 74b is shorter than the distance between the launch position 74W and the passage detection sensor 74b.

Therefore, the time for the return ball (game ball G1) to pass through the passage detection sensor 74b arrives earlier than the scheduled time for the subsequent game ball G2 to pass through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b.
Then, the scheduled time for the subsequent game ball G2 to pass through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b is set.
1 from the time when the game ball G1 launched from the launch position 74w passed through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b (the time when the game ball G1 passed through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b before becoming a return ball). This is the time elapsed for the firing cycle (0.6 second cycle). Therefore, in the case of Example 2, the return ball (game ball G1) returns before one firing cycle elapses from the time when the game ball G1 launched from the launch position 74w has passed the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b. Passage detection sensor 74
It will pass through the detection range of b.

Further, as shown in Example 3 of FIG. 39 (a), in a state where the return ball (game ball G1) exists on the launch rail 74, the subsequent game ball G2 is launched together with the return ball (game ball G1) by the launch device 75. The distance from the return ball (game ball G1) to the passage detection sensor 74b is shorter than the distance from the game ball G2 at the launch position 74W to the passage detection sensor 74b (for one game ball). short). Therefore, a return ball (game ball G1) launched together with the subsequent game ball G2.
) Passes through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b earlier than the scheduled time for passing through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b when the subsequent game ball G2 is launched independently.

Further, as in Example 4 of FIG. 39 (b), when the return ball (game ball G1) is running backward on the launch rail 74 and the subsequent game ball G2 is launched by the launch device 75, the following game ball G2 is launched. The return ball (game ball G1) is played by the game ball G2 (played in the firing direction). Therefore, the time for the bounced return ball (game ball G1) to pass through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b passes through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b when the subsequent game ball G2 is launched independently. It will arrive earlier than the scheduled time. In addition, the game ball moves to a predetermined position on the launch rail 74, and the launch position 74
As shown in Example 5 of FIG. 39 (c), the subsequent game balls from the ball feeding device 76 are sequentially replenished to the launch position 74W even while traveling in the reverse direction in the direction of W, so that the game balls on the launch rail 74 are replenished. 2 pieces, 3
There is a possibility that the number will increase. In this case, the return ball located at the head and the passage detection sensor 7
Since the distance to 4b is further shortened, when the striking force of the launching device 75 is applied to a plurality of game balls on the launch rail 74, the time for the return ball located at the head to pass through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b is When the game ball at the launch position is launched independently, it arrives even earlier than the scheduled time for passing through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b.

As described above, when the return ball is generated, the interval at which the passage detection sensor 74b (detection means) detects the game ball is the firing cycle of the game ball (the cycle in which the launching device 75 launches the game ball, which is 0.6. It is generally shorter than the second cycle). However, even if a return ball is generated, depending on the condition of the launch rail (existence of another return ball on the launch rail, etc.), the interval at which the passage detection sensor 74b (detection means) detects the game ball is the launch cycle of the game ball. It cannot be ruled out that it may be longer or the same. However, if even one game occurs in which the interval detected by the passage detection sensor 74b (detection means) is shorter than the firing cycle, it can be determined that at least one return ball exists on the firing rail 74.

In the return ball detection process shown in FIG. 37, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not the “output state of the launch permission signal” is set to the HI level. That is, when the condition satisfaction signal input from the power supply / launch control device 98 described later is at the HI level and the cancellation operation execution flag described later is cleared, the main control device 81 is set to the “launch permission signal”. "Output state of" is set to the HI level. Here, the case where the condition satisfying signal is the HI level is "when the player is touching the firing handle 8A and the firing stop operation is not performed".
The "output state of the launch permission signal" and the "condition satisfying signal" will be described later.

When it is determined in step S1501 that the "output state of the launch permission signal" is set to the HI level, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not the passage detection sensor 74b has detected the game ball. Then, when a negative determination is made in step S1504, step S150
Proceeding to 5, the detection interval counter T provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204
C2 is added by "1", and the return ball detection process is temporarily terminated. Here, the return ball detection process is a part of the normal process (FIG. 26) and is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Therefore, when the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect the game ball, the count value set in the detection interval counter TC2 is incremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle). In other words
The detection interval counter TC2 is a counter that determines the time during which the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect the game ball (the period during which non-detection is continued).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1506, and it is determined whether or not the value of the detection interval counter TC2 is less than "150". Here, when the value of the detection interval counter TC2 is "150", it means that the period during which the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect the game ball is "0.6 seconds", which is less than "150". When is, it means that the period during which the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect the game ball is less than "0.6 seconds". Here, as described above, "0.6 seconds" is a period corresponding to the firing cycle of the game ball. Then, if the period during which the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect the game ball is less than "0.6 seconds" (when the detection interval is less than "0.6 seconds"), it is determined that a return ball has occurred. , Passage detection sensor 74b
If the period during which the game ball is not detected is "0.6 seconds" (when the detection interval is "0.6 seconds"), it is determined that no return ball has occurred.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1506, a return ball has been generated. Therefore, when the return ball flag is set, the process of step S1508 is executed and the return ball detection process is terminated.
Further, when the negative determination is made in step S1506, since the return ball has not been generated, the return ball detection process is terminated after the process of step S1508 is executed. Here, step S
In the process of 1508, the process of setting the value of the detection interval counter TC2 to "0" is performed.

When it is determined in step S1501 that the "output state of the emission permission signal" is set to the LOW level, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the detection interval counter TC2 is "0". Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the return ball detection process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1502, the process proceeds to step S1503, the process of setting the value of the detection interval counter TC2 to "0" is performed, and then the return ball detection process ends.

It should be noted that a modified example 1 for determining whether or not “TC2 = 150” is set in step 1506 in FIG. 37 can also be exemplified. In this modification 1, if "TC2 = 150", the process proceeds to step S1508 as it is, and if it is not "TC2 = 150", step S1507 is performed.
After setting the return ball flag, the process proceeds to step S1508. That is, in this modification 1, in step 1506, it is determined whether or not the period during which the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect the game ball (hereinafter referred to as the non-detection period) coincides with the firing cycle, and if they do not match. It is supposed to set the return ball flag to.

Further, a modification 2 for determining whether or not “TC2 = 125-175” is set in step 1506 of FIG. 37 can be exemplified. In this modification 2, "TC2 = 125-175"
If it is, the process proceeds to step S1508 as it is. In other words, the non-detection period is "0.5 seconds ~
If it is "0.7 seconds", the process proceeds to step S1508 as it is. On the other hand, "TC2 = 125-1
If it is not "75", the process proceeds to step S1507, the return ball flag is set, and then the process proceeds to step S1508. That is, if the non-detection period is "less than 0.5 seconds" or "more than 0.7 seconds", the return ball flag is set and then the process proceeds to step S1508.

In this modification 2, even if an error occurs between the non-detection period and the firing cycle, if the error is within the permissible range, it is determined that no return ball has occurred, and if it is out of the permissible range, the ball returns. It is determined that a sphere has occurred. For example, even if the game is continued without a return ball occurring, the individual pachinko machines 10 may inevitably have variations in the firing cycle, or the target pachinko machines 10 may be subject to variation.
The period of use of the device 75 becomes long, and the launching device 75 may rattle. Therefore, an error may occur between the non-detection period and the firing cycle, but if the error is within the permissible range (within the range that can be absorbed, that is, within the range that does not interfere with smooth game), the return ball It is determined that it has not occurred. In the modified example 2, the "range in which the return ball is determined not to occur" is defined as the "range of plus or minus 0.1 seconds of the firing cycle (0.6 seconds)", but the range is defined as the modified example. It may be different from 2. For example, the lower limit of the range is set to "Fire cycle (0).
.. 6 seconds) minus 1.5 seconds ", the upper limit of the range may be" firing cycle (0.6 seconds) plus 1.0 seconds ", and the lower limit of the range may be" firing cycle (0) .6 seconds) minus 1
.. It may be set to "0 seconds" and the upper limit value of the range may be set to "a firing cycle (0.6 seconds) plus 1.5 seconds".

<Return ball elimination process>
Next, the return ball elimination process in step S508 of the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40 (a).

In the return ball elimination process, it is determined in step S1601 whether or not the elimination operation execution flag is set. Specifically, the process of step S1601 can be performed by determining whether or not the resolution operation execution flag in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is stored. Here, the elimination operation execution flag is a flag indicating that an operation for eliminating the return ball (hereinafter referred to as a elimination operation) is being executed, and the return ball is eliminated with the return ball flag set. It is set when the process is started.

The canceling operation is an operation for eliminating the return ball, and is an operation of moving the support member 77 diagonally upward as compared with the normal state (when the game ball is supported at the launch position 74W). Specifically, the solenoid 77a is excited to reduce the amount of protrusion of the plunger 77b as compared with the normal state (see FIG. 11). As a result, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the support member 77 is raised, and the support member 77 is retracted from the rear of the game ball. Then, the return ball G1 on the launch rail 74 and the game ball G2 newly supplied on the launch rail 74 from the ball feeding device 76 are the launch rail 7.
It is discharged from the lower end of No. 4 and is guided to the lower plate 72 through a connecting passage (not shown).

If it is determined in step S1601 of FIG. 40A that the elimination operation execution flag is not set, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not the return ball flag is set. Then, if a negative determination is made in step S1602, the return ball elimination process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, in step S1603, a process of setting the resolution operation execution flag, a process of starting the resolution operation, a process of deleting the return ball flag, and a timer for ending the resolution operation The process of setting "450 (1.8 seconds)" in te is executed, and the return ball elimination process is completed. Here, the resolution operation end timer te is a timer that determines when the resolution operation is terminated when the resolution operation is started (when the resolution operation execution flag is set).

When it is determined that the resolution execution flag is set in step S1601, the value of the resolution operation end timer te is decremented by 1 in step S1604. That is, since the return ball elimination process is a part of the normal process and is executed in a cycle of 4 msec, the count value set in the elimination operation end timer te is decremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle).

When step S1604 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605
It is determined whether or not the value of the elimination operation end timer te is "0". Then, if the value of the elimination operation end timer te is not "0", the return ball elimination process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the elimination operation end timer te is "0", in step S1606, after performing the processing for ending the elimination operation and the processing for deleting the elimination operation execution flag, the return ball End the resolution process.

When the value of the elimination operation end timer te becomes "0", the elimination operation is terminated (the process of stopping the excitation of the solenoid 77a, lowering the support member 77, and supporting the game ball at the launch position 74W). However, if the process of terminating this resolution operation has not been performed, a warning sound may be generated or a warning lamp may be displayed. For example, a sensor for determining whether or not the position of the support member 77 is at a position for supporting the game ball at the launch position 74W is provided. Then, even if the value of the elimination operation end timer te becomes "0", the sensor holds the "support member 77 at the position of supporting the game ball at the launch position 74W" for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds).
If it is not detected, even if a warning is given by a predetermined warning means (a means for giving a warning by sound, a means for giving a warning by light, a means for giving a warning by vibration, a means for displaying a warning image (design display device 41, etc.), etc. Good.

Further, in the game ball launch control process of FIG. 41, which will be described later, when the position of the support member 77 is not at the position of supporting the game ball at the launch position 74W, the main control device 81 sets the output state of the launch permission signal to the HI level. It may not be set. This point will be described later.

<Game ball launch control process>
Next, the game ball launch control process in step S509 of the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41 (a).

In the game ball launch control process, it is determined in step S1701 whether or not the condition satisfying signal is at the HI level. Specifically, the determination in step S1701 is performed based on the condition satisfaction signal input from the power supply / emission control device 98.

When the player is touching the launch handle 8A, the HI level signal is input from the touch sensor 87 to the power / launch control device 98, and when the launch stop operation is not performed, the power / launch control is performed from the stop switch 89. The LOW level signal is input to the device 98. Then, on the condition that the HI level signal is input from the touch sensor 87 and the LOW level signal is input from the stop switch 89 in the power supply / emission control device 98, the HI level signal is sent to the main control device 81 as a condition fulfillment signal. It is configured to be output.
That is, the transmission circuit 98d (see FIG. 16) that satisfies the conditions of the power supply / emission control device 98 outputs the HI level signal as the condition satisfaction signal to the main control device 81.

Further, in the power supply / emission control device 98, when the HI level signal is input from the touch sensor 87 and the LOW level signal is not input from the stop switch 89, the main control device 8
A LOW level signal is output as a condition satisfaction signal in 1. That is, the transmission circuit 98d (see FIG. 16) that satisfies the conditions of the power supply / emission control device 98 outputs a LOW level signal as a condition satisfaction signal to the main control device 81. Then, the MPU 202 of the main controller 81
Then, a negative determination is made in step S1701 based on this condition satisfaction signal.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702, and it is determined whether or not the resolution operation execution flag is set. Then, if a negative determination is made in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703 to determine whether or not the launch is already permitted. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, the game ball launch control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1703, the following step S1
At 704, the firing permission state is set. Specifically, the firing permission flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

After that, in step S1705, the output state of the launch permission signal is set to the HI level based on the fact that the launch permission flag is stored, and the game ball launch control process is terminated. The main control device 81 shown in the first embodiment is connected to the power supply / launch control device 98, and the launch permission signal is input to the power supply / launch control device 98 (launch permission receiving circuit 98e shown in FIG. 16). It has become. The power supply / launch control device 98 executes the launch of the game ball based on the launch permission signal being at the HI level.

Returning to the explanation of step S1701, when a negative determination is made in the step S1701
That is, when the condition satisfying signal is at the LOW level, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, the firing permission state is released. Specifically, when the firing permission flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, it is deleted, and when the firing permission flag is not stored, the firing permission flag is maintained as it is. After executing the process of step S1706, the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1707, the output state of the launch permission signal is set to the LOW level based on the fact that the launch permission flag is not stored, and the game ball launch control process is terminated. The power supply / launch control device 98 avoids launching the game ball based on the launch permission signal being at the LOW level.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, that is, if the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level, but the resolution processing execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, the processing in step S1706, step S1707. Execute in the order of processing, and end the processing for controlling the launch of the game ball. That is, even if the main control device 81 receives the HI level signal as the condition satisfaction signal, the output state of the launch permission signal is set to the LOW level. Therefore, the power supply / launch control device 98 avoids launching the game ball based on the launch permission signal being at the LOW level.

It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not the position of the support member 77 is at the position of supporting the game ball at the launch position 74W (hereinafter referred to as the basic position) by the driving state of the solenoid 77a (the state in which excitation is stopped) and the sensor. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the process of step S1702A may be provided between the process of step S1702 and the process of step S1703. That is, if a negative determination is made in the process of step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1702A, and it is determined whether or not the support member 77 is in the "basic position" (whether or not the support member 77 has returned to the basic position). .. Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1702A, the process proceeds to step S1703. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1702A, step S17
The process may shift to the process of 06 and the process of step S1707, and the output state of the launch permission signal may be set to the LOW level. In this case, it is desirable to give a "predetermined warning" as described above.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42, the launch control process executed periodically by the power supply / launch control device 98 (specifically, the same cycle as the normal process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81: 4 msec cycle) will be described. To do.

First, in step S5001, the main control device 81 determines whether or not the launch permission signal output to the power supply / launch control device 98 (launch permission reception circuit 98e) is at the HI level. When the launch permission signal is at the HI level, the value of the launch cycle counter (not shown) provided in the power supply / launch control device 98 is added by 1 in step S5002, and the launch permission signal is at the LOW level. In that case, in step S5003, the value of the firing cycle counter is set to "0".
clear. Here, the launch cycle counter sets the launch cycle of the game ball to a predetermined value in a situation where the game ball should be launched by using the ball feed device 76 and the launch device 75 based on the operation of the launch handle 8A. It is a counter used for.

When the process of step S5002 or the process of step S5003 is executed, it is determined in step S5004 whether or not the ball has been fed. What is the ball-fed state?
In a situation where a game ball should be launched based on the operation of the launch handle 8A, the ball feed device 76
The supply of one game ball onto the launch rail 74 by the player has already been completed.

The power supply / launch control device 98 (launch permission receiving circuit 98e) outputs a drive signal for ball feeding of S5007 (ball feeding solenoid 76b performs on / off operation).
It can be in the ball-fed state and can be recognized as the ball-fed state. The launch position 7
When a detection sensor for detecting the presence of a 4W game ball is provided, when the detection sensor detects the game ball, it may be recognized as a ball-fed state.

If the ball has not been fed, it is determined in step S5005 whether or not the value of the firing cycle counter is "150". The firing cycle counter is incremented by 1 in a 4msec cycle (the same cycle as normal processing) when the firing permission signal is at the HI level. Therefore, when the value of the firing cycle counter is "150", the firing permission signal reaches the HI level and the output state of the HI level continues, or one game ball 0.6s in the state where the output state of the HI level launch permission signal continues after the launch
It means that ec has passed.

If the value of the firing cycle counter is not "150", the firing control process is temporarily terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the firing cycle counter is "150", step S
The process proceeds from 5006 to step S5008. In step S5006, the value of the firing cycle counter is cleared to "0", in step S5007, a drive signal for ball feeding is output to the ball feeding device 76, and in step S5008, the ball feeding state is set. That is, by outputting the drive signal for ball feeding, the ball feeding device 76 shifts one game ball to the firing position of the launch rail 74. Then, the launch control process is temporarily terminated.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S5004, the value of the post-ball feeding counter provided in the power supply / launch control device 98 is added by 1 in step S5009. Based on the operation of the launch handle 8A, the post-ball feed counter drives and controls the launch device 75 after one game ball is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 74 by the ball feed device 76 to control the game ball. It is a counter for specifying the timing of firing.

In the following step S5010, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter after ball feeding is "50". The post-ball feed counter is incremented by 1 in a 4 msec cycle (same cycle as normal processing) in the ball feed completed state. Therefore, when the value of the counter after ball feeding is "50", it means that 0.2 sec has elapsed after the game ball was supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 74.

If the value of the counter after ball feeding is not "50", the firing control process is temporarily terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the counter after ball feeding is "50", step S5
The process proceeds from 011 to step S5013. In step S5011, the power supply / launch control device 98
Based on the signal received from the variable resistor 88 of the launch handle 8A, the launch handle 8A
Grasp the firing intensity according to the amount of rotation operation of. In step S5012, step S501
A drive signal for launching according to the launch intensity grasped in 1 is output to the launcher 75. As a result, the game ball supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 74 is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 8A. After that, in step S5013, the ball-fed state is released, and the launch control process is completed. That is, the power supply / launch control device 98 can recognize that the ball feed completed state has been released by outputting the drive signal for launch to the launch device 75. As described above, when a detection sensor for detecting the presence of the game ball at the launch position 74W is provided, it is recognized that the ball feed completed state has been released by the detection sensor not detecting the game ball. it can.

Next, using the timing charts of FIGS. 43 to 45, the relationship between the cancellation operation execution flag, the launch permission signal, the ball feed operation performed by the ball feed device 76, and the launch operation performed by the launch device 75 is shown.

FIG. 43 shows a state in which the launch handle 8A is operated at the timing of t1 (the player's hand is touching the launch handle 8A) and the LOW level signal is output from the stop switch 89 (from the power supply / launch control device 98). The condition satisfaction signal input to the main control device 81 is at the HI level). At this time, if the cancellation operation execution flag is released, the main control device 81 sets the output state of the launch permission signal to the HI level. In this case, the ball feeding device 76 performs the ball feeding operation at the timing of t2 when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing of t1, and supplies one game ball on the launch rail 74. Then, at the timing of t3, which is 0.2 seconds after t2, the firing operation in which the game ball at the firing position 75W is launched by the launching device 75 is executed. After that, the ball feeding operation is performed at the timing of t4, which is 0.6 sec from the timing of t2, and the firing operation is executed at the timing of t5, which is 0.6 sec after the timing of t3. After that, if the condition fulfillment signal is at the HI level and the cancellation operation execution flag is released, "ball feeding operation and here where the firing operation is performed 0.2 after that" is performed for 0.6 sec.
Can be repeated in the cycle of.

After one game ball is supplied on the launch rail 74 by the ball feeding device 76 at the timing of tx1, the output state of the launch permission signal changes from the HI level to L at the timing of tx2.
It shall be possible to switch to the OW level. In this case, the game ball on the launch rail 74 is launched by the launcher 75 at the timing of tx3. After that, since the output state of the launch permission signal is at the LOW level at the tx2 timing, the game ball is not newly supplied on the launch rail 75, and the launch of the game ball is stopped.

In FIG. 44, the launch handle 8A is operated (the player's hand is touching the launch handle 8A).
Moreover, the LOW level signal is output from the stop switch 89 (the condition satisfying signal input from the power supply / emission control device 98 to the main control device 81 is at the HI level), and the cancellation operation execution flag is cleared. In this case (when the main control device 81 sets the output state of the launch permission signal to the HI level), the case where the resolution operation execution flag is set at the timing of ty1 is shown. However, at the timing of ty1, it is assumed that the ball feed has been released.

In this case, at the timing of ty1, the launch permission signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, and the ball feed has been released. Therefore, while the cancellation operation execution flag is set,
The ball feeding operation and the firing operation are not performed. Then, the launch handle 8A is operated (the player's hand is touching the launch handle 8A), and the LOW level signal is output from the stop switch 89 (from the power supply / launch control device 98 to the main control device 81). It is assumed that the resolution operation execution flag is released at the timing of tz1 (while the input condition satisfaction signal remains at the HI level). In this case, since the launch permission signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the ball feed device 76 performs a ball feed operation at the timing of tz2, which is 0.6 sec from the timing of tz1, and one on the launch rail 74. Supply the game ball of. And tz
At the timing of tz3, which is 0.2 seconds after 2 seconds, the game ball at the launch position 75W is launched by the launching device 7.
The firing operation of firing by 5 is executed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 45A, after one game ball is supplied on the launch rail 74 by the ball feeding device 76 at the timing tv1 before ty3, the elimination operation execution flag is set. Suppose. In this case, the output state of the launch permission signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level at the timing of ty3, but the timing of tv2 0.2 seconds after tv1 (regardless of the timing of tv2 and the timing of ty3). ), The launching operation is executed by the launching device 75. At this time, if the game ball on the launch rail 74 has already been discharged from the lower end of the launch rail 74, the launch operation by the launch device 75 is "blank shot (launched in a state where the game ball does not exist at the launch position 74W). To perform the operation) ”. On the other hand, if the discharge is not completed, the game ball remaining on the launch rail 74 may be subjected to the launch operation of the launch device 75 (the game ball remaining on the launch rail 74 is hit). There is a possibility of hitting with part 75b). The latter situation (the situation where the remaining game ball is hit by the hitting portion 75b)
In order to prevent the above, the execution time of the elimination operation is lengthened (for example, 3.6 seconds, that is, the time is 6 times the firing cycle), or as shown in the modified example 15 described later, at the timing of tv2. The launcher 75 may be prohibited. Alternatively, if a sensor for detecting the presence of the game ball on the launch rail 74 (for example, a sensor for detecting the presence of the game ball at the launch position 74W) is provided, this sensor detects the game ball. After that, the specified time (
For example, the resolution operation may be terminated after 2 seconds) (described later).

<About hold notice>
Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a hold notice suggesting the contents of the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the hold ball storage area 232 is provided. It is configured to be performed with a predetermined probability at a timing before the start of the game round related to the reserved information. Such a hold notice is performed by executing a predetermined control on the display control device 212 based on a predetermined command transmitted from the main control device 81.

Hereinafter, after briefly explaining the outline of the hold notice, the electrical configuration, the processing configuration, and the like related to the hold notice will be described.

<Overview of hold notice>
First, the outline of the advance notice effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

As described above, based on the fact that the game ball flowing down the game area PE wins a prize in any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variation display is started on the corresponding result display units AS and BS, and a predetermined stop is performed. The result (big hit result or miss result) is displayed, and the above fluctuation display is stopped. In the result display units AS and BS, "from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display" corresponds to one game. Then, in the pachinko machine 10, the result display unit A
Various effect devices, that is, effect display device (design display device 41), light emitting means for lighting (various lamp units around the window unit 61, above the window unit 61) according to the fluctuation display in S and BS. The display lamp unit 63), the voice means for generating sound effects, etc. (speaker unit 64) execute the game effect.

In the following description, as the "hold notice (suggestion effect)", in addition to the normal type hold notice (hereinafter referred to as "first notice effect") executed based on the normal execution condition, a special execution condition is used. A special type of hold notice (hereinafter referred to as "second notice effect") executed based on the above will be described. The "first notice effect" shows a specific example of the "first suggestion effect", and the "second notice effect" shows a specific example of the "second suggestion effect". Hereinafter, prior to the control processing of the hold notice (first notice effect, second notice effect), the outline (outline) of the hold notice (first notice effect, second notice effect) is briefly described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. Explain to.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the “first notice effect”. Here, in the following description, the fact that the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 (the detection sensor detects the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34) is referred to as "operating winning". Named, upper operating port 3
When the game ball wins in 3 or the lower operating port 34, the acquisition condition of "special information" is satisfied. Further, the operation winning (RaN corresponds to the above-mentioned winning of the upper operating port 33 and RbN corresponds to the winning of the lower operating port 34) that occurs when the corresponding start hold memory number (RbN corresponds to the winning of the upper operating port 33) is less than the upper limit value ( The operation prize (operation prize in which the acquired information can be stored) is called "valid operation prize", and may be distinguished from the operation prize (operation prize in which the acquired information cannot be stored) that occurs when the number of start-holding storages is equal to or more than the upper limit value. is there.

In the "first notice effect", as shown in FIG. 46, when a valid operation prize is generated (u1), a lottery as to whether or not to execute the first notice effect related to the special information acquired based on the operation prize (u1). Hereinafter, it is referred to as "first notice lottery" and is displayed as "first lottery" in the figure) (u2). In other words
A lottery (first notice lottery) will be held to determine whether or not to execute the "hold notice (first notice effect) indicating the possibility that the special information acquired based on the operation prize will be judged as the result of the grant response". Here, as will be described later, the winning probability of the first notice lottery differs depending on the type of special information (big hit information, reach information, non-reach information, etc.), which leads to a favorable game result and game production for the player. (For example, jackpot information), the higher the winning probability.

Further, in the following description, special information in which the result of the grant determination is a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result (special information that is a jackpot result that causes a high frequency winning mode) is referred to as "big hit information" and will be described later. By receiving the "probability change correspondence command or the normal correspondence command", the display control device 212 can know the occurrence of the "big hit information" (see FIGS. 51 to 55 described later). Further, among the special information other than the "big hit information", the information that is to be reached in the variable display (game effect) when showing the result of the grant determination is called "reach information", and the display control device is described later. By receiving the "reach correspondence command", the 212 can know the occurrence of the "reach information" (see FIGS. 51 to 55). In addition
Of the special information other than the "big hit information", the information that does not reach in the variable display (game production) when showing the result of the grant determination is called "non-reach information", and the display control device is described later. By receiving the "non-reach correspondence command", the 212 can know the occurrence of the "non-reach information" (see FIGS. 51 to 55).

Further, in the present embodiment, as the hold notice (first notice effect, second notice effect), there are one that directly indicates "the possibility of being determined as a grant response result" and one that indirectly indicates. But
Only one of the former (direct hold notice) and the latter (indirect hold notice) may be provided. For example, as the former hold notice, "preliminary display of the occurrence of the jackpot result" is performed, "preliminary display of the probability of occurrence of the jackpot result" is performed, and "preliminary voice of the occurrence of the jackpot result" is performed. Examples include the case of performing "notification" and the appearance of "a specific character (a character that appears when a jackpot result is generated or a character that is likely to cause a jackpot result)" (big hit notice). Further, as the latter pending notice, it can be exemplified that a specific effect (an effect appearing in a variable display for notifying the jackpot result, for example, reach, etc.) may occur (for example, reach notice).

As shown in FIG. 46, when the "first notice lottery" is won, the notice condition establishment flag (described later) is set, and a new hold notice (described later) is held until the notice condition establishment flag (described later) is released.
A prohibition is placed on the setting of processing related to (first notice production) (u3). Here, setting the advance notice condition establishment flag (described later) means storing the advance notice condition establishment flag in the advance notice condition establishment flag storage area described later, and releasing the advance notice condition establishment flag means storing the advance notice condition establishment flag. Refers to clearing the notice condition establishment flag from the area. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, if the "first notice lottery" is won, the notice condition establishment flag is set, and the occurrence lottery is won, the first notice effect is generated. If the occurrence lottery is omitted and the "first notice lottery" is won, a hold notice (first notice production) may be generated.

Then, when the first notice lottery is won (u2), the special information acquired before the acquisition of the special information subject to the first notice lottery, and the corresponding hold area for the result display unit (Ra or Hold notice (first notice effect) due to variable display based on what is stored in Rb)
I do. Here, the special information that is the target of the first notice lottery is referred to as "target pending information", and the first
The special information acquired before the acquisition of the special information (target pending information) that was the subject of the advance notice lottery and is stored in the corresponding result display section holding area (Ra or Rb) is ". It is called "pre-pending information". Regarding the hold information acquired and stored based on the effective operation prize for the upper operation port 33, the hold area for the first result display unit Ra corresponds to the hold area for the result display unit, and the lower operation port 34 is reached. With respect to the hold information acquired / stored based on the valid operation prize of, the second result display section hold area Rb is the corresponding result display section hold area.

When the "pre-held information" moves (shifts) from the first area to the execution area RE, the variable display (
Hereinafter, it is referred to as "pre-variation display". ) Is executed (u4), and a hold notice (first) is held at a predetermined timing.
Notice production) is executed. Here, in the first embodiment, the hold notice (preliminary fluctuation display)
Since the hold notice (first notice effect) is not performed in the "variation display based on the target hold information (hereinafter referred to as" target change display ")" (see reference numeral A), one or more is performed. Only when the "target hold information" is stored in the corresponding result display section hold area (Ra or Rb), the first notice lottery is executed and the first notice effect is produced. May be feasible. In this case, as the number of "pre-held information" increases, the winning probability of the first notice effect may increase. It should be noted that the hold notice (first notice effect) may be executed not only in the "previous change display" but also in the "target change display" (see reference numeral B), regardless of the existence or nonexistence of the "pre-hold information". 1 The advance notice lottery may be executed so that the first advance notice effect can be executed. In such a case
Fluctuation display based on previous hold information (so-called "preliminary change") and variable display based on target hold information
With the so-called "change"), a continuous hold notice can be executed.

In addition, as described above, the "first notice lottery" was won, and the notice condition establishment flag (FIGS. 59 to 6).
When (1 to be described later) is set, until the target hold information shifts to the execution area RE (until the process of S3807 of FIG. 67 described later or the process of S3857 of FIG. 6 described later determines affirmative). , The setting and execution of a new hold notice (first notice effect) is prohibited (see the processing of S3105 and S3112 in FIG. 55 described later). As a result, a plurality of hold notices (that is, a hold notice based on the target hold information and another hold notice effect based on the hold information generated after the target hold information) coexist, and the hold notice (first notice effect) It is possible to avoid complication of the production contents and control processing related to the above.

Here, in the following description, "digesting the special information" means that the special information is moved (shifted) from the first area of the hold area (Ra or Rb) for the result display unit to the execution area RE.
To do (see FIG. 28). By moving the "special information (data)" stored in the first area to the execution area RE in this way, the variable display based on the special information (data) is started.

When the variation display (pre-variation display) based on the pre-hold information is completed, the target hold information stored in the first area of the corresponding result display section hold area (Ra or Rb) is transferred to the execution area R.
It moves (shifts) to E, and the "target fluctuation display" is started (u5). At this time, the notice condition establishment flag is released. Then, when the fluctuation time of the "target variation display" elapses, the result of the grant determination based on the "target pending information" is notified. Then, it is assumed that the hold information acquired after the "target hold information" is stored in the hold area (Ra or Rb) for the result display unit before the "target hold information" shifts to the execution area. In this case, the variable display based on the hold information acquired later (acquired information described later, etc.) is started, but when the hold information acquired later is acquired, the "notice condition establishment flag" is set and the hold notice (first). Since the setting / execution of the notice effect) is prohibited, the hold notice (first notice) for the hold information acquired later is not executed (u6).

That is, in the normal type hold notice (first notice effect), when the special information is acquired in the first notice lottery based on the predetermined special information on the condition that the notice condition establishment flag is cleared (result display). Execute when storing in the part hold area). In other words, the special information in the state already stored in the hold area for the result display unit (Ra or Rb) (that is, the special information in the state stored in the hold area for the result display unit after the acquisition of the target hold information). The first notice lottery will not be executed with the target pending information.

In this way, in the normal type hold notice (first notice effect), the result is displayed before the "target hold information" is acquired and before the "target hold information" is shifted to the execution area RE. Special information (hereinafter referred to as "acquired information") stored in the reserved area for clubs (Ra or Rb) is not subject to the first advance notice lottery. Therefore, even if the acquired information includes special information having a high probability of winning the first notice lottery and special information that triggers the execution of an effect having a high effect of the effect, the acquired information (the pending information). The first notice effect cannot be executed with the target pending information. That is, in a gaming machine that executes only the first notice effect as a hold notice, for example, the result of the target variation display is not the content desired by the player (for example, even if the target variation display results in a deviation). It is not possible to execute the advance notice effect based on "obtained information". Therefore, as a result of diligent research, the present inventor has found that it is important to enhance the interest of the game by creating the feasibility of the advance notice production based on the "obtained information".

In the present embodiment, as a pattern of the hold notice (notice effect), a second notice effect (special type hold notice) is provided in addition to the first notice effect (normal type hold notice), and is based on "obtained information". There is a possibility that the notice effect will be executed. That is, there is a possibility that a process for performing a notice lottery (second notice lottery) is created for the hold information (acquired information) stored in the hold area (Ra or Rb) for the result display unit, and the hold notice is executed. I'm letting you.

FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the “second notice effect”. Specifically, it is assumed that an effective operation prize is generated and a predetermined number of acquired information is acquired while the first notice effect (pre-variation display) is being executed (v1). Then, the process of digesting the "target pending information" (when moving from the first area to the execution area RE and starting the target variation display), canceling the notice condition establishment flag, and the second from the "obtained information". The process of preferentially selecting the one with a high winning probability of the advance notice lottery (used in the meaning of the lottery whether or not to execute the second advance notice effect) and the process related to the second advance notice lottery regarding the "acquired information" are performed. , It is assumed that the result of the second notice lottery is winning (v2).

Here, the process of preferentially selecting the one having a high winning probability is performed as follows. In this embodiment, the jackpot information having the highest winning probability is preferentially selected. Then, if the acquired information includes the jackpot information but is not valid jackpot information (described later), the subsequent selection is terminated at that point. In this case, the second notice lottery is not executed, but the second notice lottery may be executed without determining the effectiveness. Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of jackpot information is stored as acquired information, the jackpot information stored earlier is selected, and the jackpot information stored later is not subject to the "second notice lottery". And.

If the jackpot information is not stored as the acquired information, the validity (described later) of all the acquired information stored in the hold area (Ra or Rb) for the result display unit is determined in the order of storage. , "Second notice lottery" will be held for valid items. Then, a "second notice lottery" is performed for the predetermined acquired information, and in the case of a loss, if the acquired information stored after the acquired information exists, the validity of the acquired information is judged and it is valid. The "second notice lottery" will be held. Then, if the result of the "second notice lottery" based on any of the obtained information is won, or if all the obtained information is searched (validity judgment, second notice lottery), the search related to the obtained information (valid). Gender judgment, second notice lottery) is completed.

In the present embodiment, a "second notice lottery" is performed for the predetermined acquired information, and if the winner is won,
Even if the acquired information stored after the acquired information exists, the acquired information stored later is not subject to the "second notice lottery". In addition, "second notice lottery" based on jackpot information
If there is acquired information (other than jackpot information) stored before the jackpot information, the validity of the acquired information stored earlier is judged in the order of memory and valid. Although the "second notice lottery" is to be performed for the acquired information determined to be, the validity of the acquired information stored in advance may be excluded from the judgment and the second advance notice lottery. In the present embodiment, the effectiveness (described later) is determined in the order of storage for the "obtained information other than the jackpot information", but the effectiveness is not determined and the "second notice lottery" is performed in the order of memory.
It may be the target of.

In the present embodiment, the acquired information other than the jackpot information may also be the target of the second advance notice lottery by giving priority to the "acquired information of the type having a high winning probability" of the second advance notice effect. For example, when the acquired information is reach information (super reach information, normal reach information), it may be subject to a preliminary lottery with priority over non-reach information. Furthermore, when the reach information (super reach information, normal reach information) is prioritized over the non-reach information, the "super reach information" that will perform super reach in the variable display (game production) when showing the result of the grant determination is , It may be the target of the advance notice lottery in preference to the "normal reach information" that will perform the normal reach in the variable display (game effect) when showing the result of the grant determination. here,
As will be described later, the winning probabilities of the first notice lottery and the second notice lottery are that the jackpot information is higher than the reach information, the reach information is higher than the non-reach information, and the super reach information is higher than the normal reach information. ..

Further explaining with reference to FIG. 47 (a), when the result of the second notice lottery is a winning (
v2), the notice condition establishment flag is set (v3). Here, among the acquired information stored in the hold area (Ra or Rb) for the result display unit when the target hold information is shifted, the second
The information obtained as a result of the advance notice lottery is referred to as "target acquired information", and the information acquired (memorized) prior to the "target acquired information" is referred to as "previous target acquired information". Further, in the present embodiment, when the target hold information is shifted, the acquired information finally stored in the hold area (Ra or Rb) for the result display unit is not necessarily the target of the second advance notice lottery. For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the number of stored acquired information is "3" and the acquired information acquired third (in the order of acquisition) is won in the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition, the third If the acquired information acquired second is the target acquired information and the number of acquired information acquired is "3", but the acquired information acquired second (in the order of acquisition) is won in the lottery for establishing the advance notice condition. , The second acquired information is the target acquired information.

The number of the above-mentioned "previous target acquired information" is a numerical value obtained by subtracting "1" from the numerical value indicating the order of occurrence of the target acquired information among all the acquired information. For example, if the number of all acquired information is "3" and it is the third of all acquired information of the target acquired information, the number of "previous target acquired information" is "2" and the target acquired information is the second. In some cases, the number of "previous target acquired information" is "1". Hereinafter, the numerical value indicating the order of occurrence of the target acquired information among all the acquired information, that is, the numerical value obtained by adding the number of the target acquired information "1" to the number of "previous target acquired information" is "the number of target acquired information". The change from the start of the variation display (previous target acquired information variation display) accompanied by the execution of the second notice effect to the variation display (target acquired information variation display) that is the target of the winning second notice lottery. It corresponds to the cumulative number of displays.

As described above, when the result of the second notice lottery is a win, when the target change display (variation display based on the target hold information of the first notice lottery) is completed, the change display based on the "previous target acquired information" (
Hereinafter, it is referred to as "previous target acquired information fluctuation display". ) Is executed (v4). At this time, if the number of "previous target acquired information" is "2", the "previous target acquired information fluctuation display" is executed twice, and if the number of "previous target acquired information" is "1", one "previous target acquired information" is executed. "Previous target acquired information fluctuation display" is executed. Then, the second notice effect is executed along with the "previous target acquired information fluctuation display".

After that, the variation display based on the "target acquired information" is executed, and the result of the grant determination is displayed (
v5). In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the "second notice lottery" is won, the notice condition establishment flag is set, and the occurrence lottery is won, the second notice notice effect is generated. , The generation lottery may be omitted, and if the "second notice lottery" is won, a hold notice (second notice production) may occur. Further, in the first embodiment, an embodiment in which the second notice effect can be executed by the "previous target acquired information fluctuation display" of the "previous target acquired information fluctuation display" and the "target acquired information fluctuation display" is illustrated. , "Previous target acquired information fluctuation display" and "target acquired information fluctuation display" may be feasible. In other words, the variable display based on the previously acquired information (
It is also possible to execute a continuous hold notice (second notice effect) by the so-called "preliminary change") and the change display based on the target acquired information (so-called "the change").

In the present embodiment, when the special information (target acquired information) won in the second notice lottery is moved (shifted) to the execution area RE, the execution condition of the second notice lottery is satisfied. In addition, the second notice lottery may be executed again. Here, the number of times of the second notice production is counted,
When the predetermined number of times (for example, two times or three times) is reached, the second notice effect may not be performed, or the second notice effect may be limited to one time.

As described above, the hold notice (first notice effect, second notice effect) is performed by using, for example, various effect devices (design display device 41, various lamp units, display lamp unit 63, speaker unit 64). be able to. Hereinafter, the effect display device (design display device 41) will be used with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49.
The "flow" of the hold notice (first notice effect and second notice effect) executed in is described. here,
48 to 49 schematically show the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In the pachinko machine 10, the hold notice (first notice effect, second notice effect) is executed by using all the effect devices (effect display device, light emitting means, and voice means), but all the effect devices ( It may be executed by using one kind of effect device or two kinds of effect devices selected from the effect display device, the light emitting means and the sound means).

“A1” in FIG. 48 is the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 (hereinafter, “first”.
"Holding information". ) Is "3", and the number of stored information (hereinafter referred to as "second reserved information") acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is "0". The display device 41 shows a case where the variable display based on the first hold information is being executed. At this time, a display indicating that the number of stored first reserved information is "3" is displayed in the first reserved display area Ga, and the number of stored second reserved information is "0" in the second reserved display area Gb. There is a display indicating that it is "individual".

In this situation of "A1", it is assumed that a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33, new first hold information is acquired, and the information is stored ("A2"). Moreover, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the hold notice (hereinafter referred to as the notice decision) based on this prize. That is, whether or not the condition establishment lottery (first notice lottery) is performed based on the hold information acquired based on the operation winning prize, and if the condition satisfaction lottery is won, the hold notice (first notice production) is generated. A lottery will be held. Then, when the generation lottery is won, it is decided to generate a hold notice (first notice effect).
However, as mentioned above, if the first notice lottery is won, the pending notice (
The first notice effect) may be generated. This point is the same in the second notice lottery described later.

The hold information won in the first notice lottery is the above-mentioned "target hold information", but the first hold information acquired before this "target hold information" and stored in the hold area Ra for the result display unit. It is assumed that the number of is 3 (“A2”). In this case, the first notice effect is performed by using the three fluctuation displays (variation display based on each of the three first reserved information) started after the variation display shown in "A1" and "A2" is completed. Suppose that is executed. That is, it is assumed that the "hold notice (first notice effect) indicating the possibility that the target hold information will be the result of the grant correspondence" is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, after the acquisition of the first reserved information, the number of stored first reserved information becomes "4", and the number of stored first reserved information in the first reserved display area Ga is "4". Is displayed. Further, in the first hold display area Ga, the target hold information is displayed by a "double circle", and the other hold information (pre-hold information) is displayed by a "hatch mark circled".

“A3” in FIG. 48 indicates a case where the variation display shown in “A1” and “A2” ends by displaying the deviation result. Then, when the display time of the disengagement result (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses, the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 is based on the first hold information having the oldest storage order in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. The variable display (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display) is started. At this time, the number of stored first hold information indicated by the first hold display area Ga is reduced to "3". Then, when the first variable display is started and a predetermined timing arrives, the "character pattern for the advance notice effect" appears ("A4").

After that, when the first variation display is finished and the display time of the deviation result elapses, the variation display based on the first hold information having the next oldest storage order in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit (hereinafter, the second change). (Referred to as display) is started (not shown). At this time, the number of stored first reserved information indicated by the first reserved display area Ga is reduced to "2". Then, when the second variable display is started and a predetermined timing arrives, the "character pattern for the advance notice effect" appears ("A5"). Then, during the second variation display, the upper operating port 33 is awarded twice, and two new first hold information are acquired and stored (“A6”). Therefore, the first hold display area Ga indicates the first.
The number of stored information stored increases to "4".

In the first hold display area Ga of FIGS. 48 to 49, the hold information acquired after the target hold information and already acquired when the fluctuation display (target change display) based on the target hold information is started is , Although it is the above-mentioned acquired information, the "acquired information" in the figure is indicated by a "cross mark circled". Here, in the present embodiment, the “held information acquired after the acquisition of the target pending information and before the start of the target variation display” is referred to as the “acquired information”, but the modified example 5 described later As shown in (see FIG. 81), the “held information acquired after the acquisition of the target pending information and before the end of the target variation display” can also be referred to as “acquired information”.

When the second variation display is finished and the display time of the deviation result elapses, the variation display based on the first hold information having the next oldest storage order in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit (hereinafter referred to as the third variation display). ) Is started (not shown). At this time, the number of stored first hold information indicated by the first hold display area Ga is reduced to "3". Then, when the third variable display is started and a predetermined timing arrives, the "character pattern for the advance notice effect" appears ("A7"). Further, during the third variation display, an operation prize is generated in the upper operation port 33, and one new first hold information is acquired and stored (“A8”). Therefore, the number of stored first hold information indicated by the first hold display area Ga increases to "4".

Subsequently, the third variation display is terminated, and the deviation result is displayed (“A9” in FIG. 49). And
The first hold information (target hold information) that is the target of the advance notice effect is the hold area Ra for the first result display unit.
It will move (digested) from the first area of the above to the execution area RE and start the target variation display, but if the result of the target variation display is planned to be "out of line result", it will be changed to "obtained information". Based on this, there is a possibility that a hold notice (second notice effect) will be executed (A10). That is, it is searched for whether or not the jackpot information (probability change correspondence hold command or normal correspondence hold command described later) exists in the stored order of the acquired information, and if the jackpot information is found, the jackpot information is valid jackpot information. If so, a lottery for satisfying the condition of whether or not to execute the second notice effect (second notice lottery) is performed. In addition, when the acquired information does not include the jackpot information, the validity (described later) of the acquired information other than the jackpot information is judged in the order of memory, and if it is valid, the condition establishment lottery (second notice lottery). I do. In addition, as described above, when the condition establishment lottery (second notice lottery) is won for the predetermined acquired information, a hold notice (second notice effect) is generated lottery (not shown), and the generated lottery is performed. Actually hold notice (second notice production) only if you win
However, this generation lottery may be omitted, and a hold notice (second notice production) may be generated when the condition establishment lottery (second notice lottery) is won. Further, as described above, the effectiveness may not be determined.

After performing the target variation display for a predetermined time, the "off result" is displayed ("A12"). Next, the variation display (previous target acquired information variation display) based on the acquired information (previous target acquired information) stored before the target acquired information is sequentially performed (“A13”, “A14”). Further, the variation display based on the target acquired information (target acquired information variation display) is started (“A15”). When this fluctuation display is finished, the result of the fluctuation display (big hit result or miss result) is displayed ("A1".
6 "). Here, in "A12" of FIG. 49, the acquired information is 3 when the target variation display is finished.
The pieces are stored and three acquired information (first reserved information) are displayed in the first reserved display area Ga, but the acquired information to be processed second (first reserved information) is the target acquired information. It shows the case where the acquired information (first reserved information) processed first is the previously targeted acquired information. That is, when a plurality of acquired information is provided, the last acquired information (the last acquired information stored before moving the target reserved information to the execution area) is not always the target acquired information.

<About the electrical configuration related to the hold notice>
Next, with respect to the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212, FIG. 50
It will be described below with reference to the block diagram of.

The MPU 242 is mounted on the voice lamp control board 241 provided in the voice lamp control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. RAM2
It is an element having a built-in interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like. In addition, it should be noted.
It is not an essential configuration that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. MPU24
The main control device 81 is connected to the input side of 2. From the main control device 81, game turn control commands such as the variation command, the type command, and the variation end command already described (
Information for game times control) is received. Also, opening commands, ending commands,
Receives game state commands (game state information) such as high-frequency support commands and low-frequency support commands. It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands described later.

On the output side of the MPU 242, as described above, the holding lamp units 45 to 47 provided on the variable display unit 36 and the display lamp units 63 and the speaker unit 6 provided on the front door frame 14 are provided.
4 is connected and the display control device 212 is connected. In this case, among the above-mentioned various commands, various commands other than the shift command are transmitted to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form as it is.

The display control device 212 includes an MPU 252, which is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, and a video display processor (VDP) 25.
A display control board 251 on which the character ROM 256, the character ROM 256, and the video RAM 257 are mounted is provided. It is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 252, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 252 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 81 via the voice lamp control device 82, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to perform the VDP 25.
Control 5 (specifically, generate an internal command for VDP255) is performed.

The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image. A part of the fixed value data is stored in advance in each area 31 to 315 of the program ROM 253. Details of these areas 31 to 315 will be described when the processing executed by the MPU 252 is described.

The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 252. These work data, flags, and the like are stored in each area 321 to 329 of the work RAM 254. These areas 32
Details of 1-329 will be described together with the description of the process executed by the MPU 252.

The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing.

The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and share them with each character ROM 256 to store image data and the like. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<Processing related to hold notice executed by the main controller 81>
Next, the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described. As the process related to the hold notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, the confirmation process for the hold notice related to the upper operating port, the confirmation process for the hold notice related to the lower operating port, and the setting process of the hold command are set. There is. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first notice is held.
Although it includes a notice effect and a second notice effect, the control processing shown below can be applied to the first notice effect and the second notice effect in principle. However, regarding the control process peculiar to the second notice effect (control process that cannot be applied to the first notice effect, for example, the second notice effect execution determination process), "second notice effect-"
Specify with the phrase.

<Confirmation process for holding notice related to the upper operating port>
First, the confirmation process for the hold notice related to the upper operating port will be described. The confirmation process for the hold notice related to the upper operating port is executed in step S305 of the information acquisition process (FIG. 24) set as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). In this case, the information acquisition process is executed when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33, and is also executed when a prize is generated in the lower operating port 34. The confirmation process for the hold notice relating to the upper operating port is executed in step S305 in the information acquisition process when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice relating to the upper operating port. First, in step S1801, the information on the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is read, and the information on the number of hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In the following step S1802, among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the upper operating port 33, the information for determining the jackpot, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped.

In the following step S1803, it is determined whether or not the current winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204.
In the case of the low probability mode, in step S1804, the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S1802 is set as the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 19A. Identify if it is included in the information. Further, in the case of the high probability mode, in step S1805, the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1802 is regarded as the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 19B. Identify whether it is included in the set information.

After step S1804 or step S1805, in step S1806, it is determined whether or not the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S1802 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, in step S1507, the upper operating port 3
Of the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current prize winning in 3, the information for determining the type, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped.

In the following step S1808, referring to the distribution table for the first result display unit shown in FIG. 20A, the information for determining the jackpot type grasped in step S1807 is set as the normal jackpot result or 15R. Identify whether it is included in any of the information set as the probabilistic jackpot result.

After that, in step S1809, it is determined whether or not the information for the jackpot type grasped in step S1807 corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and step S1
In 810, it is determined whether or not the information for the jackpot type grasped in step S1807 corresponds to the normal jackpot result.

As a result, when the 15R probability variation jackpot result is supported, the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1811. Further, when the normal jackpot result is supported, the normal jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1812. If neither the 15R probability variation jackpot result nor the normal jackpot result, that is, either the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the reach generation information is sent to the register of the MPU 202 in step S1813. Remember. The reach generation information includes a type of reach (information regarding whether the reach generation information indicates the occurrence of normal reach or the reach generation information indicating the occurrence of super reach). The reach type (reach generation information indicating the occurrence of normal reach, reach occurrence information indicating the occurrence of super reach) is set in step S based on the current winning of the upper operating port 33.
Of the pending information acquired in 304, it can be grasped based on the information for determining the variation type, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the variation type counter CS (FIG. 2).
0 (c)), the type of reach stored in step S1813 is limited to one type.

After executing the process of step S1811, step S1812 or step S1813, the process proceeds to step S1814. In step S1814, it is determined whether or not the information for determining the jackpot grasped in step S1802 is the common winning information which is the information for winning the jackpot in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. It is included in the value group of. Therefore, the above common winning information matches the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19A, it is "7" or "307".

Regarding the process of step S1814, in detail, it is first determined whether or not the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S1802 is "7", and if it is "7", step S1
An affirmative judgment is made at 814. If it is not "7", then it is determined whether or not it is "307". Then, in the case of "307", an affirmative determination is made in step S1814.
If it is not "307", a negative determination is made in step S1814.

If a negative determination is made in step S1814, the main confirmation process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1814, the confirmation process ends after the common information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1815.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1806 that the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S1802 does not correspond to the jackpot winning, the process proceeds to step S1816. In step S1816, among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the upper operating port 33, the information for determining the out-of-reach, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S1817, the reach determination information grasped in step S1816 is included in the information set as the reach winning by referring to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 203. Identify. After that, in step S1818, it is determined whether or not the reach determination information grasped in step S1816 corresponds to the reach generation. When the reach generation is supported, the confirmation process is terminated after the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1819. This reach occurrence information also includes the type of reach (information regarding whether the reach occurrence information indicates the occurrence of normal reach or the reach occurrence information indicating the occurrence of super reach).
Is included. Also in this case, the reach type (reach generation information indicating the occurrence of normal reach, reach occurrence information indicating the occurrence of super reach) is selected from the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the upper operating port 33. It can be grasped based on the information for determining the variation type, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the variation type counter CS (see the lower column of FIG. 20D). Also, if it does not correspond to reach occurrence,
This confirmation process ends as it is.

<Confirmation process for holding notice related to the lower operating port>
Next, the confirmation process for the hold notice relating to the lower operating port will be described. The confirmation process for the hold notice relating to the lower operating port is executed in step S305 in the information acquisition process (FIG. 24) when a prize is generated in the lower operating port 34.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice relating to the lower operating port. First, in step S1901, the information on the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is read, and the information on the number of hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In the following step S1902, among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the lower operating port 34, the information for determining the jackpot, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped.

In the following step S1903, it is determined whether or not the current winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204.
In the case of the low probability mode, in step S1904, the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S1902 is set as the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 19A. Identify if it is included in the information. Further, in the case of the high probability mode, in step S1905, the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1902 is regarded as the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 19B. Identify whether it is included in the set information.

After step S1904 or step S1905, in step S1906, it is determined whether or not the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S1902 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, in step S1907, the lower operating port 3
Of the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current prize in 4, the information for determining the type, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped.

In the following step S1908, referring to the distribution table for the second result display unit shown in FIG. 20B, the information for determining the jackpot type grasped in step S1907 is set as the normal jackpot result or 15R. Identify which of the information set as the probabilistic jackpot result is included. After that, in step S1909, it is determined whether or not the information for the jackpot type grasped in step S1907 corresponds to the normal jackpot result. If the normal jackpot result is supported, the normal jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1910, and then this confirmation process is terminated. If the normal jackpot result is supported, step S1911 is performed. After storing the probability change jackpot information in the register of the MPU 202, the confirmation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1912.
In step S1912, among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the lower operating port 34, the information for determining the out-of-reach, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S1913, the reach determination information grasped in step S1912 is included in the information set as the reach winning by referring to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 203. Identify. After that, in step S1914, it is determined whether or not the reach determination information grasped in step S1912 corresponds to the reach generation. When the reach generation is supported, in step S1915, the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and then the confirmation process is terminated. This reach generation information also includes a type of reach (information regarding whether the reach generation information indicates the occurrence of normal reach or the reach generation information indicating the occurrence of super reach). If the reach is not supported, the confirmation process is terminated as it is. In addition, the reach type (reach generation information indicating the occurrence of normal reach, reach occurrence information indicating the occurrence of super reach) is set in step S30 based on the current winning of the lower operating port 34.
Of the pending information acquired in step 4, the information for determining the fluctuation type, that is, the fluctuation type counter CS
It can be grasped based on the information acquired from the information updated by (Fig. 20 (d).
) See the bottom column).

<Hold command setting process>
Next, the setting process of the hold command will be described. The hold command setting process is executed in step S306 of the information acquisition process (FIG. 24) set as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). In this case, the information acquisition process is executed when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33 and is also executed when a prize is generated in the lower operating port 34. In any case, the information acquisition process is executed. Even so, the hold command setting process is executed.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the hold command. First step S20
In 01, it is determined whether or not either the normal jackpot information or the probabilistic jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. When either the normal jackpot information or the probabilistic jackpot information is stored, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not it is the probabilistic jackpot information. In the case of probabilistic jackpot information, in step S2003, RAM2
A probabilistic change support hold command is set in the hold command setting area provided in 04, and if it is normal jackpot information, a normal support hold command is set in the hold command setting area of RAM 204 in step S2004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that both the normal jackpot information and the probability variation jackpot information are not stored, the process proceeds to step S2005 to determine whether or not the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. .. When the reach generation information is stored, the reach corresponding hold command is set in the hold command setting area of the RAM 204 in step S2006, and when the reach generation information is not stored, step S2.
At 007, a non-reach compatible hold command is set in the hold command setting area of the RAM 204.

Step S2003, Step S2004, Step S2006 or Step S200
After executing any of the processes of 7, in step S2008, the process of setting the information on the number of pending numbers for the above-mentioned pending command is executed. Specifically, the information of the hold command set above is configured as a plurality of bytes of information, and for some bits of the information, the information that the hold command itself is a hold command or the hold command Information on the number of types to be held is included, and information on the number of pending items can be set. In this case, step S2
In 008, first, step S in the confirmation process (FIG. 51 or FIG. 52) for the immediately preceding hold notice.
In 1801 or step S1901, the information on the number of holds stored in the register of the MPU 202 is read, and then, the information on the number of holds read is added to the bit for the information on the number of holds in the hold command that has already been set. Stored by arithmetic processing such as logical sum. Thereby, with respect to the hold command set in any of the processes of step S2003, step S2004, step S2006 or step S2007, the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command is specified. Contains information for.

After that, in step S2009, it is determined whether or not this time is the processing time related to the winning of the upper operating port 33, and if it is the processing time related to the winning of the upper operating port 33, step S2010.
At, the process of setting the information of the upper operating port for the above hold command is executed. Specifically, as described above, the information of the hold command set above is configured as a plurality of bytes of information, and some of the bits are sent to the upper operating port 33. Information indicating that it is related to winning can be set. In this case, step S
In 2010, the information of the upper operating port, that is, "1" is stored for the bit for the information of the winning target in the hold command that has already been set. In addition, "0" is stored in the bit as an initial value, and in this case, it means that the command is related to winning a prize in the lower operating port 34. By executing the process of step S2010, step S2
For the hold command set in any of the processes of 003, step S2004, step S2006, or step S2007, the information for identifying that the hold command is related to the winning of the upper operating port 33 is provided. included. In the following explanation (particularly, the second notice effect execution determination process described later), the probability change correspondence hold command and the normal correspondence hold command are the jackpot hold information, the reach correspondence hold command is the reach hold information, and the non-reach correspondence hold command is the non-reach. Sometimes referred to as pending information. In addition, when the "big hit hold information", "reach hold information", and "non-reach hold information" are illustrated in the flowchart,
It may be simply described as "big hit information", "reach information", or "non-reach information".

In the following step S2011, it is determined whether or not common information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. If the common information is not stored, this setting process is terminated as it is. If the common information is stored, in step S2012, the process of setting the common information for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as described above, the information of the hold command set above is configured as a plurality of bytes of information.
Common information can be set for some of the bits. In this case, in step S2012, "1" is stored for the bit for common information in the hold command that has already been set. Note that "0" is stored in the bit as an initial value, and in this case, it means that the command does not include common information. Step S20
By executing the process of 12, common information is included for the hold command set in any of the processes of step S2003, step S2004, step S2006, or step S2007. After that, this setting process ends.

On the other hand, if this time is not the processing time related to winning the upper operating port 33, step S2009
Makes a negative judgment with, and ends this setting process as it is. In this case, in order to specify that the hold command set in any of the processes of step S2003, step S2004, step S2006 or step S2007 is related to the winning of the lower operating port 34. Information is included. Also, common information is not included.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 by the external output process in step S501 in the next normal process (FIG. 26).
The voice lamp control device 82 identifies that the hold information has increased by receiving such a hold command. Further, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits the hold command as it is to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 executes the process for advance notice of hold based on the received hold command. The process will be described in detail later.

At the end of the hold command setting process, the probability variation jackpot information, the normal jackpot information, and the reach generation information stored in the register of the MPU 202 are deleted.

By the way, the method of setting the hold command is whether or not the hold command is related to winning the upper operating port 33 in the display control device 212, whether or not it corresponds to the predetermined jackpot result, and whether or not the reach occurs. If it is possible to specify whether or not there is a prize, and if it corresponds to a predetermined jackpot result, whether or not it corresponds to common winning information, etc. It is optional.

For example, a combination of a probability change support hold command, a normal support hold command, a reach support hold command, and a non-reach support hold command is individually set for the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, and the number of each hold In addition, for those corresponding to the upper operating port 33, those including the common winning information and those not including the common winning information are individually set. Then, in the hold command setting process, one hold command may be selected according to the confirmation result in the hold notice confirmation process (FIG. 51 or 52).

<Command correspondence processing executed by the display control device 212>
Next, the command correspondence process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 is shown in FIG. 54.
This will be explained with reference to the flowchart of. Here, the command received from the main control device 81 via the voice lamp control device 82 is stored in the command storage area 321 of the work RAM 254 by the command storage process activated when the command is received. The command correspondence process is a process for executing various controls corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area 321 that are periodically started in the MPU 252 (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec). The command storage area 321 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time. The processing corresponding to each of these commands can be executed satisfactorily.

In the command correspondence process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the command storage area 321 and the command to be read this time is the opening command. If it is an opening command, the process corresponding to this command is terminated after the processes of steps S3002 to S3004 are executed.

In step S3002, the open / close execution flag (open / close identification information) is stored in the open / close execution flag storage area (open / close identification information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. The open / close execution flag is information for the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 to specify that the open / close execution mode is in progress, and is stored when the opening / close execution mode is started when the opening command is received, and the open / close execution mode is set. At the end, it is deleted when the ending command is received. In the MPU 252, when the open / close execution flag is stored, the display content on the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the open / close execution mode, and the setting and execution of the hold notice corresponds to the open / close execution mode as described later. And.

In the following step S3003, the first notice condition establishment flag (first notification condition establishment information) is stored in the first notice condition establishment flag storage area (first notification condition establishment information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. If is stored, delete it. The first notice condition establishment flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is set to give a hold notice. There is information that is stored when the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, and is deleted when the condition for ending the hold notice is met. ..

By the way, in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254, in addition to the first notice condition establishment flag storage area, the second notice condition establishment flag (second notification condition establishment information) for storing the second advance notice condition establishment flag is stored. A storage area (second notification condition satisfying information storage means) is provided. The second notice condition establishment flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is set to give a hold notice. There is information that is stored when the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, and is deleted when the condition for ending the hold notice is met. ..

In the following step S3004, the flags stored in order to determine the effect content of the hold notice are deleted from the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Details of such a flag will be described later.

When the opening command is received as described above, the stored first notice condition establishment flag is deleted, so that the hold information related to the winning of the upper operating port 33 is set to give a hold notice. The situation that has been set is resolved when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. As a result, the hold notice for the hold information stored based on the winning of the upper operation port 33 is not executed across the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, even if the opening command is received, the second notice condition fulfillment flag is not cleared. Therefore, the situation in which the hold information related to the winning of the lower operating port 34 is set to give a hold notice is not resolved at the time of the transition to the open / close execution mode. As a result, the hold notice for the hold information stored based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 can be executed across the open / close execution mode.

If the command to be read this time is not the opening command, step S3
At 005, it is determined whether or not the command to be read this time is the ending command. If it is an ending command, in step S3006, the work RAM 2
After clearing the open / close execution flag from 54, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

If the command to be read this time is not the ending command, step S3
At 007, it is determined whether or not the command to be read this time is a high-frequency support command. If it is a high-frequency support command, work RA in step S3008.
After storing the support flag (support identification information) in the support flag storage area (support identification information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the M254, this command correspondence process is terminated.

The support flag is information for identifying the support mode as the high-frequency support mode by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, and is stored when the high-frequency support command is received at the time of transition to the high-frequency support mode. , It is deleted when the low frequency support command is received when shifting to the low frequency support mode. In the MPU 252, when the support flag is stored, it is assumed that the setting and execution of the hold notice correspond to the high frequency support mode as described later.

If the command to be read this time is not a high-frequency support command, step S
At 3009, it is determined whether or not the command to be read this time is a low-frequency support command. If it is a low-frequency support command, work R is performed in step S3010.
After clearing the support flag from AM254, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

If the command to be read this time is not a low-frequency support command, step S
At 3011, it is determined whether or not the command to be read this time is a hold command.
If it is a hold command, the hold command correspondence process is executed in step S3012, and then this command correspondence process is terminated. If it is not a hold command, step S3013
After executing the variable display control process in, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

Hereinafter, the hold command correspondence process in step S3012 and the variation display control process in step S3013 will be described in detail.

<Processing for pending commands>
First, the hold command correspondence process in step S3012 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55.

In the hold command correspondence process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether the hold command to be read this time is either a probability change correspondence hold command or a normal correspondence hold command.

In the case of either the probabilistic change hold command or the normal hold command, in step S3102, the information on the number of holds included in the command received this time is specified, and the command received this time is the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation. Identify which of the mouths 34 is related to the prize. Then, in the erasing counter area 323 provided in the work RAM 254, the first erasing counter area corresponding to the upper operating port 33 and the second erasing counter area 34 corresponding to the lower operating port 34 are provided.
Of the erasing counter areas, the information on the number of pending items specified above is set for the erasing counter area corresponding to the command received this time.

In the following step S3103, whether or not the first jackpot hold flag (first jackpot hold information) is stored in the first jackpot hold flag storage area (first jackpot hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Is determined, and whether or not the second jackpot hold flag (second jackpot hold information) is stored in the second jackpot hold flag storage area (second jackpot hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 is determined. ..

Here, the first jackpot hold flag is the hold information that is the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result in the hold information held and stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81. If it is included, it is information for identifying it by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212. The second jackpot hold flag is the second of the main control device 81.
When the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the result display unit includes the hold information that is the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the display control device 2 displays the hold information.
It is information for identification in MPU 252 of 12.

Further, the first erasing counter area in the erasing counter area 323 is a measuring means for specifying the timing for erasing the first jackpot hold flag when the first jackpot hold flag is stored. The information on the number of holds set in the first erasing counter area is based on the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit (that is, the winning of the upper operating port 33), as will be described later. The acquired pending information) is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time a new game round is started, and the information stored in the first erasing counter area after the update is the initial value "0". If, the process of clearing the first jackpot hold flag is executed.

Further, the second erasing counter area in the erasing counter area 323 is a measuring means for specifying the timing for erasing the second jackpot holding flag when the second jackpot holding flag is stored. The information on the number of holds set in the second erasing counter area is based on the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit (that is, the winning of the lower operating port 34), as will be described later. The acquired pending information) is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time a new game round is started, and the information stored in the second erasing counter area after the update is the initial value "0". If, the process of clearing the second jackpot hold flag is executed.

If either the first jackpot hold flag or the second jackpot hold flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, and the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if neither the first jackpot hold flag nor the second jackpot hold flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is specified whether the hold command received this time is related to the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, and if it is related to the winning of the upper operating port 33, the first step is made. The jackpot hold flag is stored, and the second jackpot hold flag is stored when it is related to winning a prize in the lower operating port 34.

When the first jackpot hold flag or the second jackpot hold flag is stored as described above, even if the probability change correspondence hold command or the normal correspondence hold command is received, step S
A positive judgment was made in 3103, and the jackpot correspondence setting process (step S3110) for performing various settings for giving a hold notice was not executed. As a result, in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result is already stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the main control device 81. , Even if the hold information acquired based on the new winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 corresponds to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result, various settings for giving the hold notice are made. Absent.

After storing the first jackpot hold flag or the second jackpot hold flag in step S3104, in step S3105, whether either the first notice condition fulfillment flag or the second notice condition fulfillment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. Judge whether or not. If any of the warning condition fulfillment flags is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3105, and the pending command correspondence process ends as it is. That is, in a situation where it has already been set to give a hold notice for either the hold information related to the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the holding information related to the winning of the lower operating port 34, a new probability change response hold is held. Even if a command or a normal response hold command is received, no new setting is made to give a hold notice.

Therefore, as described above, the result display unit is acquired after the "acquired information", that is, the "target hold information" that triggered the execution of the hold notice, and before the "target hold information" is shifted to the execution area. Since either the notice condition establishment flag or the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the "at the time of acquisition" of the hold information stored in the hold area (Ra or Rb), the hold notice (
No new settings will be made regarding the first notice production). Then, with respect to this "obtained information", after the stored first notice condition establishment flag or second notice condition establishment flag is erased,
Under certain conditions, make settings related to the hold notice (second notice effect). This point will be described later.

If neither the first notice condition fulfillment flag nor the second notice condition fulfillment flag is stored, in step S3106, the probability change correspondence hold command or the normal correspondence hold command to be read this time is activated. It is determined whether or not the command is transmitted based on the winning of the mouth 33. If it was transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, step S
In 3107, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and in step S1908, it is determined whether or not the support flag is stored in the work RAM 254. Further, in step S3109, this time. It is determined whether or not common information is included in the probabilistic response hold command or the normal response hold command that is the read target of.

As a result, when the open / close execution flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, and the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is. Further, even if the open / close execution flag is not stored, if the support flag is stored, step S3107
In addition to making a negative determination in step S3108, an affirmative determination is made in step S3108, and the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is. Further, even if both the open / close execution flag and the support flag are not stored, if the common information is not included, a negative determination is made in both step S3107 and step S3108, and a negative determination is made in step S3109. Judgment is made, and the processing corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is. That is, in the case of the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode, the upper operating port 3 of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34
Even if the probability change correspondence hold command or the normal correspondence hold command based on the winning of 3 is received, various settings for giving the hold notice are not made. Furthermore, even if the probability change response hold command or the normal response hold command based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is received, the hold information related to the transmission of the hold command is a big hit in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. If it does not correspond to the common winning information, various settings for giving a hold notice will not be made.

On the other hand, if the probability change correspondence hold command or the normal correspondence hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, the jackpot correspondence setting process is executed in step S3110. Later, the processing corresponding to this hold command is terminated. Further, when the probability change correspondence hold command or the normal correspondence hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, both the open / close execution flag and the support flag are sent to the work RAM 254. Is not stored, and if the pending command includes common information, the jackpot correspondence setting process is executed in step S3110, and then the pending command correspondence process is terminated.

Here, the jackpot correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 56A and 59.

In the jackpot correspondence setting process, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), first, in step S3201, the notice condition establishment lottery process is executed. In the notice condition establishment lottery process, the counter value (numerical information) for the advance notice condition establishment lottery is read from the establishment lottery counter area 324 of the work RAM 254. Here, the establishment lottery counter area 324 is configured to be able to store counter values of "0 to 99", and each time the command correspondence process (FIG. 54) is activated, that is, about 2 ms.
It is configured to be incremented by 1 in the ec cycle, and "0" after reaching the maximum value.
It is configured to be initialized to. Then, in the lottery process for establishing the advance notice condition, the program RO
With reference to the established lottery table (established lottery information group) stored in the establishment lottery table storage area (establishment lottery information group storage means) 311 of M253, the counter value for the advance notice condition establishment lottery read out above. Determines whether or not is compatible with the winning of the advance notice condition. The probability of winning the notice condition is arbitrary, but as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the pachinko machine 10 has a probability of winning the notice condition of 7/10 in the case of the jackpot correspondence setting process. A lottery table is set in. However, the probability of winning in the notice condition establishment lottery process may differ depending on whether the hold command received in step S3101 of FIG. 55 is a probability change correspondence hold command or a normal correspondence hold command. For example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), in the case of the probability change correspondence hold command, the probability of winning the notice condition establishment lottery is 9/10, and in the case of the normal correspondence hold command, 6/10. You may win the lottery with the probability that the notice condition is satisfied. That is, when the hold command received in step S3101 of FIG. 55 is a probability change correspondence hold command, the probability of winning in the notice condition establishment lottery process is higher than in the case of the normal correspondence hold command (for example,). (1.5 times), the execution probability of the advance notice effect and the second advance notice effect described later may be increased.

In the following step S3202, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3201 is whether or not the advance notice condition is satisfied. If the advance notice condition is not won, the main setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of winning the notification condition, the jackpot correspondence setting process ends after the jackpot winning process in step S3203 is performed.

In the jackpot establishment winning process, as shown in FIG. 59, first, in step S3211, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is a normal correspondence hold command. If it is a normally supported hold command, in step S3212, the work RAM
When the normal jackpot notice flag (normal jackpot notice information) is stored in the normal jackpot notice flag storage area (normal jackpot notice information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of 254, and the command is a probability change correspondence hold command, step S3213 is performed. Work RAM 25
The probability change jackpot notice flag (probability change jackpot notice information) is stored in the probability change jackpot notice flag storage area (probability change jackpot notice information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of 4.

The normal jackpot notice flag is the hold information that triggered the fulfillment of the hold notice in the situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied (that is, when the execution of the hold notice is permitted). This is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that it usually corresponds to the jackpot result. Then, the flag is usually stored when the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, and is deleted when the condition for ending the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information.

In addition, the probability change jackpot notice flag is a hold that triggered the establishment of the condition in the situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied (that is, when the execution of the hold notice is permitted). MPU252 that the information corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result
This is the information to be specified in. Then, the flag is stored when the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and is deleted when the condition for ending the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information. ..

After executing the process of step S3212 or step S3213, step S321
In step 4, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33. If it is transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, the first notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3215. In the following step S3216, the information on the number of holds to be included in the hold command to be read this time is specified, and the information on the number of holds to be read is used as the upper operating port in the hold notice counter area 325 provided in the work RAM 254. It is set for the first hold notice counter area corresponding to 33. After that, this setting process ends.

In the first hold notice counter area, when the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is set as an opportunity to execute the hold notice, the hold information related to the setting is the hold information in any game. It is a measuring means for specifying by MPU 252 whether or not it corresponds to. Information on the number of holds set in the first hold notice counter area will be described later.
The hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time a new game is started, and after the update, it is stored in the counter area for the first hold notice. When the information is set to "0", which is the initial value, the first notice condition establishment flag is cleared, and the state set to give the hold notice is released. In addition, it should be noted.
As shown in parentheses in step S3216, in the second hold notice, the first
In the counter area for holding notice, not the information on the number of held items, but the information on the number of acquired information (hereinafter,
"Number of target acquired information") "is set, but the details of" target acquired information "will be described later.

On the other hand, when the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3217. In the following step S3218, the information on the number of holds to be included in the hold command to be read this time is specified, and the information on the number of holds to be read corresponds to the lower operating port 34 in the hold notice counter area 325 of the work RAM 254. Set for the second hold notice counter area. After that, this setting process ends.

In the second hold notice counter area, when the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is set as an opportunity to execute the hold notice, the hold information related to the setting is the hold information in any game. It is a measuring means for specifying by MPU 252 whether or not it corresponds to. Information on the number of holds set in the second hold notice counter area will be described later.
The hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time a new game is started, and after the update, it is stored in the counter area for the second hold notice. When the information is set to "0", which is the initial value, the second notice condition establishment flag is cleared, and the state set to perform the hold notice is released. In addition, it should be noted.
As shown in parentheses in step S3218, the second hold notice is the second.
Instead of the information on the number of held items, the "number of acquired information" is set in the counter area for holding notice (described later).

Returning to the explanation of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 55), when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is neither the probability change correspondence hold command nor the normal correspondence hold command (that is, the reach correspondence hold command or the non-reach). (When it is determined that the command is a corresponding hold command), in step S3111, it is determined whether or not the first jackpot hold flag or the second jackpot hold flag is stored in the work RAM 254. Then, when any of the jackpot hold flags is stored, the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is.

Here, even if a reach-supported hold command or a non-reach-supported hold command is received, if the first jackpot hold flag or the second jackpot hold flag is stored, the hold command-corresponding process is terminated as it is. I did. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result is already stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the main control device 81. In this situation, regardless of whether or not the situation is set to give a hold notice, the hold notice is given even if a new prize is generated for the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. The above settings are not made.

Therefore, in step S3112 as well, as in step S3105, when the above-mentioned "acquired information" is acquired, either the notice condition establishment flag or the second notice condition establishment flag is stored, so that the hold notice (first notice). No new settings will be made regarding (directing). And
The "obtained information" is set to the hold notice (second notice effect) under certain conditions after the stored first notice condition establishment flag or second notice condition establishment flag is cleared (described later). ..

If it is determined in step S3111 that neither the first jackpot hold flag nor the second jackpot hold flag is stored, the work RAM 2 is determined in step S3112.
It is determined whether or not either the first notice condition fulfillment flag or the second notice condition fulfillment flag is stored in 54. If any of the warning condition fulfillment flags is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3112, and the hold command correspondence process ends as it is.

Here, as described above, even when the reach correspondence hold command or the non-reach correspondence hold command is received, if the first notice condition fulfillment flag or the second notice condition fulfillment flag is stored, it is as it is. Changed to end the process corresponding to this hold command. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where a hold notice is given for either the hold information related to the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the holding information related to the winning of the lower operating port 34, the pachinko machine 10 is set to give a hold notice. Even if a new prize is generated for the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, various settings for giving a hold notice are not made.

If neither the first notice condition fulfillment flag nor the second notice condition fulfillment flag is stored, in step S3113, the reach-corresponding hold command to be read this time wins a prize in the upper operating port 33. It is determined whether or not it was transmitted based on. Upper operating port 3
If it was transmitted based on the winning of 3 in step S3114, the work R
It is determined whether or not the open / close execution flag is stored in AM254, and step S3.
At 115, it is determined whether or not the support flag is stored in the work RAM 254.

As a result, when the open / close execution flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3114, and the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is. Further, even if the open / close execution flag is not stored, if the support flag is stored, step S3114
In addition to making a negative judgment in step S3115, a positive judgment is made in step S3115, and the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is.

Here, as described above, in the case of the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode, the probability change response hold command based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 among the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 Alternatively, even if a normal response hold command is received, various settings for giving a hold notice are not made. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode is used, the upper operating port 3 of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34
Even if a new prize is awarded to 3, various settings will not be made to give a hold notice.

On the other hand, when the reach-corresponding hold command or the non-reach-corresponding hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, step S311.
Move to the process of 6. Further, the reach-corresponding hold command or the non-reach-corresponding hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33.
Even when both the open / close execution flag and the support flag are not stored in the work RAM 254, the process proceeds to step S3116.

In the process of step S3116, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is a reach-compatible hold command. Then, in the case of the reach correspondence hold command, the reach correspondence setting process is executed in step S3117, and then the present hold command correspondence process is terminated. If it is not a reach-compatible hold command (if it is a non-reach-compatible hold command), after executing the non-reach-compatible setting process in step S3118,
Terminates the processing corresponding to this hold command.

Here, the reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 56 (b) and 60, and the non-reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 57 (a) and 61.

In the reach correspondence setting process, first, in step S3301, as shown in FIG. 56 (b).
The lottery process for satisfying the notice condition is executed. The processing content of the lottery process for satisfying the advance notice condition is step S32.
It is the same as the processing content described in 01. However, in the established lottery table stored in the established lottery table storage area 311, the probability of winning the advance notice condition is higher in the case of the reach correspondence setting processing than in the case of the jackpot correspondence setting processing (in the case of FIG. 56A). Also, the probability of winning the notice condition is different depending on the type of reach specified by the reach hold information (reach support hold command). And in the case of reach support setting processing The probability of winning the notice condition is arbitrary, but in this pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the reach type is super reach, the probability of winning the notice condition is 2/10. In the case of normal reach, the establishment lottery table is set so that the advance notice condition is established and won with a probability of 1/10. As shown in the modification 3 of FIG. 58 (c), super reach is established. In the pachinko machine 10 having two or more of the above modes, the probability of winning the advance notice condition may differ depending on the type of super reach. For example, the super reach (super reach) executed with the fluctuation display of the short fluctuation display time. In an embodiment including 1) and a super reach (super reach 2) executed with a variable display of a long variable display time, the super reach (super reach 1) is selected when the super reach (super reach 2) is selected. The probability of winning the notice condition may be higher than that of the case of being selected.

In the following step S3302, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3301 is whether or not the advance notice condition is satisfied. If the advance notice condition is not won, the main setting process is terminated as it is. If the advance notice condition is won, the reach-for reach-winning process in step S3303 is performed, and then the reach-corresponding setting process ends.

In the reach winning process, as shown in FIG. 60, first, in step S3311, the mode in which the hold notice relating to the current setting is actually performed is any of a plurality of predetermined modes. A sorting lottery process for sorting whether to use the mode is executed.
As the aspect, the normal jackpot guessing mode that can be selected when the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result is set as the trigger for executing the hold notice, and the hold information corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result are the execution of the hold notice. A probabilistic jackpot estimation mode that can be selected when set as an opportunity and a reach notice mode are set.

Regarding the contents of the distribution lottery process, first, the counter value (numerical information) for the distribution lottery is read from the distribution lottery counter area 326 of the work RAM 254. The distribution lottery counter area 326 is configured to be able to store counter values of "0 to 99", and is configured to be incremented by 1 each time a command correspondence process (FIG. 54) is activated, that is, in a cycle of about 2 msec. In addition, it is configured to be initialized to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Then, in the distribution lottery process, the distribution lottery table (distribution lottery information group) stored in the distribution lottery table storage area (distribution lottery information group storage means) 312 of the program ROM 253 is referred to. Then, it is determined which of the above-mentioned normal jackpot estimation mode, the above probability variation jackpot estimation mode, and the reach notice mode corresponds to the read-out counter value for the distribution lottery. The probability of becoming a normal jackpot guessing mode, the probability variation jackpot guessing mode, or the probability of becoming a reach notice mode is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 58 (b),
The probability of the normal jackpot estimation mode is "1/4", the probability of the probability variation jackpot estimation mode is "1/4", and the probability of the reach notice mode is "1/2". A table for sorting lottery is set.

In the following step S3312, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3311 is the reach notice mode. In the case of the reach notice mode, step S33
At 16, the reach notice flag (reach notice information) is stored in the reach notice flag storage area (reach notice information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254.

The reach notice flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the mode in which the hold notice is actually performed should be the reach mode in the situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied. Then, the flag is stored when the condition for executing the hold notice according to the reach notice mode is satisfied, and when the condition for ending the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information that triggered the establishment of the condition. It will be erased.

If a negative determination is made in step S3312, the process proceeds to step S3313. In step S3313, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3311 is usually a jackpot estimation mode. In the case of the normal jackpot guessing mode, in step S3314, the normal jackpot guessing notice flag (normal guessing notice) is placed in the normal jackpot guessing notice flag storage area (normal jackpot guessing notice information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Information) is stored. If the mode is not the normal jackpot guessing mode, in step S3315, the probability variation jackpot guessing notice flag storage area (probability variation estimation notice information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is filled with the probability variation jackpot guessing notice flag (probability variation jackpot guessing). Notice information) is stored.

The normal jackpot guessing notice flag means that in a situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied, the mode in which the hold notice is actually performed should be the normal jackpot guessing mode.
This is information for specifying by PU252. Then, the flag is usually stored when the condition for executing the hold notice related to the jackpot estimation mode is satisfied, and when the condition for ending the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information that triggered the establishment of such a condition. Will be erased.

Further, the probabilistic jackpot guessing notice flag is used to specify in the MPU 252 that the mode in which the hold notice is actually performed should be the probabilistic jackpot guessing mode in the situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied. Information. Then, the flag is stored when the condition for executing the hold notice related to the probabilistic jackpot estimation mode is satisfied, and is deleted when the condition for ending the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information that triggered the condition. Will be done.

After executing the process of step S3314, step S3315 or step S3316, in step S3317, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33. judge. If it is transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, the first notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3318. In the following step S3119, the information on the number of held holds included in the hold command to be read this time is specified, and the information on the number of held holds is transmitted to the first hold notice counter area in the hold notice counter area 325. Set. After that, this setting process ends. In addition, as described in step S3319 with parentheses, in the second hold notice, the "target acquired information number" is set in the counter area for the first hold notice instead of the information on the number of holds (described later). ).

On the other hand, when the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3320. In the following step S3321, the information on the number of holds to be included in the hold command to be read this time is specified, and the information on the number of holds to be specified is applied to the second hold notice counter area in the hold notice counter area 325. Set. After that, this setting process ends. In addition, as described in step S3321 with parentheses, in the second hold notice, the "target acquired information number" is set in the counter area for the second hold notice instead of the information on the number of holds (described later). ).

Next, the non-reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (a) and 61. In this non-reach correspondence setting process, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), first, in step S3401, the notice condition establishment lottery process is executed. The processing content of the lottery process for satisfying the advance notice condition is step S3.
It is the same as the processing content described in 201. However, the table storage area 311 for the establishment lottery
The establishment lottery table stored in is set so that the probability of winning the advance notice condition is lower in the non-reach correspondence setting process than in the reach correspondence setting (FIG. 56 (b)). ing. And, in the non-reach correspondence setting process, the probability of winning the notice condition is
As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the establishment lottery table is set so as to have a probability of 1/30. When the notice condition establishment lottery process is performed in step S3401, step S34
Proceeding to 02, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3401 is that the advance notice condition is satisfied. If the advance notice condition is not won, the main setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the advance notice condition is won, the non-reach-for non-reach winning process in step S3403 is performed, and then the non-reach correspondence setting process is terminated.

In the non-reach establishment winning process, as shown in FIG. 61, first, in step S3411, the reach guessing notice flag (reach guessing notice information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is filled with the reach guessing notice flag (reach guessing notice information storage means). Non-reach guess notice information) is stored.

The reach guess notice flag is a situation in which the conditions for executing the hold notice are satisfied.
This is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the mode in which the hold notice is actually performed should be the reach estimation mode. Then, the flag is stored when the condition for executing the hold notice related to the reach estimation mode is satisfied, and when the condition for ending the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information that triggered the establishment of the condition. It will be erased.

After executing the process of step S3411, in step S3412, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33. If it was transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, step S
At 3413, the first notice condition fulfillment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. In the following step S3414, the information on the number of held holds included in the hold command to be read this time is specified, and the information on the number of held holds is transmitted to the first hold notice counter area in the hold notice counter area 325. Set. After that, this setting process ends. In addition, as described in step S3414 with parentheses, in the second hold notice, the "target acquired information number" is set in the first hold notice counter area instead of the information on the number of holds (described later). ).

On the other hand, when the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3415. In the following step S3416, the information on the number of holds to be included in the hold command to be read this time is specified, and the information on the number of holds to be specified is applied to the second hold notice counter area in the hold notice counter area 325. Set. After that, this setting process ends. In addition, as described in step S3416 with parentheses, in the second hold notice, the "target acquired information number" is set in the counter area for the second hold notice instead of the information on the number of holds (described later). ).

Here, the conditions under which the hold information can be set as a trigger for executing the hold notice by executing the hold command correspondence process as described above are the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the lower. It is different from the hold information acquired based on the winning of the operation port 34. That is, in order for the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 to be set as a trigger for executing the hold notice, the hold information is not in the open / close execution mode and is not in the high frequency support mode. While the reserved information needs to be acquired, such a condition is not set for the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. Furthermore, if the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 corresponds to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result, it is a jackpot winning in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Only when it corresponds to the common winning information that becomes, it is set as an opportunity to execute the hold notice, whereas such a condition is set for the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. Not set. With the above configuration, the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is set as an opportunity to execute the hold notice, and the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is set as the hold notice. It is possible to make the situation different from the situation set as the trigger for the execution of.

<Variable display control processing>
Next, the variation display control process in step S3013 will be described below. In the variation display control process, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the symbol for one game, and the main control device 81
When the variation end command sent from is received, the process of displaying the variation display of the symbol as the final stop is executed. Further, in the variable display control process, a process of displaying an image for the hold notice during the variable display of the symbol is executed in accordance with the setting for performing the hold notice.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 62, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the symbol display device 41 is executing the variable display of the symbols for one game. When the variation display of the symbol for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the fluctuation command has not been received, the fluctuation display control process is terminated as it is. If a variation command has been received, the variation start process is executed in step S3503, and then the variation display control process ends.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the symbol for one game is performed, it is determined in step S3504 whether or not the variation end command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the variation end command has not been received, the variation display control process is terminated after the variable intermediate process is executed in step S3505. If you have received a variable end command
After executing the variation end processing in step S3506, the variation display control process is terminated.

Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing in step S3503 and the fluctuation intermediate processing in step S3505 will be described in detail. In the variable end processing in step S3506, VDP25
By outputting the final stop display command to 5, the symbol of the stop result in this game round is displayed as the final stop.

<Process for starting fluctuation>
First, the fluctuation start processing in step S3503 will be described. The variation start process is a process for starting the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 based on the reception of the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 63, in step S3601, the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the variation display time are specified from the variation command to be read this time. Further, as described above, the main control device 81 also transmits a type command when transmitting a variation command. Therefore, in step S3601, the type command received together with the variable command to be read this time is read, and from the command, 15R probability variation jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, and unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result information. , Explicit 2R Specify the game result information such as the probability change jackpot result information or the deviation result information.
Then, in step S3601, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won,
If the jackpot is won, the information on the jackpot type, if the jackpot is not won, the information on the presence or absence of reach, and the information on the variable display time are grasped, and the grasped information is used as the MPU252.
Store in the register of.

In the following step S3602, the variable display pattern setting process is executed. In the variable display pattern setting process, the variable display pattern table (variable display pattern information group) stored in the variable display pattern table storage area (variable display pattern information group storage means) 313 in the program ROM 253 is grasped in step S3601. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the selected information, and use the address information of the selected variable display pattern as the work R.
It is stored in the storage area 327 of the pattern information address provided in AM254.

By storing the address information of the variation display pattern in the storage area 327 of the pattern information address, the MPU 252 generates an internal command for the VDP 255 in an internal command output process (not shown) different from the variation start process. Then, the symbol display device 41 is driven so that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the variation display pattern set this time is performed. In this case, the output processing of the internal command is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and in the output processing of the internal command, the internal command corresponding to the information of the set fluctuation display pattern is displayed. It is generated according to the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display, and the generated internal command is output to VDP255. The VDP 255 reads image data from the character ROM 256 in response to its internal command, and writes the read image data to the video RAM 257. As a result, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display of the symbol corresponding to the variable display pattern set this time.

In addition, the information of the variable display pattern stored in the variable display pattern table includes not only the content of the variable display of the symbol but also the information of the background image displayed together with the variable display of the symbol and the case where the reach effect is performed. Information on the image of the reach production is also included. Therefore, when an internal command corresponding to the set variable display pattern is output to the VDP 255, the background image is displayed together with the variable display of the symbol, and further, when various effects such as reach effect are performed, the relevant effect is applicable. The production image is displayed.

After executing the variation display pattern setting process in step S3602, step S36
At 03, the setting process of the advance notice effect is executed. Here, regarding the setting process of the notice effect, FIG. 64
This will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 65.

In the advance notice effect setting process, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the first advance notice condition establishment flag or the second advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. 1st
If both the advance notice condition establishment flag and the second advance notice condition establishment flag (both) are not stored, the present setting process is terminated as it is.

When the first notice condition establishment flag or the second notice condition establishment flag is stored, in step S3702, it is determined whether or not the normal jackpot notice flag or the probability variation jackpot notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254. When either the normal jackpot notice flag or the probability change jackpot notice flag is stored, the jackpot correspondence occurrence lottery process is executed in step S3703, and the process proceeds to step S3706.

If it is determined in step S3702 that neither the normal jackpot notice flag nor the probability variation jackpot notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254, the process proceeds to step S3704. In the process of step S3704, it is determined whether or not the jackpot guessing notice flag (normal jackpot guessing notice flag or probability variation jackpot guessing notice flag) is stored in the work RAM 254. If either the normal jackpot guessing notice flag or the probability variation jackpot guessing notice flag is stored, the missed response occurrence lottery process is executed in step S3705, and the process proceeds to step S3706.

Here, in the jackpot correspondence occurrence lottery processing and the loss correspondence occurrence lottery processing, the work RAM 25
The counter value (numerical information) for the generated lottery is read from the generated lottery counter area 328 of 4. Here, the generated lottery counter area 328 is configured to be able to store counter values of "0 to 99", and each time the command correspondence process (FIG. 54) is activated, that is, about 2 msec.
It is configured to be incremented by 1 in a cycle, and is initialized to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Then, in each generated lottery process, the above-mentioned reading is performed with reference to the generated lottery table (generated lottery information group) stored in the generated lottery table storage area (generated lottery information group storage means) 314 of the program ROM 253. It is determined whether or not the counter value for the generated lottery corresponds to the generated winning.

In this case, as the generated lottery table, a table referred to in the jackpot correspondence generated lottery process and a table referred to in the missed correspondence generated lottery process are set. In the generated lottery table referred to in the jackpot correspondence generated lottery process, as shown in FIG. The value is set to "90-99". That is, it is set so that the probability of winning is 9/10. Further, among the counter values that are generated winnings, "0 to 44" corresponds to the confirmed winning, and "45 to 89" corresponds to the non-determined winning. The details will be explained later, but the content of the hold notice differs depending on whether the winning is confirmed or not.

On the other hand, in the generated lottery table referred to in the loss-corresponding occurrence lottery process, as shown in FIG. The counter value is set to "50 to 99". That is, it is set so that the probability of winning is 1/2. In addition, in the generation lottery table referred to in the jackpot correspondence occurrence lottery process, two patterns of confirmed winning and non-confirmed winning were set as the occurrence winning, but the occurrence referred to in the loss correspondence occurrence lottery processing. In the lottery table, only one pattern of unconfirmed winning is set as the occurrence winning.

After executing the process of step S3703 or step S3705, step S370
At 6, it is determined whether or not the result of the generated lottery process is the generated winning. If it is not a winning, this setting process ends as it is. If the event is won, step S3707
At, it is determined whether or not the generated winning is a fixed winning or a non-fixed winning. If it is a definite winning, the "production setting process corresponding to the definite winning of the big hit notice" of steps S3708 to S3710 is executed, and if it is a non-confirmed winning, step S37.
The effect setting process of "corresponding to unconfirmed winning of big hit notice" in steps 11 to S3713 is executed.

In the "production setting process corresponding to the final winning of the jackpot notice", first, in step S3708,
It is determined whether or not the probability change jackpot notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254 among the probability change jackpot notice flag and the normal jackpot notice flag. When the probability variation jackpot notice flag is stored, in step S3709, the probability variation jackpot confirmation effect flag (probability variation jackpot confirmation effect information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is stored. After storing the probability change jackpot confirmation effect information), this setting process is terminated. Further, when the probability change big hit notice flag is not stored, that is, when the normal big hit notice flag is stored, in step S3710, the normal confirmation effect flag storage area (normal confirmation effect flag storage area 322 in various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254).
After storing the normal jackpot confirmation effect flag (normal jackpot confirmation effect information) in the normal confirmation effect information storage means), this setting process is terminated.

The probabilistic jackpot confirmation effect flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the probabilistic jackpot confirmation effect is to be performed by the hold notice when the hold notice is given in the predetermined game times. The probabilistic jackpot confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that the 15R probabilistic jackpot result will surely occur in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice. The probabilistic jackpot confirmation effect flag is deleted when the effect corresponding to the flag is set in the game times for which the effect is executed.

In addition, the normal jackpot confirmation effect flag is set when a hold notice is given at a predetermined game time.
This is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the normal jackpot confirmation effect will be performed in the hold notice. The normal jackpot confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that the normal jackpot result is surely generated in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice. The normal jackpot confirmation effect flag is deleted when the effect corresponding to the flag is set in the game times for which the effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the production setting process corresponding to the unconfirmed winning, first, in step S3711, the work RA
It is determined whether or not any of the probability change jackpot notice flag, the normal jackpot notice flag, the probability change jackpot guessing notice flag, and the normal jackpot guessing notice flag is stored in the M254.

When either the probabilistic jackpot warning flag or the probabilistic jackpot guessing warning flag is stored, in step S3712, various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 are stored.
Probability change jackpot guessing effect flag storage area (probability variation jackpot guessing effect information storage means)
After storing the probability variation jackpot guessing effect flag (probability variation jackpot estimation effect information) in, this setting process is terminated. Further, when neither the probabilistic jackpot notice flag nor the probabilistic jackpot guessing notice flag is stored, that is, when either the normal jackpot notice flag or the normal jackpot guessing notice flag is stored, in step S2413. Work RAM 2
After storing the normal jackpot guessing effect flag (normal jackpot guessing effect information) in the normal jackpot guessing effect flag storage area (normal jackpot guessing effect information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of 54, this setting process ends.

The probabilistic jackpot guessing effect flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the probabilistic jackpot guessing effect is to be performed by the hold notice when the hold notice is given in the predetermined game times. The probability change jackpot guessing effect is an effect for notifying the player that a 15R probability variation jackpot result may occur in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice. The probabilistic jackpot guessing effect flag is deleted when the effect corresponding to the flag is set in the game times for which the effect is executed.

In addition, the normal jackpot guessing effect flag is set when a hold notice is given at a predetermined game time.
This is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the normal jackpot guessing effect is performed by the hold notice. The normal jackpot guessing effect is an effect for notifying the player that a normal jackpot result may occur in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice. The normal jackpot guessing effect flag is deleted when the effect corresponding to the flag is set in the game times for which the effect is executed.

If the jackpot guessing notice flag (normal jackpot guessing notice flag or probability variation jackpot guessing notice flag) is not stored in the work RAM 254, step S3714
(See FIG. 65). In the process of step S3714, the work RAM
It is determined whether or not the reach notice flag is stored in 254. Then, when it is determined that the reach notice flag is stored, the reach notice correspondence occurrence lottery process is executed in step S3715, and the process proceeds to step S3717.

When it is determined in the process of step S3714 that the reach notice flag is not stored in the work RAM 254 (when the reach guess notice flag is stored), step S3
At 716, the lottery process for generating gasselech is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3717.

Here, also in the reach-corresponding generation lottery process and the gassereach-corresponding occurrence lottery process, the counter value (numerical information) for the generation lottery is read from the generation lottery counter area 328 of the work RAM 254. Here, the generated lottery counter area 328 is configured to be able to store counter values of "0 to 99", and is incremented by 1 each time the command correspondence process (FIG. 54) is activated, that is, in a cycle of about 2 msec. In addition to being configured, it is configured to be initialized to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Then, in each occurrence lottery process, the program RO
The counter value for the generated lottery read out is generated with reference to the generated lottery table (generated lottery information group) stored in the generated lottery table storage area (generated lottery information group storage means) 314 of M253. Judge whether or not it corresponds to winning.

In this case, as the generated lottery table, a table referred to in the reach-corresponding generated lottery process and a table referred to in the gassereach-corresponding generated lottery process are set. As shown in FIG. 66 (c), the counter value for winning the occurrence is set to "0 to 49" in the occurrence lottery table referred to in the reach confirmation correspondence occurrence lottery process, and the result is out of order. The counter value is set to "50 to 99". That is, it is set so that the probability of winning is 1/2. Further, among the counter values that are generated winnings, "0 to 24" corresponds to the confirmed winning, and "25 to 49" corresponds to the non-determined winning. The details will be described later, but the content of the hold notice is different depending on whether the winning is confirmed or not.

On the other hand, the table for generating lottery referred to in the generated lottery process corresponding to gasselech is shown in FIG. 66 (d).
), The counter value that is the winning result is set to "0 to 1", and the counter value that is the result of the loss is set to "2 to 99". That is, it is set so that the probability of winning is 1/50. Then, in the case of an outbreak winning, the winning is uniformly unconfirmed.

After executing the process of step S3715 or step S3716, step S371
In step 7, it is determined whether or not the result of the generated lottery process is the generated winning. If it is not a winning, this setting process ends as it is. If the event is won, step S3718
In step S3719, in step S3719, in the reach confirmation effect flag storage area (reach confirmation effect information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Reach confirmed production flag (reach confirmed production information)
After storing, this setting process ends. If the winner is not confirmed, step S3
At 720, after storing the reach guessing effect flag (gasse reach effect information) in the reach estimation effect flag storage area (reach estimation effect information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254, the present setting process is terminated.

The reach confirmation effect flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the probability change confirmation effect is to be performed by the hold notice when the hold notice is given in the predetermined game times. The reach confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that the reach will surely occur in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice. The reach confirmation effect flag is deleted when the effect corresponding to the flag is set in the game times for which the effect is executed.

Further, the reach guessing effect flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that when a hold notice is given in a predetermined game time, a normal final effect is performed by the hold notice. The gassereach production is a game round related to the hold information set as an opportunity to execute the hold notice.
This is an effect for notifying the player that a reach effect may occur. The reach guess effect flag is deleted when the effect corresponding to the flag is set in the game times for which the effect is executed.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 63), after executing the advance notice effect setting process in step S3603, the variation command read this time is the first variation command in step S3604. And, it is determined whether or not it is the first variation command among the second variation commands.

That is, the variable command to be read this time is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit among the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. It is determined whether or not the hold information is the start target of the game round, that is, the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is the start target of the game round and has been transmitted.

In the case of the first variation command, the first flag erasing process is executed in step S3605, then the present variation start process is terminated, and in the case of the second variation command, the first change process is performed in step S3606. 2 After executing the flag erasing process, the process for starting this fluctuation is terminated.

Here, the first flag erasing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67.

In the first flag erasing process, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the first jackpot hold flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the first jackpot hold flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3805 without executing the processes of steps S3802 to S3804. When the first jackpot hold flag is stored, the first erase is performed so that the value stored in the first erase counter area in the erase counter area 323 is decremented in step S3802. Update the counter area information.

After that, in step S3803, it is determined whether or not the value of the first erasing counter area is "0". If it is "0", after clearing the first jackpot hold flag in step S3804, the process proceeds to step S2505. If it is not "0", the process of step S3804 is not executed. The process proceeds to step S3505.

As described above, the first jackpot hold flag includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the hold information held and stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81. It is a flag to be stored when the flag is stored, and when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit in the first erase counter area, the hold information is stored in the game times. Information for identifying the order to be started is stored. Furthermore, in the hold command corresponding process (FIG. 55), the process of step S3102 is executed at the timing before the process of step S3103 is executed, so that the process is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. If the pending information is included in a plurality of pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning, the information on the order of the pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning, which is the start target later, is the first erasing counter. It will be stored in the area. Therefore, when the information in the first erasure counter area becomes "0" as the initial value, the jackpot winning is supported in the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. It means that the hold information is not included, and in this case, the first jackpot hold flag is cleared.

In the first flag erasing process, in step S3805, it is determined whether or not the first notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the first notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the main erasing process is terminated as it is. When the first notice condition establishment flag is stored, the value stored in the first hold notice counter area in the hold notice counter area 325 is decremented by 1 in step S3806. The information in the counter area for the first hold notice is updated.

After that, in step S3807, it is determined whether or not the value of the first hold notice counter area is “0”. If it is "0", the first notice condition establishment flag is deleted in step S3808, and the notice initialization process is executed in step S3809. In the notice initialization process, when any of the normal jackpot notice flag, the probability change jackpot notice flag, the normal guess notice flag, the probability change guess notice flag, and the reach notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254, the stored flag is set. This is the process of erasing.

Here, the first notice condition establishment flag is stored when the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is set as an opportunity to execute the hold notice, as described above. When the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit in the first hold notice counter area, the hold information is used for the game. Information for identifying the order to be started is stored. Therefore, when the information in the counter area for the first hold notice becomes "0" as the initial value, the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has already been played. It means that the time has been started, and in this case, the first notice condition establishment flag is deleted.

When the process of step S3809 is executed, the process shifts to the process of step S3810, and the game times started with the value of the first hold notice counter area set to "0" are the game times based on the jackpot hold information (probability change correspondence hold command or normal). Game times executed based on the corresponding hold command)
It is determined whether or not it is. That is, in step S3810, the game times (game results and game times for which the game effect is the target of the advance notice) are the jackpot hold information (1).
It is determined whether or not the game is started based on the 5R probability variation jackpot result and the pending information on which the normal jackpot result is displayed as the game result).

Then, if a positive determination is made in the process of step S3810, the first flag removal process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in the process of step S3810,
The process proceeds to step S3811. That is, if the game times targeted for the advance notice effect are not started based on the jackpot hold information, the process proceeds to step S3811 to determine whether or not the acquired information exists. That is, when the advance notice effect is performed for the predetermined hold information, is the hold information acquired after the predetermined hold information already stored at the time of starting the game round that is the target of the advance notice effect? Judge whether or not.

If a positive determination is made in the process of step S3811, the process proceeds to step S3812, and the second advance notice effect execution determination flag storage area (second advance notice effect execution determination information storage) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. The second notice effect execution determination flag (second notice effect execution determination information) is stored in the means). Then, the first flag erasing process is terminated. Here, as will be described later, the second notice effect execution determination flag indicates that the MPU252 is in a situation where the pending information (target acquired information) that is the target of the second notice effect is searched from the acquired information.
This is the information to be specified in. Then, the second notice effect execution determination flag determines that the second notice effect can be executed based on any of the acquired information, or the second notice effect can be executed based on the acquired information. This information is deleted when it is determined that it is not.

When a positive determination is made in the process of step S3810 and a negative determination is made in the process of step S3811, the first flag erasing process is terminated. Further, step S380.
If it is determined in the process 7 that the value of the counter area for the first hold notice is not "0", the first flag erasing process is terminated without executing step S3810.

Further, in the second flag erasing process in step S3606 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 63), the same process as the first flag erasing process is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 68, in the process of step S3851 (process corresponding to the above-mentioned step S3801), it is determined whether or not the second jackpot hold flag is stored, and the process of step S3852 (the above-mentioned step S3802). In the process corresponding to), the process of updating the second erasing counter area in the erasing counter area 323 is executed, and the process of step S3853 (the above-mentioned step S3) is executed.
In the process corresponding to 803), it is determined whether or not the second erasing counter area is “0”. Further, in the process of step S3854 (the process corresponding to the above-mentioned step S2804), the process of erasing the second jackpot hold flag is executed.

Further, in the process of step S3855 (process corresponding to the above-mentioned step S3805),
It is determined whether or not the second notice condition fulfillment flag is stored, and the process of step S3856 (
In the process corresponding to the above-mentioned step S3806), the process of updating the second hold notice counter area in the hold notice counter area 325 is executed, and in the process of step S3857 (the process corresponding to the above-mentioned step S3807), the first step is performed. 2 The counter area for hold notice is "
It is determined whether or not it is "0". Further, the process of step S3858 (the above-mentioned step S35).
In the process corresponding to 08), the process of erasing the second notice condition establishment flag is executed, and in the process of step S3859 (the process corresponding to the above-mentioned step S3509), the same process as the notice initialization process is executed.

Then, when the process of step S3859 is executed, the process shifts to the process of step S3860, and the game times started with the value of the second hold notice counter area set to "0" are the game times (process times) based on the jackpot hold information. Determine if it exists. That is, in step S3860, it is determined whether or not the game times (processing times) targeted for the advance notice effect are the jackpot hold information. Then, if a positive determination is made in the process of step S3860, the second flag erasing process is terminated. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in the process of step S3860, the process proceeds to the process of step S3861 to determine whether or not the acquired information exists.

If a positive determination is made in the process of step S3861, the process proceeds to step S3862, and the second advance notice effect execution determination flag storage area (second advance notice effect execution determination information storage) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. The second notice effect execution determination flag (second notice effect execution determination information) is stored in the means). Then, the second flag erasing process is terminated. Further, when a positive determination is made in the process of step S3860 and a negative determination is made in the process of step S3861, the second flag erasing process is terminated. Further, step S38
If it is determined in the process of 57 that the value of the counter area for the second hold notice is not "0", the second flag erasing process is terminated without executing step S3860.

Next, the second notice effect execution determination process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. The second advance notice effect execution determination process of FIGS. 69 and 70 is a part of a plurality of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252, and is started in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

When the second notice effect execution determination process is activated, the work RAM 2 is set in step S3901.
The second advance notice effect execution determination flag (second advance notice effect execution determination information) is stored in the second advance notice effect execution determination flag storage area (second advance notice effect execution determination information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of 54. Judge whether or not it has been done. Then, if it is determined in step S3901 that the second advance notice effect execution determination flag is not stored, the second advance notice effect execution determination process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3902, and the second search flag is set in the second search flag storage area (second search flag storage area 322) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the search information storage means). Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3902, the process proceeds to the process of step S3920, and if a negative determination is made in step S3902, the process proceeds to the process of step S3903. In the process of step S3903, it is determined whether or not the first search flag is stored in the first search flag storage area (first search information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254.

Here, the first search flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the MPU 252 is in a situation of searching whether or not the jackpot pending information exists in the acquired information. Then, when it is discovered that the jackpot hold information exists in the acquired information, or when it is confirmed that the jackpot hold information does not exist, it is deleted.

Further, as will be described later, the second search flag tells MPU252 that the lottery for establishing the notice condition is performed in the order of storage based on the acquired information (reach hold information or non-reach hold information) other than the jackpot hold information. Information for identifying. This second search flag is
If the result of the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition based on any of the acquired information is won, or if the result of the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition for the target acquired information is all lost, the information is deleted.

If it is determined in step S3903 that the first search flag is not stored in the first search flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S3904 to store the first search flag in the first search flag storage area, and the first search counter. The process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit value (Cmax) of (Ci) is performed. Then, when the process of step S3904 is performed, the process proceeds to step S3905. Further, in step S3903, if it is determined that the first search flag is stored in the first search flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S3905 without going through step S3904.

Here, the first search counter is provided in the first search counter area in the search counter area 329, and is a measuring means for specifying the timing for deleting the first search flag when the first search flag is stored. Is. The number of acquired information is set to the upper limit value (Cmax) in the first search counter, and the count value of the first search counter is updated so as to be incremented by 1 each time the acquired information is searched in the storage order. To. Then, the information stored in the first search counter area after the update is the upper limit value (Cmax), that is,
When the number of acquired information is reached, the first search flag is cleared.

In the process of step S3905, a process of searching whether or not the jackpot hold information exists in the acquired information is performed. This step S3905 is performed based on the count value of the first search counter. That is, it is determined whether or not the first acquired information among the acquired information (however, when the number of acquired information is one, the acquired information) is the jackpot pending information. here,
The first acquired information is called "acquired information 1", and when the number of acquired information is 2 or more, the acquired information stored next is called "acquired information 2", and the number of acquired information is 3 or more. In the case of, the acquired information further stored next is referred to as "acquired information 3", and when the number of acquired information is 4, the acquired information further stored next is referred to as "acquired information 4".

Here, in the present embodiment, a search for whether or not the jackpot pending information exists in the acquired information (
When the jackpot hold information is found by searching the first search) based on the count value of the first search counter, the jackpot hold information is converted into valid jackpot hold information (in step S3906).
It is determined whether or not it is (described later), and if it is valid, the valid jackpot hold information flag (described later) is stored in the valid jackpot hold information flag storage area, and if it is invalid, the invalid jackpot hold information flag is stored. Is stored in the invalid information flag storage area (described later). Then, when it is determined that the valid information flag is stored in step S3907, the valid jackpot hold information flag (described later) is deleted in step S3908, and then the process proceeds to step S3910, and the invalid jackpot hold information flag is stored. If it is determined that this is done, the invalid jackpot hold information flag (described later) is cleared in step S3909, and then the process proceeds to step S3913.

Here, the effective jackpot hold information determination process in step S3906 determines whether or not to perform "various settings for re-holding notice" by the same process as steps S3106 to S3109 in FIG. 55 described above. It is a process. That is, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), first, in step S3941, the jackpot hold information (probability change correspondence hold command or normal correspondence hold command) is transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33. Judge whether or not. If the command is transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, it is determined in step S3942 whether or not the open / close execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and in step S3943, the work RAM 254 is determined. It is determined whether or not the support flag is stored, and further, in step S3944, it is determined whether or not the probabilistic response hold command or the normal response hold command that is the read target this time contains common information.

As a result, when the open / close execution flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3942, and the process proceeds to step S3946. Then, in step S3946, a process of storing the jackpot invalid information flag in the jackpot invalid information flag storage area is performed. In addition, even if the open / close execution flag is not stored, if the support flag is stored,
A negative judgment is made in step S3942 and an affirmative judgment is made in step S3943.
The process proceeds to step S3946 as it is. Further, even if both the open / close execution flag and the support flag are not stored, if the common information is not included, step S3
A negative judgment is made in both 942 and step S3943, a negative judgment is made in step S3944, the process proceeds to step S3946, a process of storing the invalid big hit hold information flag storage area is performed, and a valid big hit is performed. The pending information determination process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot hold information (probability change correspondence hold command or normal correspondence hold command) is transmitted based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, the process proceeds to step S3945. Further, when the jackpot hold information is transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, it is the case that both the open / close execution flag and the support flag are not stored in the work RAM 254, and the hold command is concerned. If common information is included in, step S3
The process proceeds to 945, a process of storing the effective jackpot hold information flag in the valid jackpot hold information flag storage area is performed, and the valid jackpot hold information determination process is terminated.

When the process of step S3908 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3910, and a lottery for satisfying the notice condition for the jackpot is performed. The lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is the same process as S3201 in FIG. 56 (a). Then, when the process of step S3910 is executed, it is determined in step S3911 whether or not the lottery for satisfying the notice condition for big hit is won. Then, if it is determined that the player has won, the jackpot establishment winning process is executed in step S3912. This jackpot establishment winning process is the same process as in FIG. 59 described above. However, step S3912
In step S3216 of the “big hit establishment winning process” executed in
As shown in parentheses, a number indicating the order of occurrence of the acquired information won in the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition (hereinafter referred to as "the number of acquired information to be obtained") is set in the first hold advance notice counter. Similarly, in step S3218, as shown in the parentheses of FIG. 59, a number indicating the order of occurrence of the acquired information won in the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition (the number of target acquired information) is set. Specifically, when the acquired information (big hit hold information) won in the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is the acquired information 3, "3" is set in the first hold notice counter (second hold notice counter). .. For example, even if the number of acquired information acquired is "3", the acquired information acquired second (in the order of acquisition) (big hit hold information).
When the lottery for establishing the notice condition is won, "2" is set in the first hold notice counter (second hold notice counter). As described above, the lottery for establishing the notice condition for the jackpot in step S3910 may be performed based on FIG. 57 (b). That is, the probability of winning may differ depending on whether the jackpot hold information is a probability change correspondence hold command or a normal correspondence hold command. For example, when the jackpot hold information is a probability change correspondence hold command, the probability of winning in the notice condition establishment lottery process is higher than in the case of the normal correspondence hold command (for example, 1.5 times), and the second notice is given. The execution probability of the effect may be increased. Regarding this point, "lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition in step S3906a of FIG. 79 (modification example 4)" described later.
The same applies to the later-described "lottery for establishing the advance notice condition in step S3908b in FIG. 89 (second embodiment)" and the later-described "lottery for establishing the advance notice condition in step S3906c in FIG. 110 (third embodiment)".

When the jackpot establishment winning process of step S3912 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3914, the process of erasing the second notice effect execution determination flag and the first search flag is performed, and then the second notice effect execution determination process ends. In the first embodiment, since the jackpot hold information is the target of the priority notice condition establishment process in the acquired information, the second notice effect can be executed with a higher probability than the normal notice effect.

Further, if the lottery for satisfying the notice condition for big hit is unsuccessful in step S3911, the process proceeds to step S3913. Further, even if the invalid jackpot hold information is not stored in the process of S3907 (the jackpot hold information that is the target of the process of S3906 is not the valid jackpot hold information), the process proceeds to step S3913. In the process of step S3913, it is determined whether or not the number of existing information is "1". That is, when the number of acquired information is one and the acquired information is jackpot hold information, whether the jackpot hold information is valid hold information (hold information that is not subject to hold notice) or the jackpot hold If the lottery for satisfying the information notice condition is unsuccessful, the purpose is to end the second notice effect execution determination process.
Therefore, when the number of existing information is "1", the process proceeds to step S3914, the second notice effect execution determination flag and the first search flag are deleted, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is performed. To finish.

If it is determined in the process of step S3913 that the number of acquired information is larger than one (when a negative determination is made in step S3913), the process proceeds to step S3915 and "Ci ≥ 2".
It is determined whether or not it is. That is, whether the jackpot hold information corresponding to the numerical value of the first search counter (the jackpot hold information determined to be invalid in S3907, the jackpot hold information that was rejected in the notice condition establishment lottery) is in the second or higher acquisition order. Whether or not (whether or not there is acquired information acquired before the jackpot hold information that is the target of the processing of S3906 this time) is determined. Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3915, the process proceeds to step S3916.
In step S3916, a process of deleting the first search flag from the first search flag storage area, a process of storing the second search flag in the second search flag storage area, and an upper limit value of the second search counter (Di) ( After performing the process of setting "Ci-1" as Dmax), the second notice effect execution determination process is temporarily terminated. In this case, the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di) is set to the number of acquired information acquired before the jackpot hold information that is the target of the processing of S3906 this time. For example, if the acquired information 3 is the jackpot hold information that is the target of the processing of S3906 this time, the acquired information 1 and 2 are the second search counter (Di).
Is set to the upper limit value (Dmax) of. Then, when the process of step S3915 is completed, the second notice effect execution determination process is once completed, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is started again, the affirmative determination of steps S3901 and S3902 is performed, and FIG. The process proceeds to step S3920. If a negative determination is made in step S3915 (when the jackpot hold information of the acquired information 1 is invalid or the player is lost in the second notice lottery), the process proceeds to step S3914.
The second notice effect execution determination process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in the process of step S3905, the process proceeds to step S3917, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value (Cmax). That is, if the jackpot hold information cannot be found even if the process of step S3905 is repeated for the number of acquired information, it is determined in step S3917 whether or not the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value. More specifically, when the number of acquired information is "3", the acquired information 1 (Ci = 1), the acquired information 2 (Ci = 2), and the acquired information 3 (Ci = 3) are in the order of their storage. If the jackpot hold information cannot be found even after the processing of step S3905, it is positively determined in step S3917, and if the processing of step S3905 has not yet been performed on the acquired information 3 (Ci = 3). , Step S3917 is negatively determined. Further, when the number of acquired information is "1", if the acquired information 1 (Ci = 1) is negatively determined in the process of step S3905, it is positively determined in step S3917 at that time.

If it is determined in step S3917 that it is not the upper limit value (Cmax), step S3918 is determined.
The process proceeds to, the count value of the first search counter (Ci) is incremented by 1, and the second notice effect execution determination process is temporarily terminated. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is restarted,
Affirmative determination in step S3901, negative determination in step S3902, and step S390
After the affirmative determination of 3, the process proceeds to step S3905. In this case, the acquired information acquired following the acquired information previously targeted for processing in S3905 (acquired information for determining whether or not it is jackpot pending information) is targeted for processing in S3905.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3917 that the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value (Cmax), the process proceeds to step S3919, and the process of deleting the first search flag from the first search flag storage area and the first step. 2 After performing the process of storing the search flag in the second search flag storage area and the process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di), the second notice effect is executed. The judgment process ends.

In this case, when the second advance notice effect execution determination process is restarted, the process proceeds to step S3920 of FIG. 70 through the affirmative determination of step S3901 and the affirmative determination of step S3902.

In the process after step S3920 of FIG. 70, regarding the acquired information (reach pending information or non-reach pending information) other than the jackpot pending information, it is determined whether or not it is valid acquired information and the lottery for establishing the advance notice condition is determined. Perform in the order of storage of (reach hold information or non-reach hold information). Specifically, in step S3920, it is determined whether or not the acquired information (for example, Di = 1, that is, acquired information 1) indicated by the count value of the second search counter is valid acquired information. Here, the second search counter is provided in the second search counter area in the search counter area 329, and is a measuring means for specifying the timing for deleting the second search flag when the second search flag is stored. Is. An upper limit value is set in the second search counter in step S3919 or step S3916, and the count value of the second search counter is updated so as to be incremented by 1 each time the acquired information is searched in the storage order. Then, when the information stored in the second search counter area after the update reaches the upper limit value (Dmax), that is, the number of acquired information, the second search flag is deleted.

As described above, the process of step S3920 is performed based on the count value of the second search counter. Then, the effective acquired information determination process in step S3920 is a process for determining whether or not to perform "various settings for giving a hold notice" by the same process as in steps S3113 to S3115 of FIG. 55 described above. That is, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), first, in step S3951, is the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33? Judge whether or not. If it is transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, it is determined in step S3952 whether or not the open / close execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and in step S3953.
It is determined whether or not the support flag is stored in the work RAM 254.

As a result, when the open / close execution flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3952, the process proceeds to S3955, a process of storing the invalid information flag in the invalid information flag storage area is performed, and the valid information determination process is completed. To do. If the support flag is stored even when the open / close execution flag is not stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3953, the process proceeds to step S3955, and the invalid information flag is stored in the invalid information flag storage area. Is performed, and the valid information judgment process is terminated.

On the other hand, the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is the lower operating port 34.
If it is transmitted based on the winning of the prize, the process proceeds to step S3954. Further, the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is transmitted based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, and both the open / close execution flag and the support flag are stored in the work RAM 254. Even if there is no such case, the process proceeds to step S3954. Then, in step S3954, a process of storing the valid information flag in the valid information flag storage area is performed, and the valid information determination process is terminated.

When the valid information determination process in step S3920 is performed, the process proceeds to step S3921. In step S3921, it is determined whether or not the valid information flag is stored in the valid information flag storage area. Then, when the valid information flag is stored, that is, when the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is valid acquired information, the process proceeds to step S3922 to clear the valid information flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S3923. In step S3923, a lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is performed for the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time. The lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is the same process as the process of S3301 in FIG. 56 (b) or the process of S3401 in FIG. 57 (a) described above. Therefore, the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is "reach hold information".
The probability that the notice condition establishment lottery will be won in step S3923 differs depending on whether the information is "non-reach pending information".

When the lottery for satisfying the notice condition in step S3923 is performed, the process proceeds to step S3924, and it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is winning. And when it is judged that it is a winner,
In step S3925, the advance notice condition establishment process is executed. Specifically, the second at that time
When the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the search counter is "reach pending information", the same "reach winning process" as in FIG. 60 described above is executed, and the acquired information is "non-reach pending information". If this is the case, the same “non-reach establishment winning process” as in FIG. 61 described above is executed.
However, step S33 of the "reach establishment winning process" executed in step S3925.
In 19, the number indicating the acquisition order of the winning information (the number of target acquired information) is set in the first hold notice counter, and in step S3321, the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery is shown. The number (the number of target acquired information) is set in the second hold notice counter. In addition, step S of "establishment winning process for non-reach" executed in step S3925.
Also in 3414, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target acquired information) is set in the first hold advance notice counter, and in step S3416, the acquired information won in the advance notice condition establishment lottery. The number indicating the acquisition order (the number of target acquired information) is set in the second hold notice counter. Specifically, the number of acquired information that won the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is "2".
, "2" is set in the first hold notice counter (second hold notice counter). For example, even if the number of acquired information acquired is "4", if the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is won for the acquired information acquired second (in the order of acquisition), the first hold notice counter (second hold notice). "2" is set in the counter).

When the establishment winning process is executed in step S3925, the process proceeds to step S3926, and the process proceeds to step S3926.
After erasing the second notice effect execution determination flag and the second search flag, the second notice effect execution determination process ends.

In step S3921, the acquired information indicated by the count value of the second search counter (for example, D).
When i = 1, that is, when the acquired information 1) is not valid pending information (when it is determined that the valid information flag is not stored in the valid information flag storage area), that is, the count of the second search counter at that time. If the acquisition information corresponding to the value is not valid acquisition information, step S
The process proceeds to 3927, the invalid information flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S3928. Further, in step S3924, when it is determined that the result of the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition for the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is determined to be unsuccessful, step S3928
Move to.

In step S3928, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value (Dmax). Here, the process of step S3928 is S3916 or S3919.
If valid hold information cannot be found or the lottery for satisfying the notice condition cannot be won even if the process of transition to step S3920 is repeated for the maximum number of times (Dmax) set in the process of, the second notice is given. This is a process for terminating the effect execution determination process. Specifically, when the number of acquired information is "3", the acquired information 1 (Di = 1), the acquired information 2 (Di = 2), and the acquired information 3 (Di = 3) are stepped in the order of their storage. Even if S3920 or later is applied, step S
If no affirmative determination is made in the process of 3924, it is determined in the process of step S3928 that the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value (Dmax). In addition, the acquired information 3 is still available.
If the processing after step S3920 has not been performed for (Di = 3), a negative determination is made in step S3928.

Then, if the upper limit value (Dmax) has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S3929, and the second step is performed.
After incrementing the count value of the search counter (Di) by 1, the second notice effect execution determination process is temporarily terminated. In this case, when the second advance notice effect execution determination process is restarted, the process proceeds to the process after step S3920 after the affirmative determination in step S3901 and the affirmative determination in step S3902.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3928 that the count value of the second search counter has reached the upper limit value (Dmax), the process proceeds to step S3926, and the second notice effect execution determination flag and the second search flag are deleted. After that, the advance notice effect execution determination process is terminated. In addition, S3920
Subsequent processing may be performed separately for the reach hold information and the non-reach hold information. That is, until the count value of the second search counter reaches the upper limit value (Dmax), the lottery for satisfying the notice condition for the reach hold information is performed, and when all the lottery is lost, the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value ( Until Dmax) is reached, a lottery may be held to establish the notice condition for the non-reach pending information.

Here, in the fluctuation start processing shown in FIG. 63, as described above, the first flag erasing process or the second flag erasing process is executed after the setting process of the advance notice effect is executed. As a result, when the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is set as the trigger for executing the hold notice, it becomes the trigger for the execution. Not only can the hold notice be given in the game times that are the target of the start before the game times related to the hold information, but also the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution are continuous with the above hold notice. An effect can be performed. In this case, the above-mentioned effect in the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution corresponds to the game time correspondence notice for predicting the game result in the game times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the game times correspondence notice can be executed by using the configuration for executing the hold notice, and the game times correspondence notice has continuity with respect to the hold notice. can do.

Further, in the first embodiment, step S3809 of FIG. 67 (step S3859 of FIG. 68).
), The process of step S3912 of FIG. 69 or the process of FIG. 7 based on the acquired information (holding information acquired after deciding to execute the completed notice effect) even when the advance notice initialization process is performed.
The process of step S3925 of 0 is performed, and the first notice condition fulfillment flag (second notice condition fulfillment flag) may be stored in the work RAM 254 again. In this case, the first in FIG. 67
In the flag erasing process (second flag erasing process of FIG. 68), a positive determination is obtained in the process of S3805 (S3855), and the process proceeds to S3806 (S3856) and subsequent processes. At this time, the number of target acquired information (total number of acquired information won in the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition and the number of acquired information stored before the acquired information) is the first advance notice counter (second advance notice). Since it is set in the counter), processes such as S3806 (S3856) and S3807 (S3857) are performed, and the second notice effect is executed based on FIGS. 72 and 73, which will be described later. In the first embodiment, if an affirmative determination is made in the process of S3811 (S3861) at the end of the second notice effect, the second notice effect may be executed again.

<Processing during fluctuation>
Next, the process during fluctuation in step S3505 in the variation display control process (FIG. 62) will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. The variable processing is a process for displaying an image for holding notice during variable display of a symbol. 72 and 73 are flowcharts showing the process for changing, and FIGS. 74 and 74 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the advance notice effect.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the advance notice effect. In the MPU 252, the elapsed time counter area 329 as the elapsed time measuring means (or the elapsed period measuring means) provided in the work RAM 254 is used to measure the time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, when the variation display is started, the addition process of the elapsed time counter area 329 is executed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). At the end of the game round, the information in the elapsed time counter area 329 is initialized to "0" as an initial value. Also, program ROM2
In the elapsed time table of the elapsed time table storage area 315 provided in 53, a counter value corresponding to the execution timing of the advance notice effect is set. The counter value is set as a timing in the middle of the game. In step S4001, whether or not the value stored in the current elapsed time counter area 329 exceeds the value stored in the elapsed time table storage area 315. judge.

If it is determined in step S4001 that it is not the execution timing of the advance notice effect, the current variable processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the execution timing of the advance notice effect, the processes after step S4002 are executed.

In this step S4002, it is determined whether or not the jackpot notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and if it is stored, the process proceeds to the process after step S4003.
If it is not stored, the process proceeds to the process after step S4010 (FIG. 73).

In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot confirmation effect flag is stored, and if the probability variation jackpot confirmation effect flag is stored, after setting the probability variation jackpot confirmation character in step S4004, this fluctuation is in progress. End the processing. Step S40
By setting the probability variation jackpot confirmation character in 04, in the output processing of the internal command in MPU252, an internal command is generated for VDP255 so that the image of the probability variation confirmation character is displayed on the symbol display device 41. And output. As a result, FIG. 74
As shown in (a), on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, as a probability change confirmation character, "
Certainly! !! Characters with the characters "" are displayed. When the step S4004 is executed, the process of erasing the probability change confirmation effect flag is executed.

If the probability change jackpot confirmation effect flag is not stored, in step S4005,
It is determined whether or not the normal jackpot confirmation effect flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and if the normal jackpot confirmation effect flag is stored, the normal jackpot confirmation character is set in step 4006, and then this change is in progress. End the processing. By setting the normal jackpot confirmed character in step S4006, in the output processing of the internal command in the MPU 252, an internal command is issued to the VDP 255 so that the image of the normal jackpot confirmed character is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Generate and output. As a result, FIG. 7
As shown in 4 (b), on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, as a normal confirmed character,
A character with the characters "Through !!" is displayed. When the step S4006 is executed, the process of erasing the jackpot confirmation effect flag is usually executed.

If the normal jackpot confirmation effect flag is not stored, in step S4007,
It is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot guessing effect flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and if the probability variation jackpot guessing effect flag is stored, the probability variation jackpot guessing character is set in step S4008, and then this fluctuation is in progress. End the processing. Step S4008
By setting the probabilistic jackpot guessing character in, in the output processing of the internal command in MPU252, an internal command is generated for VDP255 so that the image of the probabilistic jackpot guessing character is displayed on the symbol display device 41. And output. As a result, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a character with the character “probability?” Is displayed as the probabilistic jackpot guessing character. In addition, step S400
At the time of execution of 8, the process of erasing the probability variation jackpot guessing effect flag is executed.

If it is determined in step S4007 that the probabilistic jackpot guessing effect flag is not stored, the normal jackpot guessing effect flag is stored. Therefore, after setting the normal jackpot guessing character in step S4009, this variable processing is performed. To finish. Here, step S
By setting the normal jackpot guessing character in 4009, in the output processing of the internal command in MPU252, an internal command is generated for VDP255 so that the image of the normal jackpot guessing character is displayed on the symbol display device 41. And output. As a result, as shown in FIG. 74 (d), on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a character with the character "tsu?" Is displayed as a normal jackpot guessing character. When the step S4009 is executed, the process of erasing the jackpot guessing effect flag is usually executed.

If it is determined in step S4002 that the jackpot notice flag is not stored in the work RAM 254, the process proceeds to step S4010 (FIG. 73), and it is determined whether or not the reach notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254. Then, when the reach notice flag is stored, the reach confirmation character is set in step S4011, and then the process for during this fluctuation is terminated. By setting the reach confirmed character in step S4011, in the output processing of the internal command in the MPU 252, an internal command is generated for the VDP 255 so that the image of the reach confirmed character is displayed on the symbol display device 41. And output. As a result, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), on the display screen of the symbol display device 41,
As the reach confirmed character, the character with the character "reach certainty" is displayed.
When the step S4010 is executed, the reach notice flag is erased.

If the reach notice flag is not stored, work RA is performed in step S4012.
It is determined whether or not the reach guessing effect flag is stored in M254, and if the reach guessing effect flag is stored, the reach guessing effect flag is set in step S4013, and then this variable processing is performed. finish. By setting the reach guessing effect flag in step S4013, in the output processing of the internal command in the MPU 252, an internal command is generated for the VDP 255 so that the image of the reach guessing character is displayed on the symbol display device 41. And output. As a result, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the symbol display device 41
On the display screen of, a character with the character "reach?" Is displayed as the reach guess character. In this case, the reach display may or may not appear during the variable display based on the hold information that is the target of the advance notice effect. When the step S4012 is executed, the reach estimation effect flag is erased.

If it is determined in step S4012 that the reach estimation effect flag is not stored in the work RAM 254, the current variable processing is terminated as it is.

Here, the features of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 (a)
) Indicates the relationship between the content of the pending information and its rank. In addition, the rank indicates the order of the degree of advantage for the player, and the higher the rank of the reserved information (the smaller the number indicating the rank, the smaller the reserved information), the higher the advantage is. Probability to be determined (
In other words, the lottery for establishing the notice condition) ”is high. Specifically, the hold information indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot is "1st rank", the hold information indicating the normal jackpot is "2nd rank", the hold information displaying the missed result through super reach, and the missed result through normal reach. The hold information that displays the result and the hold information that displays the result of the deviation without going through the reach are classified as "third rank".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pending information is ranked, and the second notice effect execution determination process is performed. That is, in the second notice effect execution determination process, whether or not the jackpot hold information exists in the acquired information (acquired information linked to the execution of the open / close mode, that is, the first
(Whether or not the acquired information of the rank or the second rank exists) is searched in the order of its storage. Then, if it is found, the search for the existence or nonexistence of the jackpot hold information is completed at that time, and for the found jackpot hold information, a lottery for establishing the notice condition for the jackpot (a lottery similar to the jackpot correspondence setting process) is performed. If it is won, the second notice effect execution determination process is completed. In addition, in the case of losing the lottery for establishing the notice condition for big hit, the lottery for establishing the notice condition for reach or non-reach (big hit) for the acquired information acquired before the jackpot hold information (the acquired information). Perform the same lottery as the corresponding setting process). That is, in the second notice effect execution determination process, the existence or nonexistence of specific hold information (big hit hold information) is searched, and if the specific hold information exists, the second notice is first given to the hold information. The production execution judgment is performed. Then, if the lottery for satisfying the notice condition for the big hit is won, the second notice effect execution determination process is completed, and if the result is lost, up to the hold information before the specific hold information (specific hold). (Up to the pending information acquired immediately before the information), the second notice effect execution determination process is performed.

In this case, the winning probability of the notice condition establishment lottery based on the hold information of the first rank or the second rank is higher than the winning probability of the notice condition establishment lottery performed based on the hold information of other ranks. For this reason, when the result of the game round based on the hold information that is the target of the hold notice is out of order, there is a possibility of entering the look-ahead zone if there is already obtained information (the lottery for establishing the notice condition may be won). ) Can be raised, and the gameplay in the game can be enhanced by making it easier to win a specific look-ahead zone. That is, in the lottery for establishing the notice condition of the second notice effect execution determination process, it is possible to give priority to the specific hold information (hold information of the first rank or the second rank), thereby giving priority to the hold information. It is possible to increase the possibility of entering the look-ahead zone. In addition, by ranking the reserved information, it is possible to improve the gameplay in the game, such as making it easier to win a specific look-ahead zone.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a hold notice is given based on the hold information (look-ahead information) sent from the main control device 81 to the voice lamp control device 82 (display control device 212) (when performing a look-ahead effect). In order to prevent problems due to complicated control, first, a lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition (lottery for the look-ahead zone) is performed. Then, when the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition (lottery for the look-ahead zone) is won, the process of not performing the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is executed for the pending information acquired thereafter. That is, in the state where the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is won (during the look-ahead zone), even if the hold information is acquired (even if the above-mentioned acquired information is generated), the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is not performed. For this reason, there is a possibility that a lottery-free period related to the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition will be created by the number of acquired information.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, when the result of the game round based on the hold information that is the target of the hold notice is out of order, and if the acquired information exists, the no-lottery period regarding the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is set. The possibility of occurrence can be reduced. Then, not only can the possibility of entering the look-ahead zone (the possibility of winning the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition) be increased, but also the game quality in the game can be enhanced by making it easier to win a specific look-ahead zone.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if the game ball launched from the launch position 74W of the launch rail 74 produces a return ball that runs backward on the launch rail 74, the lower end portion of the launch rail 74 The return ball can be ejected. That is, the support member 77 can be evacuated from behind the game ball on the launch rail 74 by exciting the solenoid 77a (built-in coil) based on the passage detection sensor 74b detecting the return ball. .. As a result, the game balls existing on the launch rail 74 (all the game balls existing on the launch rail 74 including the return ball) can be discharged from the lower end of the launch rail 74 to the outside of the launch rail 74. Here, in a conventional game machine that does not have a discharge means for discharging the return ball from the launch rail 74, if a return ball is generated or a large number of return balls are generated, the progress of the game may be hindered. Alternatively, it is necessary for a pachinko hall clerk or the like to temporarily unlock the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1), open the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13, and remove the return ball from the launch rail 74. Is. In this case, the player needs to stop the game for a while.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the discharge means (processing of step S1702 performed by the main control device 81 based on the detection result of the passage detection sensor 74b, solenoid 77a for ascending and moving the support member 77, etc.) Since the action of automatically eliminating the return ball is performed, the smooth progress of the game is not hindered. That is, the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1) is locked, and the operation of releasing the return ball is automatically executed while the front door frame 14 remains closed with respect to the inner frame 13. Moreover, since the return ball is eliminated while the player is still applying the rotation operation to the firing handle 8A, the smooth progress of the game can be ensured. For example, even if the player performs a rotation operation on the firing handle 8A and does not operate the stop switch 89, the return ball is automatically ejected without the player noticing, so that the first implementation is performed. According to the form, the processing of the return ball does not impair the progress of the game.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit corresponding to the lower working port 34 is the first result corresponding to the upper working port 33. The winning / failing lottery is performed with priority given to the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the display unit (hereinafter, referred to as "the second special symbol priority changing function"). As a result, expectations are placed on the launch operation, such as performing a launch operation in anticipation of entering the upper operating port 33 or performing a launch operation in anticipation of entering the lower operating port 34, depending on the situation of the game. Diversification will be achieved and the attention of the game will be increased. However, unlike the first embodiment, it does not have the "second special symbol priority variation function", for example.
The winning / failing lottery based on the upper operating port 33 and the winning / failing lottery based on the lower operating port 34 may be performed in the order in which the reserved information is acquired. For example, in this case, the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the holding information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 are alternately processed (the target of the winning / failing lottery or the variable display). (See the third embodiment described later).

Further, according to the first embodiment, the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and is not the target of the pass / fail judgment, or is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. A hold notice corresponding to the hold information that is not the target of the pass / fail judgment may be executed in the game times before the game times related to the hold information. As a result, for the player, the game that generates a prize in the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 and the result of determining whether or not the reserved information acquired based on the winning is successful are confirmed in the game times related to the reserved information. In addition to the game, when a plurality of hold information is stored on hold, the result of the hold information when the order of the hit / fail judgment is later is determined according to the content of the hold notice. A game of predicting is added, and the game is diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

Further, according to the first embodiment, the result of the game times executed based on the hold information subject to the hold notice is out of order, and when the player is once disappointed, the second notice effect is started.
It is possible to surprise the player. Therefore, the player's once disappeared attention can be directed to the pachinko machine 10 again. In particular, in the first embodiment, since the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is prioritized from the higher rank pending information (first rank, second rank), the execution variation of the second notice effect is increased, and the game interest is further enhanced. be able to. Moreover, when the second notice effect is started, the game times that are the target of the second notice effect may result in a big hit, and from this point as well, the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 77, in the high-frequency support mode in which the lower operating port 34 is likely to win a prize, the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is held. No notice is executed. In a situation where a prize is likely to occur in the lower operating port 34, which is the priority side in the winning / failing lottery, the holding notice for the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit is given at a predetermined frequency. Assuming that, the following problems 1 and 2 may occur.

(Problem 1) Even though the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been given a hold notice, the hold information is activated at a timing before it is subject to the winning / failing lottery. It is assumed that the winning of the mouth 34 will continue, and the timing at which the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice will be the target of the winning / failing lottery will be later than the execution timing of the hold notice. Then, for example, it may be difficult to understand which hold information was intended for the hold notice, and on the other hand, there may be restrictions on the mode of the hold notice in clarifying it. Further, when the winning of the lower operating port 34 continues for a predetermined number of times, the hold notice is temporarily stopped, and then the winning of the lower operating port 34 does not occur for a predetermined period. It is conceivable to restart the system or change the mode of the hold notice when the winning of the lower operating port 34 continues for a predetermined number of times. In this case, the frequency of winning the lower operating port 34, etc. It becomes necessary to monitor the above and change the mode of the hold notice accordingly, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase.

(Problem 2) In the high-frequency support mode, when a hold notice is given to the effect that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for displaying the first result corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the player is asked. It is advantageous to immediately generate the 15R probability variation jackpot result by stopping the operation of the firing handle 8A so that the lower operating port 34 does not win a prize. On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode, when a hold notice is given to the effect that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit usually corresponds to the jackpot result. For the player, the lower operating port 34 is repeatedly won, and the holding information that triggered the execution of the above-mentioned holding notice is not subject to the winning / failing lottery.
It is more advantageous to generate a 15R probability variation jackpot result based on the pending information acquired based on the winning of the prize. That is, in the high-frequency support mode, when the hold notice for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is given at a predetermined frequency, the firing handle 8A has an advantageous result for the player. It is possible to change the operation mode. However, the ease with which a prize is generated in the lower operating port 34 in the high frequency support mode can be changed by adjusting the nail 38 in the game area, and then the operation mode of the launch handle 8A is changed for each game hole. The effect of changing is different, which is not preferable.

On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, the hold area R for the first result display unit R.
By preventing the hold notice from being executed for the hold information stored in a, it is possible to improve the attention of the game through the hold notice while suppressing the occurrence of the above problems 1 and 2.

As shown in FIG. 77, even in the high-frequency support mode, the hold notice is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This will
It is possible to execute the hold notice even in the high frequency support mode, and while suppressing the occurrence of the above problems 1 and 2, the attention level of the game through the hold notice can be improved in the high frequency support mode. Even if there is, it can be planned.

As shown in FIG. 77, in the case of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the first
While the hold notice is not executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the result display unit, the first is the case of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.
The hold notice is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the result display unit. Thereby, while suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems 1 and 2, it is possible to increase the chance that the hold notice is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit.

As shown in FIG. 77, in the open / close execution mode, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit
The hold information stored in is not set as an opportunity to execute the hold notice. As a result, for example, when the open / close execution mode is changed to the high frequency support mode, the open / close execution mode does not need to execute the process of erasing the first notice condition fulfillment flag stored in the work RAM 254 at that time. It is possible to prevent the hold notice for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit from being executed during the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 77, in the open / close execution mode, the holding area Rb for the second result display unit
The hold information stored in can be set as an opportunity to execute the hold notice. As a result, for example, when the mode is changed to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, if the second notice condition fulfillment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 at that time, the second result display unit is used in the open / close execution mode. It is possible to give a hold notice for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb immediately after the start of the high frequency support mode.

When shifting to the open / close execution mode, if the first notice condition fulfillment flag is stored in the work RAM 254, it is deleted. As a result, the first notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in the low frequency support mode, and the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 in that state is subject to the winning / failing lottery, and the 15R probability variation jackpot. When a result or a normal jackpot result occurs, the above-mentioned first notice condition establishment flag is cleared, and it is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit in the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. It is possible to prevent the hold notice from being executed for the hold information.

If the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit corresponds to the winning information different from the common winning information, the hold notice indicating that the hold information corresponds to the winning information (That is, when the hold notice using the probability change confirmed character or the normal confirmed character) is prevented from being executed, and the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit corresponds to the common winning information. Is not subject to the above restrictions. As a result, for example, in the situation of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result as a hold notice. Even if a normal jackpot result occurs due to the hold information acquired by winning a prize in the lower operating port 34 after notifying the content to that effect, since the hold information related to the above hold notice corresponds to the common winning information, after that. In addition, the 15R probability variation jackpot result will be generated because the hold information related to the above hold notice is subject to the winning / failing lottery. Therefore, when a hold notice is given for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, the occurrence of the inconvenience that the content of the hold notice is inconsistent with the subsequent game result is suppressed.

In particular, in a configuration in which the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is prioritized in the winning / failing lottery, the holding information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is given a hold notice and then lowered. When a prize is awarded to the operating port 34, the holding information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 prior to the holding information related to the above-mentioned hold notice is subject to the winning / failing lottery. Then, it is likely that the winning / failing lottery mode is switched at a stage after the holding notice has been given and before the holding information related to the holding notice is subject to the winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, as described above, the hold information corresponds to the winning information only when the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit corresponds to the common winning information. Since the hold notice indicating the above is executed, the occurrence of the inconvenience that the content of the hold notice is inconsistent with the subsequent game result is suppressed.

The multiple types of winning information that wins the jackpot in the high-probability mode include all of the multiple types of winning information that wins the jackpot in the low-probability mode, and all of the winning information related to the low-probability mode is the common winning information. It corresponds to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance that the hold notice is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit while achieving the above effect.

Regarding the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, even if it corresponds to the winning information different from the common winning information, the holding information corresponds to the winning information. A hold notice indicating that the information is present (that is, a hold notice using a probability variation confirmed character or a normal confirmed character) can be executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance that the hold notice is executed while achieving the above effect.

In particular, in a configuration in which the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is prioritized in the winning / losing lottery, a new hold notice is given for the holding information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. The hold information acquired in the above will not be subject to the winning / failing lottery prior to the hold information related to the above hold notice. Therefore, it is unlikely that the winning / failing lottery mode will be switched at a stage after the holding notice has been given and before the holding information related to the holding notice is subject to the winning / failing lottery. Under such circumstances, even if the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit corresponds to the winning information different from the common winning information as described above, the holding information is won. By making it possible to execute the hold notice indicating that the information is supported, the opportunity for the hold notice to be executed can be suitably increased.

In the situation where the hold information corresponding to the winning information is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, even if the hold information is newly acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, the hold notice is given for the hold information. Is not set to do. Assuming a configuration in which a new hold notice can be set even in such a situation, for example, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit as a hold notice in the high probability mode becomes the winning information. After notifying the content of the correspondence, the mode is switched to the low probability mode based on the game result of the hold information that was the target of the winning / failing lottery before the hold information, and the hold information related to the above hold notice is the winning information. There is a risk that it will not correspond to. On the other hand, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the winning information is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, even if the hold information is newly acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, the hold information is concerned. Since the hold information is not set to give a hold notice, the above-mentioned situation can be suppressed.

In a configuration in which the hold command transmitted from the main control device 81 to the voice lamp control device 82 includes the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value information of the jackpot type counter C2, the main control device 81 and the voice The signal line that electrically connects to the lamp control device 82 (specifically, a connector unit in which common connectors are provided at both ends of the plurality of signal lines) is illegally removed, and the current jackpot random number in the main control device 81 is used. It is assumed that a fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the counter C1 or the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is performed. In addition to such fraudulent acts, an unauthorized board is connected to a signal line that electrically connects the main control device 81 and the voice lamp control device 82, and the current jackpot random number counter C1 in the main control device 81 is used. It is assumed that a fraudulent act of acquiring the value or the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is performed. In this way, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired, it is mistaken that a fraudulent act or a start winning prize has occurred at the timing when the jackpot winning or the 15R probability variation jackpot result is obtained. There is a concern that fraudulent acts to be detected will be carried out, which will cause a great disadvantage to the game hall. On the other hand, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are not transmitted as they are, but the information of the result specified by the main control device 81 is transmitted, so that the above fraudulent activity occurs. Can be blocked.

In this case, the determination of whether or not the hold information corresponds to the common winning information is determined by the main control device 81.
It is done in. For example, in the configuration in which the determination is performed by the display control device 212, it is necessary to store the common winning information in advance in the display control device 212 that does not have the function of performing the winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, it is necessary to store the common winning information in advance in the display control device 212 by determining whether or not the holding information corresponds to the common winning information in the main control device 81 as described above. Does not occur. Therefore, in a configuration in which the main control device 81 and the display control device 212 cooperate with each other to give a hold notice, the amount of information stored in advance in the display control device 212 can be reduced.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of the first embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment other than the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(1) In the first embodiment, "first rank (when the jackpot hold information is a probability change correspondence hold command)" and "second rank (when the jackpot hold information is a normal correspondence hold command)" are "notice". Equalize the "probability of being determined to produce", and make the "first rank" hold information and "second rank" equal.
When the hold information of "rank" is stored as acquired information, the selection means selects the hold information acquired earlier between the hold information of "first rank" and the hold information of "second rank". I'm supposed to do it. However, when the lottery for establishing the notice condition for big hits is performed based on FIG. 58 (b) described above, the winning probability when the lottery for establishing the notice condition is performed based on the hold information of the "first rank" is performed. This is higher than the winning probability when the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is performed based on the hold information of the "second rank", and the possibility that the second notice effect is executed is high.

(2) In the first embodiment, an embodiment in which a lottery for whether or not to execute the advance notice effect is performed when the reserved information is valid information is illustrated, but the criterion for determining whether or not the reserved information is valid information is the present. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, it is effective depending on whether the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the winning of the lower operating port 34. Although the criteria for whether or not it is information are different, which operating port 33,
Even if it is acquired based on the winning of 34, it may be possible to make no difference in this standard. That is, regardless of whether the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the holding information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, the advance notice effect is executed under the same conditions. Whether or not it is possible may be determined (see Modification 4 and Third Embodiment described later).

(3) In the first embodiment, in the second notice effect execution determination process, whether or not the jackpot hold information exists in the acquired information is searched in the order of its storage, and if found, the presence or absence of the jackpot hold information is determined. Complete the search at that point. Then, for the found jackpot hold information, a lottery for establishing the notice condition for the jackpot (a lottery for establishing the same as the jackpot correspondence setting process) is performed, and if the winner is a winner, the second notice effect execution determination process is completed. An example is an example in which a lottery for establishing a notice condition for reach or non-reach (a lottery similar to the jackpot correspondence setting process) is performed for the acquired information acquired before the jackpot pending information (acquired information) in the order of its memory. However, as the second notice effect execution determination process, the modified example 4 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 can also be exemplified.

Here, FIG. 78A shows the relationship between the content of the reserved information and its rank. Then, as in the first embodiment, in the modified example 4, the rank indicates the order of the degree of advantage for the player, and the higher the rank of the reserved information (the smaller the numerical value indicating the rank, the smaller the reserved information).
, The advantage is high (the game result is likely to be a big hit result), and the probability of being determined to perform the advance notice effect (that is, the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition) is high. However, in the modified example 4, the hold information indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot is "1st rank", the hold information indicating the normal jackpot is "2nd rank", and the hold information indicating the deviation result after the super reach is "3rd rank". ", The hold information that displays the result of the deviation after the normal reach is" 4th
The "rank" and the pending information that displays the result of the loss without going through the reach are defined as the "fifth rank". Then, the "first rank", the "second rank" and the "third rank" are designated as the "specific rank", and the "fourth rank" and the "fifth rank" are designated as the "non-specific rank".

In the modified example 4, in the second notice effect execution determination process shown in FIG. 79, whether or not "reserved information of a specific rank" exists in the acquired information is searched in the order of its memory, and if it is found, it is "specified". The search for the existence of "rank pending information" is completed at that point. Then, regarding the found "holding information of a specific rank", a lottery for establishing a notice condition (if the hold information of a specific rank is a jackpot hold information, a lottery for establishing a notice condition for a jackpot, and the hold information of a specific rank is a super reach hold information. If it is, a lottery to establish the notice condition for super reach) will be performed, and if it is won, S
The second notice effect execution determination process is completed through the processes of 3908a and S3909a. In addition, in the case of a loss, if there is already obtained information acquired before the pending information of the specific rank,
For the acquired information (holding information of non-specific rank) acquired before the holding information of the specific rank, the notice condition is satisfied in the order of storage (if the holding information of non-specific rank is normal reach holding information, the notice for normal reach) The condition fulfillment lottery, and if the non-specific rank hold information is non-reach hold information, the non-reach notice condition fulfillment lottery) will be held.

In the second advance notice effect execution determination process of the modified example 4, the contents of the processes of steps S3901 to S3904 are the same as those of the first embodiment. However, the first search flag of the modification 4 is for specifying in the MPU 252 that the MPU 252 is in a situation of searching whether or not "reserved information of a specific rank (specific rank information)" exists in the acquired information. Information. Then, when the reserved information of a specific rank is found in the acquired information or when it is confirmed that the reserved information of a specific rank does not exist in the acquired information, the information is deleted. Further, as will be described later, the second search flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the "non-specific rank pending information (non-specific information)" is in a situation where a lottery for satisfying the notice condition is performed in the order of its storage. Is. The second search flag is "when the lottery result for satisfying the notice condition for the specific reserved information is unsuccessful, but there is already acquired information stored prior to the reserved information of the specific rank" and "acquired information". When it is confirmed that the reserved information of a specific rank does not exist in the second search flag storage area. Further, it is deleted when the result of the lottery for satisfying the notice condition based on the non-specific information is a winning or the lottery for satisfying the notice condition based on all the non-specific pending information is a failure.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3903 or the process of step S3904 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3905a. In the process of step S3905a, a process of searching whether or not the reserved information of a specific rank exists in the acquired information is performed. This step S3905a is performed based on the count value of the first search counter. That is, it is determined whether or not the first acquired information among the acquired information (however, when the number of acquired information is one, the acquired information) is the reserved information of a specific rank. Then, also in the modification 4, the search for whether or not the reserved information of the specific rank exists in the acquired information (first search) is searched based on the count value of the first search counter, and the reserved information of the specific rank is searched. When is found, the process proceeds to step S3906a.

In step S3906a, a lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3907a.
Here, the lottery for establishing the notice condition in step S3906a is the same process as in S3201 of FIG. 56A when the hold information of the specific rank is the jackpot hold information, and the hold information of the specific rank is the super reach hold information. In some cases, the process is the same as S3301 in FIG. 56 (b). Then, when it is determined in step S3907a that the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition has been won, the establishment winning process is executed in step S3908a. Here, step S390
The establishment winning process of 8a is the same process as in FIG. 59 when the hold information of the specific rank is the jackpot hold information, and in FIG. 60 when the hold information of the specific rank is the reach hold information for specifying the super reach. It is a winning process for reach. In the modified example 4, the valid information determination process may be performed prior to the establishment lottery process in step S3906a. In this case, when the hold information of the specific rank is the jackpot hold information, the effective jackpot hold information determination process shown in FIG. 71 (a) is performed, and when the specific rank information is the super reach hold information, FIG. 71 (
The valid information determination process shown in b) may be performed. In the modified example 4, the processes from step S3106 to S3109 and the process of step S31 are performed from the process corresponding to the hold command in FIG. 55.
The processing up to 04 to S3105 is excluded. That is, if a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process proceeds to step S3110, and if a negative determination is made in step S3112, step S3
Although it is decided to proceed to 116, steps S3106 to S310 are the same as in the first embodiment.
The process up to 9 and the process up to steps S3104 to S3105 may be performed.

When the advance notice condition winning process of step S3908a is executed, the process proceeds to step S3909a, the process of erasing the second advance notice effect execution determination flag and the first search flag is performed, and then the second advance notice effect execution determination process ends. However, the hold information of a specific rank is the jackpot hold information,
When the same process as S3216 of FIG. 59 is performed as the process of step S3908a, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target acquired information) is set in the first hold notice counter. When the same process as in S3218 of FIG. 59 is performed as the process of step S3908a, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target acquired information) is set in the second hold notice counter. Will be done. Further, the hold information of the specific rank is the reach hold information for specifying the super reach, and FIG. 6 shows the process of step S3908a.
When the same processing as S3319 of 0 is performed, a number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target acquired information) is set in the first hold notice counter, and step S3
When the same process as S3321 of FIG. 60 is performed as the process of 908a, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target acquired information) is set in the second hold notice counter. .. Specifically, when the acquired information won in the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is the acquired information acquired second, "2" is set in the first hold notice counter (second hold notice counter). That is, even if the number of acquired information acquired is "3", if the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is won for the acquired information acquired second (in the order of acquisition), the first hold notice counter (second hold notice). "2" is set in the counter).

Further, if it is determined in step S3907a that the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is a failure, the process proceeds to step S3910a. In the process of step S3910a, the number of existing information is "1".
If the number of existing information is "1", step S3909a is determined.
The process for erasing the second notice effect execution determination flag and the first search flag is performed, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S3910a that the number of acquired information is larger than one (when a negative determination is made in step S3910a), step S3911
Proceed to a and determine whether or not “Ci ≧ 2”. That is, whether or not the acquisition order of the acquisition information of the specific rank that was rejected in the notice condition establishment lottery is the second or later (acquired before the jackpot hold information that was the target of the processing of S3906a this time). Whether or not the acquired information exists) is determined. Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3911a, step S391
Proceed to 2a. In step S3912a, a process of deleting the first search flag from the first search flag storage area, a process of storing the second search flag in the second search flag storage area, and a process of storing the second search flag in the second search flag storage area.
The process of setting "Ci-1" as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di), and
After that, the second notice effect execution determination process is temporarily terminated. In this case, the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di) is set to the number of acquired information acquired before the specific reserved information targeted for the processing of S3906a this time. For example, the acquired information 3 is S39 this time.
If the specific pending information is the target of the processing of 06a, the acquired information 1 to 3 is set to the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di). Then, when the process of step S3912a is completed, the second notice effect execution determination process is once completed, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is started again, the affirmative determination of steps S3901 and S3902 is performed, and FIG. a) S
Move to 3916a. If a negative determination is made in step S3911a (when the jackpot holding information of the acquired information 1 is invalid), the process proceeds to step S3909e, and the second advance notice effect execution determination process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in the process of step S3905a, step S3913a
The process proceeds to, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value (Cmax). That is, if the specific reserved information cannot be found even if the process of step S3905a is repeated for the number of acquired information, it is determined in step S3913a whether or not the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value. More specifically, when the number of acquired information is "3", the acquired information 1 (Ci = 1), the acquired information 2 (Ci = 2), and the acquired information 3 (Ci = 3) are in the order of their storage. If the reserved information of a specific rank cannot be found even after the processing of step S3905, it is positively determined in step S3913a, and the acquired information 3 (Ci = 3) is still obtained.
If the process of step S3905 has not been performed, a negative determination is made in step S3913a. Further, when the number of acquired information is "1", if the acquired information 1 (Ci = 1) is negatively determined in the process of step S3905a, at that time, step S391
It is judged positively in 3a.

If it is determined in step S3913a that it is not the upper limit value (Cmax), step S391
Proceed to 4a, increment the count value of the first search counter (Ci) by 1, and once the second
The advance notice effect execution determination process is terminated. In this case, when the second advance notice effect execution determination process is restarted, the affirmative determination in step S3901, the negative determination in step S3902, and step S3
After the affirmative determination of 903, the process proceeds to step S3905a. In this case, S3905a first
The acquired information acquired following the acquired information (acquired information that is the target of determination of whether or not it is the specific reserved information) that is the target of the processing of S3905a is the target of the processing of S3905a.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3913a that the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value (Cmax), the process proceeds to step S3915a, the first search flag is deleted from the first search flag storage area, and the first step. After performing the process of storing the 2 search flags in the 2nd search flag storage area and the process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the 2nd search counter (Di), the second notice effect execution determination is performed. End the process. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is restarted, the affirmative determination in step S3901 and the affirmative determination in step S390 are performed.
After the affirmative determination of 2, the process proceeds to step S3916a in FIG. 80 (a).

If a negative determination is made in the process of step S3913a, step S3914a
The process proceeds to, and the count value of the first search counter (Ci) is incremented by 1. After that, the second notice effect execution determination process is temporarily terminated. In this case, when the second advance notice effect execution determination process is restarted, the process proceeds to step S3904 through the affirmative determination in step S3901, the negative determination in step S3902, and the affirmative determination in step S3903.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3913a that the count value of the first search counter has reached the upper limit value (Cmax), the process proceeds to step S3915a, and the process of deleting the first search flag from the first search flag storage area is performed. After performing the process of storing the second search flag in the second search flag storage area and the process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di), the second notice is once performed. The effect execution determination process is terminated. In this case, when the second advance notice effect execution determination process is restarted, the process proceeds to step S3916a in FIG. 80A through the affirmative determination in step S3901 and the affirmative determination in step S3902.

In the processing after step S3916a in FIG. 80 (a), the acquired information (non-specific pending information)
For reach hold information or non-reach hold information that identifies normal reach as
The lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is performed in the order in which the acquired information is stored. Specifically, in step S3916a, a lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is performed for the acquired information (for example, Di = 1, that is, the acquired information 1) indicated by the count value of the second search counter. Here, the second search counter is provided in the second search counter area in the search counter area 329, and is a measuring means for specifying the timing for deleting the second search flag when the second search flag is stored. Is. An upper limit value is set in the second search counter in step S3912a or step S3915a, and the count value of the second search counter is updated so as to be incremented by 1 each time the acquired information is searched in the storage order. Then, when the information stored in the second search counter area after the update reaches the upper limit value (Dmax), that is, the number of acquired information, the second search flag is deleted.

As described above, the process of step S3916a is performed based on the count value of the second search counter. Then, the lottery for satisfying the notice condition in step S3916a is shown in FIG. 56 (b) described above.
This is the same process as the process of S3301 or the process of S3401 of FIG. 57 (a). Therefore, depending on whether the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is "reach hold information for specifying normal reach" or "non-reach hold information", the lottery for establishing the notice condition in step S3916a The probability of winning is different.

When the lottery for satisfying the notice condition in step S3916a is performed, the process proceeds to step S3917a to determine whether or not the result of the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is winning. Then, if it is determined that the player has won, the winning process is executed in step S3918a. Specifically, when the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is "reach hold information for specifying normal reach", the same "reach establishment winning process" as in FIG. 60 described above. When the acquired information is "non-reach pending information", the same "non-reach establishment winning process" as in FIG. 61 described above is executed. However, in any case, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is set in the first hold notice counter or the second hold notice counter. That is, the non-specific rank hold information is the reach hold information that specifies the normal reach, and when the same processing as S3319 in FIG. 60 is performed, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information that has won the notice condition establishment lottery (target). When the number of acquired information) is set in the first hold notice counter and the same processing as in S3321 of FIG. 60 is performed, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition (the number of target acquired information). Is set in the second hold notice counter. Further, when the non-specific rank hold information is non-reach hold information and the same processing as in S3414 of FIG. 61 is performed, a number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target acquired information). ) Is set in the first hold notice counter, and when the same processing as in S3416 of FIG. 61 is performed, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target acquired information) is the first. 2 Set to the hold notice counter. Specifically, when the number of acquired information won in the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is "2", the first hold notice counter (second hold notice counter) is set to "2".
Is set. For example, even if the number of acquired information acquired is "3", if the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is won for the acquired information acquired second (in the order of acquisition), the first hold notice counter (second hold notice). "2" is set in the counter).

When the notice condition establishment process is executed in step S3918a, step S3921a
After clearing the second advance notice effect execution determination flag and the second search flag, the advance notice effect execution determination process ends.

If it is determined in step S3917a that the result of the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is a failure, the process proceeds to step S3919a. In this step S3919a, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value (Dmax). Here, step S3919
In the process of a, even if the process of step S3916a is repeated for the upper limit number of times (Dmax) set in the process of step S3912a or step S3915a, if the lottery for satisfying the notice condition cannot be won, the second notice effect This is a process for terminating the execution determination process. Specifically, when the number of acquired information is "3", the acquired information 1 (Di = 1) and the acquired information 2
(Di = 2) and the acquired information 3 (Di = 3) are stored in step S3916a in the order of their storage.
If an affirmative judgment is not made in the process of step S3917a even after performing the subsequent processes,
In the process of step S3919a, it is determined that the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value (Dmax). Further, if the acquired information 3 (Di = 3) has not yet been processed after step S3919a, a negative determination is made in step S3919a.

If the upper limit value (Dmax) has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S3920a, the count value of the second search counter (Di) is incremented by 1, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is temporarily terminated. In this case, when the second advance notice effect execution determination process is restarted, the affirmative determination in step S3901 and the affirmative determination in step S3902 are performed, and then step S3916a.
Move to the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3919a that the count value of the second search counter has reached the upper limit value (Dmax), the process proceeds to step S3921a, and the second notice effect execution determination flag and the second search flag are deleted. After that, the advance notice effect execution determination process is terminated. In addition, S39
The processing after 16a may be performed separately for the reach hold information for specifying the normal reach and the non-reach hold information. That is, until the count value of the second search counter reaches the upper limit value (Dmax), a lottery for satisfying the notice condition for the reach hold information that specifies the normal reach is performed, and if all the results are lost, the count value of the second search counter is reached. The notice condition establishment lottery for the non-reach pending information may be performed until the value reaches the upper limit value (Dmax).

In Example 1 of FIG. 78 (b) showing a specific example of the modified example 4, the fifth obtained information 1 to the acquired information 3
An example shows a case where rank hold information (non-specific rank hold information) is stored and second rank hold information (specific tank hold information) is stored as acquired information 4. in this case,
A lottery will be held to determine the conditions for holding the second rank (holding information of a specific rank). In this case, since the pre-reading zone winning is performed by lottery for establishing the advance notice condition based on the jackpot hold information, the execution probability of the advance notice effect (second advance notice effect) can be increased, and the advance notice effect (second advance notice effect) can be easily performed.

In Example 2 of FIG. 78 (b) showing a specific example of the modified example 4, the acquired information 1 to the acquired information 3 are the fifth.
An example shows a case where rank holding information (non-specific holding information) is stored and first rank holding information (specific holding information) is stored as acquired information 4. In this case, the winning probability of the lottery for establishing the notice condition based on the hold information (specific hold information) of the second rank is higher than the winning probability of the lottery for establishing the notice condition based on the hold information (specific hold information) of the second rank. You may. In this case, the pre-reading zone with a high ranking makes it easier to win, so the range of games is widened. In addition, the effect of the advance notice effect based on the hold information (specific hold information) of the first rank appears more flashy than the effect of the advance notice effect based on the hold information (specific hold information) of the second rank (for example, more rare). (A notice character may appear). In that case,
Since it is possible to facilitate winning by a special look-ahead zone having a higher ranking than the first rank hold information (specific hold information) of Example 1, the range of the game is widened.

In Example 3 of FIG. 78 (b) showing a specific example of the modified example 4, the fifth rank reserved information (non-specific rank reserved information) is stored as the acquired information 1 and the acquired information 2, and the second acquired information 3 is stored. The hold information of the rank (hold information of the specific rank) is stored, and the hold information of the first rank (hold information of the specific rank) is stored as the acquired information 4. Here, in the modified example 4, it is examined (check) whether or not the information is reserved information of a specific rank from the previously acquired information. And
If the lottery for establishing the advance notice condition for the acquired information 3 is unsuccessful, the advance notice condition establishment lottery is performed in the order of the acquired information (acquired information 1, acquired information 2) acquired before the acquired information 3. In this case, the acquired information 4 is the second rank pending information (specific pending information), which is the acquisition pending information having a higher rank than the acquired information 3, but the income pending information 3 acquired earlier is the target pending (target pending information). Since it is the income hold information that is the target of the second notice production execution judgment), the notice condition establishment lottery is not performed for the acquired information 4.

In the fourth modification, since the reserved information of the specific rank is easily searched, the second notice effect execution determination can be efficiently performed. In addition, as the game times based on the hold information that is the target of the second notice effect, there are cases where the jackpot result is displayed through the super reach effect and the case where the off result is displayed after the super reach effect. You can further enhance your interest.

(4) As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the modified example 4 is provided with a plurality of types of super reach, and a lottery for establishing a notice condition is won according to the type of super reach. The probability of becoming may be different. For example, super reach A (reach hold information) for the first predetermined time, which has a longer fluctuation time than when accompanied by normal reach, and super reach B (reach hold information) for the first predetermined time, which has a longer fluctuation time than the first predetermined time. When Super Reach B is selected, the probability that the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition will be won may be higher than when Super Reach A is selected. In this case, the hold information indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot is "1st rank", the hold information indicating the normal jackpot is "2nd rank", and Super Reach B.
The hold information that displays the loss result after passing through is "3rd rank", the hold information that displays the loss result through Super Reach A is "4th rank", and the hold information that displays the loss result through normal reach is "5th rank". , The pending information that displays the result of the loss without going through the reach may be set as the "sixth rank". Then, the "specific rank" and the "non-specific rank" can be appropriately classified. For example, the "first rank" to the "fourth rank" are set as the "reserved information of the specific rank", and the "fifth rank". And "sixth rank" are "holding information of non-specific rank", and FIGS. 79 and 80 (a) may be applied. Alternatively, "1st rank" to "3rd rank" are regarded as "reserved information of specific rank", and "4th rank" to "6th rank" are "reserved information of non-specific rank".
79 and 80 (a) may be applied. That is, even in the case of super reach, "holding information of a specific rank" and "holding information of a non-specific rank" may be classified according to the length of the fluctuation time of the game times accompanied by the execution.

(5) In the first embodiment, the existence or nonexistence of the acquired information is confirmed when starting the game times that are the targets of the advance notice effect, and the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored when the game times are out of order and the result is displayed. The embodiment to be used is illustrated. However, as shown in the modified examples 5 of FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the existence or nonexistence of the acquired information when the game times that are the targets of the advance notice effect are completed (when a negative determination is made in S3810a or S3860a). May be confirmed. In addition, it is decided to confirm the existence of acquired information while the game times that are the target of the advance notice effect are in progress (during variable display), or just before the end of the game times that are the target of the advance notice effect (for example, 1 second before). In addition, it may be possible to confirm the existence or nonexistence of the acquired information. In these cases, since the time to confirm the existence of the acquired information is delayed (because it is after the game round related to the hold notice has started), there is a possibility that the number of acquired information can be increased (as an information acquisition means). It may be possible to store up to the maximum number). Therefore, it is possible to obtain high-ranked acquired information and increase the chances of lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition.

(6) In the first embodiment and the modified examples 3 to 5, as described above, the display result and the target game times in the variable display (target game times) executed based on the hold information that is the target of the notice effect are accompanied. The content of the effect to be executed is the game times that are started before the target game times (hereinafter, "pre-game times").
The mode of giving notice during the execution of is illustrated. That is, although the mode in which the advance notice effect is performed not according to the target game times (the fluctuation) but is performed according to the pre-game times (the change) is illustrated, the advance notice effect may be performed according to the advance game times and the target game times (the change). Alternatively, it may be performed only with the target game times (the fluctuation). For example, a character suggesting the occurrence of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot appears in the middle of the pre-game round, and the jackpot occurs at the start of the target game round (the fluctuation) or during the execution of the target game round (the fluctuation). A suggestive character may appear, or a movable object attached to the 24th surface of the game board may be operated.

(7) In the first embodiment, the second notice effect can be executed when the display result of the game times targeted by the notice effect constituting the first suggestion effect is off (including the 2R probability variation jackpot). Even if the display result in the game is "15R probability variation jackpot or normal jackpot", the second
The advance notice effect may be executable. For example, after the game round with the first suggestion effect is completed
The game times that are the target of the first suggestion effect are started, and the display result of the game times that are the target is "15.
It is assumed that the "R probability variation jackpot or normal jackpot" is set and the open / close execution mode is set.
In this case, it is assumed that a plurality of acquired information has been stored in the acquisition pending information storage means when the target game round is started. In this case, the second notice effect can be executed for the acquired information other than the acquired information acquired first (for example, the probability variation jackpot guessing character). Isn't this increasing the number of consecutive chans that can be performed by the player? (Isn't there a high possibility that the open / close execution mode can be executed repeatedly?), And it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

(8) Further, in the first embodiment, when there is a difference in the winning probability of the advance notice condition establishment process between the hold information indicating the occurrence of the 15R probability change jackpot and the hold information indicating the occurrence of the normal jackpot, the 15R probability change The hold information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot may be higher than the hold information indicating the occurrence of a normal jackpot. That is, the execution probability (decision probability) of the advance notice effect or the second advance notice effect may be increased with respect to the hold information indicating the occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot that gives a greater benefit to the player.

(9) In the first embodiment, if the display result of the game times targeted by the advance notice effect is off (including the 2R probability variation jackpot) and the acquired information exists, what is the second advance notice effect execution determination process? The embodiment to be performed is illustrated. For this reason, the display result of the game times targeted by the second notice effect is off (
If the acquired information exists in the case of (including the 2R probability variation jackpot), the second notice effect execution determination process will be performed again. That is, when the advance notice effect is terminated, if an affirmative determination is made in the process of step S3811 (S3861) of FIG. 67 (FIG. 68), the second advance notice effect may be executed again. However, the number of executions of the second notice effect may be limited. For example, when the display result of the game times targeted by the advance notice effect is off (including the 2R probability variation jackpot), the second advance notice effect execution determination process may be performed only once or only twice. It may be that. For example, in the case of performing only once, if the first second notice effect execution determination process is performed after the normal notice (first suggestion effect), it is prohibited to perform the second notice effect execution determination process again. Set the flag to be. Then, when the normal notice (first suggestion effect) is given again, the flag may be deleted.

(10) In the first embodiment, regarding whether or not the advance notice effect (hereinafter referred to as the former) can be executed, the winning probability of the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition and the second advance notice effect (hereinafter, the latter) executed after the end of the advance notice effect. Although there is no difference between the probability of winning the lottery for which the notice condition is satisfied and the probability of winning the lottery, it is possible to make a difference between the two. For example, the winning probability of the latter may be higher than the winning probability of the former. In particular, when the acquired information includes the jackpot hold information, the winning probability can be set to a particularly high probability (for example, any of 70 to 100%). In this case, if the game times that are the target of the notice effect (the former) are those that display the result of the deviation after the super reach effect (the game times that the player is very disappointed), the second notice is given. Relief by directing (the latter) can enhance the game's interest at once. In other words, the expectation that was raised to near the limit by the advance notice production (the former) but suddenly sank due to the display of the deviation result can be raised at once by the start of the second advance notice production (the latter), effectively improving the game entertainment. be able to.

(11) In the first embodiment, even if the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is won, the notice effect and the second notice effect are not executed unless the lottery process (FIGS. 64 and 65) is won (occurrence winning). Was illustrated. However, if the occurrence lottery process is omitted and the lottery for satisfying the notice conditions is won, the notice production and the second
It may be possible to execute a notice effect. Further, the generation lottery process may be omitted in one of the advance notice effect and the second advance notice effect.

(12) In the first embodiment, the first notice effect is completed, and the hold area for the result display unit (Ra, R) is completed.
When the target hold stored in the first area of b) is moved (shifted) to the execution area RE, the hold information (that is, the acquired information) stored in the hold area (Ra, Rb) for the result display unit is changed. Based on this, an embodiment in which the second notice effect is performed is illustrated. Moreover, in the first embodiment, as shown in S3003 of FIG. 54, when the opening command is received, the stored first notice condition establishment flag is erased, so that the upper operating port 33 is awarded a prize. In the situation where the hold information is set to give a hold notice, it is resolved when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, and in the situation where the hold information related to the winning of the lower operating port 34 is set to give a hold notice. The flag for satisfying the second notice condition is not deleted. In this case, the lower operating port 3
Even in the situation where the hold information related to the prize in 4 is set to give a hold notice, the second notice condition establishment flag is erased and the hold information stored based on the prize in the lower operating port 34 is held. The notice may not be executed across the open / close execution modes (hereinafter, referred to as modification 6). Alternatively, when the opening command is received, the stored first notice condition fulfillment flag and second notice condition fulfillment flag are not deleted, and a hold notice is given for the hold information related to the winning of the upper operating port 33. In the situation set as such, the command may be executed across the open / close execution mode (hereinafter, referred to as a modification 7).

(13) In the first embodiment, the first notice effect is completed, and the hold area for the result display unit (Ra, R) is completed.
When the target hold stored in the first area of b) is moved (shifted) to the execution area RE, the hold information (that is, the acquired information) stored in the hold area (Ra, Rb) for the result display unit is changed. Based on this, an embodiment in which the second notice effect is performed is illustrated. However, as shown in the modified example 8 of FIG. 82 (a), when the open / close execution mode ends, the hold information stored in the hold area (Ra, Rb) for the result display unit (hereinafter, “stored hold information”). ”) Exists, the advance notice effect (hereinafter referred to as“ third advance notice effect ”) may be executed based on this“ stored hold information ”. Here, FIG. 82A shows the “third notice effect execution determination flag setting process”, and when the “third notice effect execution determination flag setting process” is activated, the display control device 212
MPU252 determines whether or not the ending command has been received in step 3881. Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received, in step 3882, "
Determines if "stored hold information" exists.

Then, if an affirmative judgment is made in step 3882, the process proceeds to step 3883, and the work RA
The third advance notice effect execution determination flag (third advance notice determination execution information) is stored in the third advance notice effect execution determination flag storage area (third advance notice effect execution determination information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the M254. , "Third notice effect execution determination flag setting process" is completed. And
When the third advance notice effect execution determination flag is stored, the third advance notice effect execution determination process (not shown) is executed. Then, also in this third advance notice effect execution determination process, the advance notice lottery may be performed with priority given to the "stored hold information" having a high probability of winning the advance notice lottery such as jackpot information. In this case, if the advance notice lottery is won, it does not matter whether or not the occurrence lottery is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step 3881 or step 3882, the "third advance notice effect execution determination flag setting process" is completed without storing the third advance notice execution determination flag in the third advance notice effect execution determination flag storage area. In this case, the third notice effect is not executed. Also,"
Before the game state shifts to the open / close mode, the hold area for the result display unit (R)
It may be limited to the hold information stored in a, Rb), or may be the hold information stored before the shift to the open / close mode and during the shift to the open / close mode.

In the modification 8, the second advance notice effect execution determination flag is read as the third advance notice effect execution determination flag, the “acquired information” is read as “memorized hold information”, and the second advance notice effect execution determination (FIG. 6).
9, FIG. 70, FIG. 79, FIG. 80, FIG. 89, FIG. 110, FIG. 111 can be applied. In addition, "the number of target acquired information" is read as "the number of stored pending information", and the winning process for winning a jackpot (Fig. 59,
FIG. 105), the reach winning process (FIGS. 60 and 106), and the non-reach winning process (FIG. 61, 107) can be applied. Here, the "number of stored hold information" is a number indicating the order in which the stored hold information won in the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is generated, and in these establishment winning processes, the first hold notice counter or the second hold notice counter. "Number of stored pending information" is set to.

(14) As described above, in the first embodiment, the acquired information whose occurrence order is later than the acquired information in which the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is won, that is, the modified example 9 shown in FIGS. 82 (b) and 82 (c). As in the case where the acquired information stored in the hold area (Ra, Rb) for the result display unit exists after the acquired information (target acquired information) for which the notice condition establishment lottery is won, the execution number is executed. 2 The notice production may be reviewed. That is, when the acquired information stored after the target acquired information exists, for example, the acquired information stored after the target may be used as the new target acquired information, and the production period and the production review of the second notice effect may be performed. .. Specifically, as shown in the specific example of FIG. 82 (b), the acquired information b stored in the second area at the time of digesting the target reserved information (reserved information won in the first notice production lottery) is the target acquired. Regarding the information (obtained information that won the second notice production lottery), it is assumed that the acquired information c is also stored in the third area. In this case, at the time of digesting the target hold information (hold information won in the first notice production lottery), the acquired information a stored in the first area is digested, and the variation display based on the acquired information a is performed, and the second When performing the advance notice production
The target acquired information is replaced with the acquired information c, the duration of the second notice effect is lengthened (the number of consecutive times of the second notice effect is increased), the effect content is changed, or the effect content is hotter (that is, ""
It may be a compulsory notification regarding the occurrence of a jackpot result rather than "200% absolute jackpot result is generated".

In particular, as shown in the third embodiment described later, this change of the target acquired information is effective in the gaming machine in which the number of acquired information that can be acquired is large. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), the acquired information g stored in the fourth area at the time of digesting the target reserved information (reserved information won in the first advance notice effect lottery) is the target acquired information (second advance notice effect). It is assumed that the acquired information h is stored up to the 7th area, although it is the acquired information that won the lottery. In this case, when any of the acquired information d to f stored before the target pending information is digested, variable display is performed based on the acquired information, and the second notice effect is executed. In addition, the target acquired information can be replaced with the acquired information h to lengthen the duration of the second notice effect (increase the number of consecutive times of the second notice effect), change the effect content, or make the effect more hot. You may.

Next, using FIG. 83 (a), the first flag erasing process (second flag erasing process) of the modification example 9 is performed.
The features of are explained. In the first flag erasing process (second flag erasing process) of the modification example 9, if a negative determination is made in step S3807 (step S3857), the process proceeds to step S3807a to determine whether or not the review condition is satisfied. Here, as a review condition, for example, in the first flag erasing process (second flag erasing process) that is executed by digesting the acquired information, for example.
An example is an example in which "undigested acquired information exists that is stored after the target acquired information, and the undigested acquired information triggers execution of a higher-level effect (described later)". it can.

Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3807a, the review flag is stored in the review flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254, and the first flag erasure process (second flag erasure process) is completed. The case where a negative determination is made in step S3807a and the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S3807 (S3857) are the same as in the first embodiment. Then, although not shown, when the review flag is set (stored in the review flag storage area), the review process is activated, and the process of changing the effect content of the second notice effect is performed.
After performing the process of changing the number of acquired information to the number considering the number indicating the order of occurrence of undigested acquired information that has become the target acquired information, the review flag is released (deleted from the review flag storage area). After performing the process, the review process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned “obtained information that triggers the execution of the higher-level effect” will be described with reference to the specific example of FIG. 83 (b). That is, the higher the advance notice effect rank, the more flashy the advance notice effect (for example, the advance notice effect rank), which is executed when the first advance notice lottery or the second advance notice lottery is won. The higher the number, the more notice characters will appear, or the less frequently the notice characters will appear), and the lower the notice effect rank, the more
It is assumed that the mode is sober (for example, the lower the notice effect rank, the smaller the number of notice characters that appear, or the more frequently the notice characters appear). In this specific example, when the target acquired information (target pending information) is "the target acquired information (target pending information) is a probabilistic response pending command", it is set to the highest notice effect rank 1 and "target acquired information (target)". When the hold information) is the normal response hold command, the notice effect rank 2 is set to the next highest notice effect rank. Then, in the modification 9, when the “target acquired information (target pending information) is the super reach information”, a plurality of types of super reach (a plurality of types of super reach depending on the type of super reach information).
It is assumed that either the number of advance notice characters that appear or the super reach with different appearance frequencies) is executed. Then, when the target acquired information (target pending information) won in the second notice lottery (first notice lottery) is "super reach information", the second notice production rank differs depending on the type of the super reach information. It is assumed that the advance notice effect (first advance notice effect) appears.

Then, for example, when the target acquired information is executing the second advance notice effect of the advance notice effect rank 5, the acquired information stored after the target acquired information can execute the second advance notice effect of the advance notice effect rank 3. In some cases, the acquired information stored after that may be replaced with new target acquired information. It is assumed that the advance notice production rank 3 has a higher advance notice rank than the advance notice effect rank 5.

(15) Further, when setting the second notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 61 above, the first
It is necessary to set the "target acquired information number" in the hold notice counter or the second hold notice counter, but the display control device 212 sets the "target acquired information number" to the hold command when each acquired information is received. It can be specified by using the number of reserved items specified by or by other methods. For example, the storage means (R) of the display control device 212, such as the holding areas Ra and Rb of the main control device 81.
It is assumed that a predetermined storage area provided in (AM, etc.) is divided into four storage areas, a first area to a fourth area. Then, when the display control device 212 receives the hold command, the hold information specified by the hold command can be stored in the order of the first area to the fourth area. In addition, each of the first area to the fourth area can store individual hold information, and the vacant areas are stored in order from the lower first area to the upper fourth area. Then, each time the variable display starts, the reserved information stored in the first area is deleted in order. Then, when the hold information is stored in the second and subsequent areas (higher than the second area), the higher hold information is stored as the hold information in the first area is digested (shifted from the first area to the execution area). One lower area (for example, 2nd area to 1st area, 3rd area to 2nd area, 4th area to 3rd area
Area). That is, it is assumed that the procedure for storing the hold command in the first area to the fourth area is a first-in first-out method.

In this case, when the target hold information is deleted from the first area (when the target hold information in the first area is digested), the hold information in the first area to the fourth area shifts to the first area to the third area. To do. Then, when the display control device 212 receives the new hold information (acquired information), if the previously received hold information (acquired information) is stored in the first area to the second area, the newly received hold information is stored. (Obtained information) is stored in the third area. Therefore, it is possible to find out the "previous target acquired information" and the "target acquired information" by searching for any of the first to fourth areas in the area of the acquired information that won the second notice lottery. it can. A gaming machine having two types of hold information (first hold information, second hold information) may have a storage area for the first hold information and a storage area for the second hold information.

In addition, when the result of the first notice lottery is won and the first notice effect is started, the number of hold information (hold commands) to be acquired after that is counted, and the acquisition order of the acquired information to be sequentially acquired is shown. Information may be added to the hold command (hold information). For example, (a), (a) in FIG.
As shown in b), steps S3216, S3218, S3319 of FIGS. 59, 60, 61.
, S3321, S3414 or S3416, set the measurement flag. That is, when the result of the first notice lottery is won, the measurement flag is set. Then, in the command correspondence process of FIG. 54, as shown in FIG. 84 (e), if it is determined that the hold command has been received in step S3011, the process proceeds to step S3011c to determine whether or not the measurement flag is set. Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3011c, the process proceeds to step S3211d. In step S3011d, the count counter CR is incremented. Then, the hold command corresponding process in step S3012 is executed, and at that time, data for specifying the count value of the count counter CR is added to the hold command to be saved. Therefore, the "number of target acquired information" can be specified by specifying the "count value of the counting counter CR" when the hold command related to the target acquired information is acquired. In steps S3808 and S3858 of FIGS. 67 and 68, when the advance notice condition establishment flag is deleted, the measurement flag is deleted and the counting counter CR is initialized to "0".

(16) Further, as a setting condition of the hold notice, it is a condition that the hold information (previous target acquired information) acquired before the hold information (obtained information) that should be the target hold information (target acquired information) exists. May be good. For example, in the variable display executed based on the previous target reserved information (previous target acquired information) stored before the target reserved information (target acquired information), the variable display based on the target reserved information (target acquired information) In a mode in which the effect of guessing (notifying) the display result of the above is performed, but the effect of guessing (notifying) the target pending information (target acquired information) is not performed, the target reserved information (target acquired information) is preceded. It may be a condition that the acquired pending information (previous target acquired information) exists. In this case, for example, the following method can be exemplified. That is, FIG. 56 (a)
, (B) or in the first notice lottery (second notice lottery) of FIG. 57 (a), first, before the reserved information (obtained information) that should be the target of the first notice lottery (second notice lottery). It is determined whether or not the acquired pending information (obtained information) exists. Then, when affirmative determination is made, the first advance notice lottery (second advance notice lottery) is executed with a general winning probability (winning probability that the winning probability does not become "zero"). On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made, the first notice lottery (second notice lottery) is performed with a special winning probability of "zero". That is, when the first notice lottery (second notice lottery) is performed, the target hold information (obtained information) is the corresponding hold area (Ra) for the result display unit.
Alternatively, when stored in Rb), there is a possibility that the first notice lottery (second notice lottery) based on the target hold information (obtained information) will be won, but the corresponding hold area for the result display section (
When it is not stored in Ra or Rb), the possibility that the first notice lottery (second notice lottery) will be won may be set to "zero".

(17) In the first embodiment, the execution time of the elimination operation (the time during which the solenoid 77a is excited) is set to 1.8 seconds (three times the firing cycle described above), but the execution time of this elimination operation is 0. .6
You can choose from a variety of times, such as seconds (the aforementioned firing cycle), 1.2 seconds (twice the aforementioned firing cycle), or 0.9 seconds (1.5 times the aforementioned firing cycle). .. If the execution time of the elimination operation is set to a sufficient time (for example, if the firing cycle is set to 3 times or more as described above), the elimination operation (
It is possible to reliably perform the operation of ejecting the return ball, etc., but if the elimination operation execution time is made too long (for example, if it is 6 times or more of the above-mentioned firing cycle), the time during which the game does not proceed becomes long. It can give the player a verbose feel.

Here, an embodiment in which the execution time of the resolution operation is selected from a plurality of times (for example, as described above,
In the mode of selecting from 1 times, 1.5 times, 2 times, or 3 times the firing cycle), the selection is made at the time of designing or manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, and when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the pachinko hall. , The execution time of the resolution operation may be set to one time. Alternatively, at the stage when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped from the manufacturer, a plurality of candidates for the execution time of the elimination operation are determined.
After the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the pachinko hall, one time may be selected from a plurality of "execution times of elimination operations" by operating a predetermined selection means. This selection means may be one that can be operated by the player, or one that cannot be operated by the player (a selection that can be operated by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 or a clerk of the pachinko hall and cannot be operated by the player. Means).

Further, the execution time of the elimination operation may be changed (longer or shorter) based on the elapsed period (hereinafter referred to as the installation period) after the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the pachinko hall. .. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may include an installation period measuring means for measuring the installation period and an execution time setting means for setting the execution time of the elimination operation based on the measurement result of the installation period measuring means. For example, if the installation period measuring means determines that the installation period of the pachinko machine 10 is less than "June", the execution time of the elimination operation is set to 1.5 times the firing cycle, and the installation period is "6". If it is determined to be between "Month and December", the execution time of the elimination operation is set to twice the firing cycle. Then, when it is determined that the installation period exceeds "December", the execution time of the elimination operation may be set to three times the firing cycle. In this case, the longer the installation period (use period) of the pachinko machine 10, the longer the execution time of the elimination operation. That is, even when the pachinko machine 10 becomes old and a return ball is likely to occur, the elimination operation can be reliably performed. In the fourth embodiment described later, an embodiment in which the execution time of the elimination operation is changed according to the degree of achievement of the elimination operation of the return sphere will be exemplified.

(Second Embodiment)
Also in the second embodiment, an embodiment of the “pachinko machine” will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In this pachinko machine 10, the content of the second notice effect execution determination process is simplified as compared with the second advance notice effect execution determination process of the first embodiment. In the second embodiment, FIGS. 1 to 4 can be used as they are.

The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment has an outer frame 11 similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a game machine main body 12, and a game board 24. Further, the "configuration of the front door frame 14" and the "rear side configuration" of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment are the "configuration of the front door frame 14" and the "rear side configuration" of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Is the same as. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Further, in the second embodiment, "electrical configuration (FIGS. 15 and 16)" and "symbol display device 4"
Display contents of 1 (FIG. 17), "various counters (FIG. 18)", "win / fail table (FIG. 19)",
"Distribution destination of game results to jackpot type counter C2 (FIG. 20)", "Matters related to reach display (reach state)", "Reserved ball storage area 232 (FIG. 21)", "Timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 22 to 22)" 25) ”is the same as that of the first embodiment.

However, the contents of the processing related to the advance notice effect executed by the display control device 212 are different as follows. That is, "command correspondence processing", "pending command correspondence processing", "reach notice condition establishment processing", "non-reach notice condition establishment processing", "first flag deletion processing", "1st flag deletion processing", "
The contents of the "second flag erasing process" and the "second notice effect execution determination process" are different from the corresponding processes of the first embodiment as follows. These points will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 85, the “command correspondence process” is different from the first embodiment in that step S3011a and step S3011b are provided between step S3011 and step S3012. That is, in step S3 in the "command correspondence process"
If it is determined in 011 that the command to be read this time is a hold command, the process proceeds to step S3011a. In step S3011a, it is determined whether or not the second notice effect preparation flag is stored in the second notice effect preparation flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254.

If a negative determination is made in step S3011a (when the second advance notice effect preparation flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S3012 as it is, the hold command correspondence process is executed, and then this command correspondence process is terminated. On the other hand, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S3011a (when the second notice effect preparation flag is stored), the second notice effect preparation counter Cp is incremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S3012 to proceed to the hold command. After executing the corresponding processing, the processing corresponding to this command is terminated. Here, the second advance notice effect preparation flag is pending information for specifying in the MPU 252 that "execution of the advance notice effect" has been decided. In this second embodiment, when it is decided to "execute the notice effect", the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment stores the second notice effect preparation flag in the second notice effect preparation flag storage area. The MPU 252 grasps that the preparation state of the "second notice production" has been entered.

Further, the second advance notice effect preparation counter Cp is a counter used to identify the number of acquired information on which the target jackpot hold information is acquired when the second advance notice effect execution determination process is performed. Is. The value of the second advance notice effect preparation counter Cp is incremented by 1 each time the MPU 252 receives a hold command while the second advance notice effect preparation flag is stored.

Further, in the "hold command corresponding process" of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, the process of step S3102a and the process of step S3102b are provided between the process of step S3102 and the process of step S3103. This is different from the "pending command correspondence process" of the first embodiment. The process of step S3102b corresponds to the case where the display control device 212 receives the probability change corresponding command or the normal corresponding command in the state where the second notice effect preparation flag is stored (hereinafter, referred to as the second notice effect preparation state). This is a process for specifying which of the "hold commands received by the MPU 252 after the second advance notice effect preparation state" is the received "probability change response command or normal response command".

That is, in the "hold command correspondence process" of the second embodiment, when the process of step S3102 is completed, the process proceeds to step S3102a, and various flag storage areas 3 of the work RAM 254 are executed.
It is determined whether or not the second notice effect preparation flag is stored in the second notice effect preparation flag storage area provided in 22. Then, if a negative determination is made in step S3102a,
The process proceeds to step S3103 as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3102a, the process proceeds to step S3102b, and after acquiring the value of the second advance notice effect preparation counter Cp at that time (when step S3101 is executed) (stored in a predetermined storage area). rear)
, Step S3103. The process of step S3102b is the second advance notice effect when the "probability change corresponding command or the normal corresponding command" is received in the predetermined storage area provided in the work RAM 252 in the situation where the second advance notice effect preparation flag is stored. This is a process for storing the value of the preparation counter Cp.

For example, the "value of the second notice effect preparation counter Cp" acquired in step S3102b is ".
If it is "3", it is specified that the probability change correspondence hold command or the normal correspondence hold command received in the process of step S3101 is the acquisition hold information 3 (the third acquired acquisition hold information). This is because, in the case of this example, the "value of the second notice effect preparation counter Cp" is "3" in step S3011b of the "command correspondence process" of FIG. 85.

In the "reach notice condition establishment winning process" of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87 (a),
After executing step S3319 or step S3321, the process proceeds to step S3322. Then, in step S3322, a process of storing the second notice effect preparation flag in the second notice effect preparation flag storage area and a process of setting the value of the second notice effect preparation counter Cp to "0" (initialization) were performed. After that, the "reach notice condition establishment winning process" is completed.

In the “non-reach notice condition establishment winning process” of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), step S3414 or step S3416 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S3417. Then, in step S3417, the second notice effect preparation flag storage area is filled with the second.
After performing the process of storing the advance notice effect preparation flag and the process of setting the value of the second advance notice effect preparation counter Cp to "0" (initialization), the "reach advance notice condition establishment process" is terminated.

In addition, in the "big hit establishment winning process (see FIG. 59)" of the second embodiment, step S
After executing 3216 or step S3218, the "big hit notice condition establishment process" is terminated as it is. That is, when the game times to be announced end with displaying the "big hit result", the second advance notice effect is not executed, so the second advance notice effect preparation is prepared in the second advance notice effect preparation flag storage area. The flag is stored, and the value of the second notice production preparation counter Cp is set to "0".
(Initialization) There is no need to perform processing. However, if the second advance notice effect is executed when the game times to be announced end with displaying the "big hit result", the second advance notice effect preparation flag is stored after executing step S3216 or step S3218. The second notice effect preparation flag is stored in the area, and the value of the second notice effect preparation counter Cp is set to "0" (initialization).

Further, the feature of the first flag erasing process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (a), and FIG.
The feature of the second flag erasing process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to 8 (b).

Also in the first flag erasing process of the second embodiment, steps S3801 to S38
The content of 09 is the same as that of the first flag erasing process of the first embodiment. However, in the first flag erasing process of the second embodiment, the content of the process after executing step S3809 is different. That is, in the first flag erasing process of the second embodiment, when the process of step S3809 is executed, the process proceeds to the process of step S3810b, and is the second notice effect preparation flag stored in the second notice effect preparation flag storage area? Judge whether or not. Then, step S381
If it is determined that the flag is not stored at 0b, the first flag erasing process of the second embodiment is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in the process of step S3810b (when it is determined that the second notice effect preparation flag is stored), the process proceeds to the process of step S3811b. And
In step S3811b, it is determined whether or not the value of the second advance notice effect preparation counter is a positive value, and if it is negatively determined, the process proceeds to step S3811c. Further, step S
When the process of erasing the second notice effect preparation flag is performed in 3811c, the process of erasing the first flag of the second embodiment ends. That is, after the second notice effect preparation state is reached, the display control device 21
If 2 has not received the hold command, a negative determination is made in step S3811b, and the process of step S3811c is performed to end the process of erasing the first flag of the second embodiment.

On the other hand, in step S3811b, if the value of the second advance notice effect preparation counter is determined to be a positive value, the process proceeds to step S3812b. Then, step S
After performing the process of erasing the second advance notice effect preparation flag and the process of storing the second advance notice effect execution determination flag in the second advance notice effect execution determination flag storage area in 3812b, the first of the second embodiment. The flag clearing process ends.

Also in the second flag erasing process of the second embodiment, steps S3851 to S38
The content of 59 is the same as that of the second flag erasing process of the first embodiment. However, in the second flag erasing process of the second embodiment, the content of the process after executing step S3859 is different. That is, in the second flag erasing process of the second embodiment, when the process of step S3859 is executed, the process shifts to the process of step S3860b, and is the second notice effect preparation flag stored in the second notice effect preparation flag storage area? Judge whether or not. Then, step S386
If it is determined that the flag is not stored at 0b, the second flag erasing process of the second embodiment is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in the process of step S3860b (when it is determined that the second notice effect preparation flag is stored), the process proceeds to the process of step S3861b. And
In step S3861b, it is determined whether or not the value of the second advance notice effect preparation counter is a positive value, and if it is negatively determined, the process proceeds to step S3861c. Further, step S
When the process of erasing the second notice effect preparation flag is performed in 3861c, the second flag erasing process of the second embodiment ends. That is, after the second notice effect preparation state is reached, the display control device 21
If 2 has not received the hold command, a negative determination is made in step S3861b, and the process of step S3861c is performed to end the first flag erasing process of the second embodiment.

On the other hand, in step S3861b, when it is determined that the value of the second advance notice effect preparation counter is a positive value, the process proceeds to step S3862b. Then, step S
After performing the process of erasing the second notice effect preparation flag and the process of storing the second notice effect execution determination flag in the second notice effect execution determination flag storage area in 3862b, the second embodiment of the second embodiment is performed. The flag clearing process ends.

Next, the second advance notice effect execution determination process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 89 and 70. When the second notice effect execution determination process of the second embodiment is activated,
In step S3901b, it is determined whether or not the second advance notice effect execution determination flag is stored in the second advance notice effect execution determination flag storage area. Then, in step S3901b, the second step is performed.
If it is determined that the advance notice effect execution determination flag is not stored, the second advance notice effect execution determination process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored, step S3902b
It is determined whether or not the secondary search flag is stored in the secondary search flag storage area (secondary search secondary hold information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3902b, step S39 in FIG. 70
If the process proceeds to step 20 and a negative determination is made in step S3902b, step S3903b
Move to the processing of.

Here, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot holding information (big hit holding information) exists in the acquired information, the acquired Cp indicates the number of the acquired jackpot holding information. It is specified based on the value (Cp value obtained in the process of step S3102b in FIG. 86). Then, the secondary search flag is used to identify in the MPU 252 that the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is performed in the order of storage based on the acquired information (reach hold information or non-reach hold information) that is valid. Information. If the jackpot hold information does not exist in the acquired information, the jackpot hold information is not valid for the jackpot hold information, or the notice condition establishment lottery based on the jackpot hold information is rejected, this secondary search flag is rejected. It is stored in the secondary search flag storage area. In addition, the result of the lottery for establishing the advance notice condition based on the acquired information (reach pending information or non-reach pending information) will be won, or the result of the advance notice condition establishment lottery based on all the acquired information (reach pending information or non-reach pending information). Will be deleted if is rejected.

If the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored and the secondary search flag does not exist, the process proceeds to step S3903b. In the process of step S3903b, it is determined whether or not the Cp value is specified (the acquisition order of the jackpot hold information is specified based on the Cp value). Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3903b, step S3904b
It is determined whether or not the jackpot hold information (acquisition order is specified based on the Cp value but the jackpot hold information) is valid jackpot hold information. It is possible to determine whether or not the information is valid jackpot hold information by using the flowchart shown in FIG. 71 (a) described above. Then, when the process of step S3904b is executed, the process proceeds to step S3905b. In the second embodiment, the determination regarding the effectiveness of the information in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b) may be omitted. In this case, step S is performed from the hold command corresponding process shown in FIGS. 55 and 86.
The processes leading to 3106 to S3109 and the processes leading to steps S3104 to S3105 may be excluded. That is, if a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process proceeds to step S3110, and if a negative determination is made in step S3112, the process proceeds to step S3116.
Similar to the first embodiment, the processes leading to steps S3106 to S3109 and step S31
The processing up to 04 to S3105 may be performed.

If it is determined in step S3905b that a valid jackpot hold information flag is stored (valid jackpot hold information), the process proceeds to step S3906b, the valid information flag is cleared, and then the process proceeds to step S3908b. In this step S3908b, the lottery for satisfying the notice condition for the jackpot is the same as the process of S3201 in FIG. When this step S3908b is performed, the process proceeds to step S3909b. Then, when it is determined in step S3909b that the lottery for satisfying the notice condition for big hit is won, step S3910
In b, the winning process for winning a jackpot is executed. The winning process for the jackpot is the same process as in FIG. 59 described above. However, in the process of step S3216 executed in the process of step S3910b, the acquired Cp value (the Cp value acquired in the process of step S3102b of FIG. 86) is set in the first hold notice counter, and in the process of step S3218, the acquired Cp value is set.
The acquired Cp value (Cp value acquired in the process of step S3102b in FIG. 86) is set in the second hold notice counter. Specifically, when the Cp value of the acquired information (big hit hold information) won in the notice condition establishment lottery is "3", "3" is set in the first hold notice counter (second hold notice counter). .. That is, even if the number of acquired information acquired is "3", if the advance notice condition is satisfied lottery for the acquired information (big hit hold information) acquired second (in the order of acquisition), the first hold notice counter "2" is set in (second hold notice counter).

When the process of step S3910b is executed, the process proceeds to step S3912b, the process of erasing the second advance notice effect execution determination flag is executed, and then the second advance notice effect execution determination process of the second embodiment ends.

In step S3905b, a valid jackpot hold information flag is not stored (
If it is determined that the information is not valid jackpot hold information), the process proceeds to step S3907b, the invalid information flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S3911b. Further, when it is determined in step S3909b that the lottery for satisfying the notice condition for big hit is a failure, the process proceeds to step S3911b. In the process of step S3911b, it is determined whether or not the number of existing information is "1", and if the number of existing information is "1", the second notice effect execution determination process of the second embodiment is performed. finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S3911b that the number of existing information is not "1",
The process proceeds to step S3913b, and it is determined whether or not the "Cp value" is 2 or more. Then, if a negative determination is made in step S3913b, step S3915b is executed, and once
The second notice effect execution determination process of the second embodiment is terminated. On the other hand, step S391
If an affirmative judgment is made in 3b, the process proceeds to step S3914b, the process of storing the secondary search flag in the secondary search flag storage area, and the upper limit value (D) of the second search counter (Di).
After executing the process of setting "Cp-1" as max), the second notice effect execution determination process is terminated. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is restarted, S390 in FIG. 89
After the affirmative determination of 1b and the affirmative determination of S3902b, the process proceeds to step S3920 of FIG. 70. The content of FIG. 70 is the same as that of the first embodiment. If a negative determination is made in step S3913b (when the jackpot hold information of the acquired information 1 is invalid or the player loses the second advance notice lottery), the process proceeds to step S3909e to determine the execution of the second advance notice effect. End the process.

Further, when a negative determination is made in the process of step S3903b, that is, when it is determined that the Cp value is not specified (the jackpot hold information does not exist in the acquired information), the process proceeds to the process of step S3915b. After performing the process of storing the secondary search flag in the secondary search flag storage area and the process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di), the second notice effect is executed. The judgment process ends. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is restarted, the affirmative determination in step S3901b and the affirmative determination in step S3902b are performed.
After the affirmative determination of FIG. 70, the process proceeds to step S3920 of FIG.

In the process after step S3920 of FIG. 70, it is determined whether or not the acquired information (reach pending information or non-reach pending information) other than the jackpot pending information is valid acquired information, and the lottery for establishing the advance notice condition. Perform in the order of storage of the acquired information (reach pending information or non-reach pending information). Specifically, in step S3920, it is determined whether or not the acquired information (for example, Di = 1, that is, acquired information 1) indicated by the count value of the second search counter is valid acquired information. Here, the second search counter is provided in the second search counter area in the search counter area 329, and is a measuring means for specifying the timing for deleting the second search flag when the second search flag is stored. Is. An upper limit value is set in the second search counter in step S3914b or step S3915b of FIG. 89, and the count value of the second search counter is 1 each time the acquired information is searched in the storage order.
Updated to be incremented. Then, when the information stored in the second search counter area after the update becomes the upper limit value (Dmax), that is, the number of acquired information, the second
The search flag is cleared.

According to the above second embodiment, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment. That is, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the second notice effect can be executed. Then, when the pachinko 10 executes the second notice effect, it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load.

For example, in the example of FIG. 90A, the acquired information 1 is the pending information (holding information of the fourth rank) that displays the disengaged result through the normal reach, and the acquired information 2 displays the disengaged result through the super reach. In the case where the information is on hold information (holding information of the third rank) and the acquired information 3 is the holding information indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot (holding information of the first rank), according to the second embodiment, the acquired information is sequentially added. Even without searching, it is possible to find out the pending information that gives priority to the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition. That is, in the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition, the acquired information 3 in which the Cp value is specified
By giving priority to, it is possible to efficiently determine whether or not to execute the second notice effect.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of the second embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment other than the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(1) The aspect of the second embodiment can also be applied to the pachinko machine 10 (pachinko machine 10 in which eight pending information can be easily stored) in the third embodiment described later. This point will be described later with reference to Example 3 of FIG. 90 (c).

(2) Further, in the second embodiment, the hold information indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot (first rank hold information) and the hold information indicating the normal jackpot (second rank hold information) are prioritized in the lottery for establishing the advance notice condition. Cp value is specified as the pending information to be performed (holding information of a specific rank), but the pending information to be prioritized (held information of a specific rank) and the pending information not to be prioritized (non-specific) The classification of rank pending information) may be determined by other criteria. For example, FIG. 90 (b)
As shown in the example of, the hold information (third rank hold information) that displays the deviation result after passing through Super Reach B may also be the hold information (hold information of a specific rank) that gives priority to the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition. ..

(3) In the second embodiment, the Cp value (Cp value acquired in the process of step S3102b in FIG. 86) acquired when the acquired information is the jackpot pending information (acquired information with a high rank) is acquired, and the jackpot is obtained. A lottery will be held to determine the conditions for holding information. Then, when this notice condition establishment lottery is unsuccessful, regarding the acquired information acquired before the jackpot hold information.
An example is shown in which a lottery for satisfying the advance notice conditions is performed in the order of acquisition.

However, as in the above-described modification 4, the “Cp value” may be specified for the reserved information of the “specific rank” for the acquired information. For example, although not shown, the hold information indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot is "1st rank", the hold information indicating the normal jackpot is "2nd rank", and Super Reach B.
The hold information that displays the loss result after passing through is "3rd rank", the hold information that displays the loss result through Super Reach A is "4th rank", and the hold information that displays the loss result through normal reach is "5th rank". , The pending information that displays the result of the loss without going through the reach may be set as the "sixth rank". In this case as well, the "specific rank" and the "non-specific rank" can be appropriately classified. For example, the "first rank" to the "fourth rank" are defined as the "specific rank" and the "specific rank" is set.
The "fifth rank" and the "sixth rank" may be set as "non-specific ranks", and FIGS. 79 and 80 (a) may be applied. That is, the advance notice condition establishment lottery may be performed by giving priority to the "specific rank" hold information that is first determined to be acquired based on the "Cp value".

(4) Unlike the second embodiment, even if the acquired information has a lower rank than the jackpot pending information, C
Acquire the p-value (specify the acquisition order). Then, even if the result of the lottery for satisfying the notice condition for the jackpot hold information is unsuccessful, or if the jackpot hold information does not exist in the acquired information, the hold information having a lower rank than the jackpot hold information is selected. You may select the pending information with a high rank and perform a lottery to satisfy the notice condition.

(5) In the first embodiment, an embodiment in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the advance notice effect can be executed when the hold information is valid hold information has been illustrated, but a criterion for determining whether or not the hold information is valid hold information. Is the second
It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. Further, in the second embodiment, the hold information is the upper operating port 33.
The criteria for whether or not the information is valid is different depending on whether it is acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 or based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. Even if it is acquired based on the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34, there may be no difference in this criterion. That is, regardless of whether the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the holding information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, the advance notice effect is executed under the same conditions. You may decide whether or not to accept it.

(Third Embodiment)
Also in the third embodiment, an embodiment of the “pachinko machine” will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the third embodiment, FIGS. 1 to 4 can be used as they are.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has an outer frame 11 similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a game machine main body 12, and a game board 24. Further, the "configuration of the front door frame 14" and the "rear side configuration" of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment are the "configuration of the front door frame 14" and the "rear side configuration" of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Is the same as. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted. The pachinko machine 10 differs from the game board 24 of the first embodiment in that the board surface configuration of the game board 24 is as follows.

First, the features of the game board 24 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 92, and 93 (a). In the game board 24 of the third embodiment, the first operating winning opening 33a is provided at the position of the upper operating opening 33 of the first embodiment, and the second operating winning opening 33b is provided at the position of the lower operating opening 34 of the first embodiment. I have. Further, the game ball that has won the first operation winning opening 33a enters the collection passage 61 on the back side of the game board 24. And. In the middle of the collection passage 61, the collection passage 61
Is the first branch passage (hereinafter, may be referred to as "first ball entry portion") 62a and the second branch passage (hereinafter, may be referred to as "first ball entry portion")
Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "second ball entry portion") 62b.

Further, in the collection passage 61, a distribution means 63 is provided at a position immediately before branching into the first ball entry portion 62a and the second ball entry portion 62b (hereinafter, referred to as a branch position 66), and the distribution means 63 is provided. As a result, the destination of the game ball that has entered the collection passage 61 through the first operation winning opening 33a is the first.
The ball entry section (first branch passage) 62a and the second ball entry section (second branch passage) 62b are alternately distributed. Further, the second operating winning opening 33b is opened upward at substantially the same position as the upper operating opening 33 of the first embodiment, and both operating winning openings 33a are arranged so that the first operating winning opening 33a is upward. , 33b are arranged in the vertical direction, more specifically in the vertical direction.

A first detection sensor 65a is provided in the middle of the passage of the first ball entry section 62a, and a second ball entry section 62b is provided.
A second detection sensor 65b is provided in the middle of the passage. Further, at a position closer to the branch position 66 than the position where the second detection sensor 65b is provided in the second ball entry portion 62b, the second ball is inserted.
The operation winning opening 33b is contacted. Then, the game ball that wins the first operation winning opening 33a and the destination is distributed to the first winning portion (first branch passage) 62a by the sorting means 63 is the first.
It is detected by the detection sensor 65a. In addition, a game ball that has won a prize in the first operating winning opening 33a and the destination has been distributed to the second winning portion (second branch passage) 62b by the distribution means 63, and a game that has won a prize in the second operating winning opening 33b. The sphere is detected by the second detection sensor 65b.

Here, a specific example of the distribution means 63 will be briefly described. The distribution means 63 according to this specific example
A base member 63a and a distribution member 63b oscillatingly attached to the base member 63a are provided. Of these, the base member 63a includes a back plate portion 63c provided on the back side, a back plate portion 63c, and a protruding wall 63d projecting forward, and has an inverted Y shape (the letter Y is inverted) when viewed from the front. A gutter-shaped passage 64a having a shape like the above is formed. That is, the back plate portion 63c is used as the bottom portion of the gutter, and the gutter-shaped passages 64a provided above and below are formed.

In the gutter-shaped passage 64a, an introduction passage 64b arranged above, a first passage 64c that curves to the left from the terminal of the introduction passage 64b, and a first passage 64c that curves to the right from the terminal of the introduction passage 64b and descends. It is provided with a second passage 64d. Then, the first actuating winning opening 33a in front of the upper end side of the introduction passage 64b is provided, the first passage 64c constitutes the first entry portion 62a, and the second passage 64d constitutes the second entry portion 62b. ..

The distribution member 63b is configured in a substantially inverted T shape when viewed from the front, and the axial center position 63e can swing to a portion (branch position 66) located substantially vertically below the introduction passage 64b in the back plate portion 63c. It is installed. The distribution member 63b has a boundary portion 63f protruding upward from the axial center position 63e and a boundary portion 63f.
A first bottom portion 63g projecting to the left from the axial center position 63e and a second bottom portion 63h projecting to the right from the axial center position 63e are provided. Further, in the back plate portion 63c, protrusions 63i,
63j is provided toward the front.

In the distribution means 63, the game ball received in the collection passage 61 through the first winning opening 33a is received by the first bottom portion 63g or the second bottom portion 63f. Then, as shown in FIG. 92, when the boundary portion 63f is in the upward-sloping posture, the first bottom portion 63g in the upward-sloping posture is the introduction passage 6.
It is located approximately directly below 4b. At this time, it is prevented that the lower portion of the second bottom portion 63f comes into contact with the protrusion 63j and the amount of rotation of the distribution member 63b in the right direction is further increased. In addition, this distribution member 6
The posture of 3b is called the first posture.

When the distribution member 63b is in the first posture in this way, the first game ball passes through the introduction passage 64b.
It can be received at the bottom 63g. Then, when the first bottom portion 63g receives the game ball, the load of the game ball causes the first bottom portion 63g to rotate counterclockwise with respect to the axial center position 63e of the distribution member 63b in a front view, and as shown in FIG. 93A, the boundary portion 63f is in a posture of tilting upward to the left (hereinafter, referred to as "second posture"). In this way, when the boundary portion 63f is in a posture of tilting upward to the left (second posture), the second bottom portion 63h of the posture of tilting upward to the right is located substantially directly below the introduction passage 64b.
At this time, it is prevented that the lower portion of the first bottom portion 63g comes into contact with the protrusion 63i and the amount of rotation of the distribution member 63b in the left direction is further increased. Then, when the boundary portion 63f is in a posture of tilting upward to the left, the second bottom portion 63h can receive the game ball. Then, when the game ball is received, the load causes the ball to rotate clockwise with reference to the axial center position 63e of the distribution member 63b, and the first posture is obtained.

In this way, the distribution member 63b can alternately repeat the first posture and the second posture by the load of the game ball passing through the introduction passage 64b, so that the destination of the game ball passing through the introduction passage 64b can be determined. , 1st entry part (1st branch passage) 62a or 2nd entry part (2nd branch passage)
It is distributed to 62b.

It is possible to embed a weight in the first bottom portion 63g and the second bottom portion 63h to facilitate the left rotation of the first bottom portion 63g and the right rotation of the second bottom portion 63h. In this case, it is desirable that the weights of the first bottom portion 63g and the second bottom portion 63h be equal in weight. Further, in the back plate portion 63c, behind the position where the tip side of the boundary portion 63f passes, which is substantially directly below the center of the introduction passage 64b, and the boundary portion 63.
A magnet (see 63 m or the like) may be provided at f. In this case, both magnets may be configured to have polarities that repel each other, and when both magnets face each other in the front-rear direction, they may repel each other. For example, it is composed of rod-shaped magnets with the axes of both magnets facing back and forth, so that the rear end of the magnet embedded in the boundary 63f and the tip of the magnet embedded in the back plate 63 face each other back and forth. To do. If the polarity of the rear end of the magnet embedded in the boundary 63f and the polarity of the tip of the magnet embedded in the back plate 63 are the same, they repel each other, so that the boundary 63f is directly above. It is possible to prevent the magnet from stopping at the facing position, and the magnet is maintained at the position where it is rotated to the left or right. In this case, the protrusion 63i,
63j can be omitted.

The second actuating winning opening 33b has the same configuration as the lower actuating opening 34 of the first embodiment. That is, the second operation winning opening 33b is opened upward. In addition, in the second operation winning opening 33b,
An electric accessory 34a is provided as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 34a also executes a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) and an open state (supported state or guided state), similarly to the electric accessory 34a of the first embodiment.

Further, the game board 24 of the third embodiment also has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, and a display unit for accessories, similarly to the game board 24 of the first embodiment. 44 and the like are provided respectively. Further, through gates 3 are formed in the left portion of the center frame 42 (left-handed region L) and the right portion of the center frame 42 (right-handed region R), respectively.
5 is provided. Further, on the back side of the game board 24, there is a general winning opening 31 and a variable winning device 3
A detection sensor (not shown) is provided corresponding to each of the two. However, the first prize movement 3
When the game ball winning 3a is guided to the first ball entry portion (branch passage) 62a, it is detected by the first detection sensor 65a, and when guided to the second entry portion (second branch passage) 62b, the first ball is detected. 2 Detection sensor 6
Detected at 5b. That is, the detection is performed by different detection sensors depending on whether the sensor is guided by the first ball entry unit 62a or the second ball entry unit 62b.

As described above, the game ball that has won the second operation winning opening 33b is detected by the second detection sensor 65b. Therefore, the game ball that has won the first actuating prize moving port 33a and the destination is distributed to the second passage 64d and the game ball that has won the second actuating prize opening 33b are the same detection sensor (second detection sensor). It is detected at 65b).

Based on the fact that the first detection sensor 65a detects the game ball (the game ball enters the first ball entry unit 62a), the first result display unit AS performs a variation display of the pattern, and the variation display is performed. As a result of the stoppage of the above, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the first detection sensor 65a detecting the game ball is clearly indicated by the display. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection sensor 65a is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit AS stops at a predetermined position. After the results are displayed and the variable display is stopped
Shift to open / close execution mode. The variation display of the pattern executed by the first result display unit AS is hereinafter referred to as "the variation display of the first special symbol", and the stop result of the variation display of the pattern executed by the second result display unit BS. May be referred to as "the result of stopping the second special symbol".

Based on the fact that the second detection sensor 65b detects the game ball (the game ball enters the second ball entry unit 62b), the second result display unit BS performs a variation display of the pattern, and the variation display is performed. As a result of the stoppage of the above, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the second detection sensor 65b detecting the game ball is clearly indicated by the display. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the detection of the game ball by the second detection sensor 65b is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit BS stops the predetermined position. After the results are displayed and the variable display is stopped
Shift to open / close execution mode.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating winning openings 33a and 33b (the game ball is detected by the first detection sensor 65a or the game ball is detected by the second detection sensor 65b), the corresponding result display units AS and BS The variation display is started at, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the period until the variation display is stopped corresponds to one game. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, for example, a single result display unit is provided, and any of the operation winning openings 33a, 3
In a configuration in which variable display is performed on the single result display unit even if a prize is won in 4a, the variable display is started on the single result display unit and a predetermined stop result is displayed. The period until the above fluctuation display is stopped is regarded as one game.

Even in the game board 24 of the third embodiment, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. To. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 3 are provided in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball.
8 is planted, and various members (accessories) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

Further, in the third embodiment, "electrical configuration (FIGS. 15 and 16)" and "symbol display device 4"
Display contents of 1 (FIG. 17), "various counters (FIG. 18)", "win / fail table (FIG. 19)",
"Distribution destination of game results to jackpot type counter C2 (FIG. 20)", "Matters related to reach display (reach state)", "Reserved ball storage area 232 (FIG. 21)", "Timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 22 to 22)" 25) ”is the same as that of the first embodiment.

In the third embodiment, as a part of various detection sensors 211a to 211e, in addition to the detection sensor for detecting the winning of the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, and the through gate 35, the operating winning opening The detection sensor for detecting the winning of the 33a and 33b (the game ball has passed through the first detection sensor 65a and the second ball entry section 62b for detecting that the game ball has entered the first entry section 62a). A second detection sensor 65b) is provided to detect the above.

Next, the display screen G1 of the symbol display device 41 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (b). This display screen G1 also has a variable display area of the upper symbol row, a variable display area of the middle symbol, and a variable display area ME of the lower symbol. A hold display area NE is set in a portion below the variable display area ME. The reserved display area NE is the same as the maximum number of reserved balls when the game balls enter the operating winning openings 33a and 33b (when the game balls enter the first winning portion 62a or the second winning portion 62b). A hold number display area Da is provided in which the hold display areas Da1 to Da8 are arranged so as to be arranged in the left-right direction.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first ball entry portion 62a, the maximum number of reserved balls is four.
When the ball enters the second ball entry portion 62b, the maximum number of reserved balls is four. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a total of eight hold information is stored in the order of winning the first ball entry section 62a and the second ball entry section 62b. Corresponding to this, the hold number display area Da includes the first unit hold display area Da1, the second unit hold display area Da2, and the third unit hold display area Da3.
, 4th unit hold display area Da4, 5th unit hold display area Da5, 6th unit hold display area D
The a6, the 7th unit hold display area Da7, and the 8th unit hold display area Da8 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings (total number of holdings) is one when the game ball wins in the operating winning openings 33a and 33b, the predetermined holding display image MP is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Da1. If the number of reserved balls is 4 when the game ball wins in the operating winning openings 33a and 33b,
A predetermined hold display image M in the first unit hold display area Da1 to the fourth unit hold display area Da4.
P is displayed. Note that FIG. 93 (b) illustrates the case where the number of reserved items is three.

Further, in the hold display area NE, the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area D)
An execution target display area Db in which the hold display image MP corresponding to the game times to be executed (running) is displayed is provided so as to be side by side with a1).

When the game round is completed and the game is moved to the next game round, the hold display image MP displayed in the hold number display area Da (first unit hold display area Da1) moves to the execution target display area Db.
The hold display image MP displayed in the hold number display area Da is shifted to the lower side.

Next, the characteristics of the counter used by the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment during the game will be described with reference to FIG. 94. The MPU 202 of the third embodiment also uses various counter hold information during the game to generate a big hit lottery, set the display of the main display unit 43, set the outline of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and display the accessory display unit 44. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 94, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the like, as in the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, are set. Random number initial value counter CIN
I, the variable type counter CS and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the update value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. The lottery counter buffer 2
It is stored in 31 as appropriate. In the lottery counter buffer 231, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is when a prize is generated in the winning openings 33a and 33b (specifically, the first detection sensor 65a or the first detection sensor 65a or the first. 2 When the detection sensor 65b detects the passage of the game ball), it is stored in the hold ball storage area 232 as the acquisition hold information storage means.

The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE for winning an operation. The holding area RE includes a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7, and an eighth area Ra8, and wins a prize. The jackpot random number counter C1 and jackpot stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 according to the winning history of the mouths 33a and 33b (specifically, the history of winning the first ball and the second ball 62b). Each numerical value hold information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the areas Ra1 to Ra8. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8, when winning the winning openings 33a and 33b (specifically, entering the first ball entry portion 62a and the second entry section 62b) occurs a plurality of times in succession. In addition, each numerical value holding information is time-series in the order of 1st area Ra1 → 2nd area Ra2 → 3rd area Ra3 → 4th area Ra4 → 5th area Ra5 → 6th area Ra6 → 7th area Ra7 → 8th area Ra8. Will be stored. Since the eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 are provided in this way, the ball entry history of the game ball into the first entry section 62a and the second entry section 62b is 4, respectively.
A total of eight winning histories, that is, winning histories in the winning openings 33a and 33b, are stored on hold. Further, the reserved ball storage area 232 is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the total reserved number storage area is acquired and acquired based on the entry into the first entry section 62a or the second entry section 62b. Hold information for specifying the number of stored hold information is stored.

For example, if only one of the first ball entry section 62a and the second ball entry section 62b is hit, and the number is 4 or more, the maximum memory for winning the operating winning openings 33a and 33b. Although the number is limited to four, the game ball is moved to the first ball entry portion 62a and the second ball by the distribution means 63 already described.
As long as the balls are alternately entered into the ball entry portions 62b, the maximum number of stored balls related to the winning of the operating winning openings 33a and 33b is increased to eight. That is, in the present embodiment, even in a situation where it is difficult for the second operation winning opening 33b to win a prize, it is possible to prevent the number of stored information from reaching a plateau at four. ing.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area RE when the variable display of the main display unit 43 is started, and is an execution area at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical hold information stored in the AE, a winning / failing determination or the like is performed.

For details on each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 of the third embodiment is, for example, 0.
Within the range of ~ 299, 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball wins in the operating winning openings 33a and 33b, the game ball flowing into the ball entry portions 62a and 62be is detected by the detection sensors 65a and 65b. It is stored in the hold ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing.

Also in the third embodiment, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss hold information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 221 as the hit / miss hold information group storage means in the ROM 203. In this pass / fail table, the address hold information consisting of the binary number hold information and the jackpot numerical hold information also consisting of the binary number hold information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address hold information is expressed as a decimal number from "1" to "10".
10 types of "" are set, and the jackpot numerical value hold information is expressed in decimal numbers as "7".
, "36", "67", "100", "131", "164", "195", "223"
, "241", and "272" are set, and these address hold information and jackpot numerical hold information are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical value holding information is "0" which is a numerical range of random number holding information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.
It is included in ~ "299".

Also in the third embodiment, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means. And while the probability of winning a big hit in the low probability mode is 1/300, the probability of winning a big hit in the high probability mode is 1/30, and the high probability mode wins the big hit more than the low probability mode. The probability of becoming is high. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 of the third embodiment is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is also updated periodically, and when a game ball wins a prize in the operating winning openings 33a and 33b, the game ball flowing into the ball entry portions 62a and 62b is detected by the detection sensors 65a and 65b. It is stored in the holding ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the same timing.

Also in the third embodiment, the distribution destination of the game result to the jackpot type counter C2 is RO.
It is stored as a distribution table (distribution hold information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution hold information group storage means in the M203. Then, as the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and a probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result) are set. In the distribution table, "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but the distribution of this numerical value is arbitrary.

Also in the third embodiment, the normal jackpot result is that the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the number of games is the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the support mode shifts. It is a big hit result that becomes a high frequency support mode until it becomes. After the end reference number of times has elapsed, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

Also in the third embodiment, the probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state winning, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

Also in the third embodiment, the distribution based on the entry into the second entry section 62b is the first entry section 6
The difference is provided so that it is more advantageous for the player than the distribution based on the entry into 2a. Specifically, the probabilistic jackpot results are roughly divided into two results with different advantages, the first probabilistic jackpot result in which the number of rounds is "15" and the second probabilistic jackpot result in which the number of rounds is "4". Then, when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained by the distribution based on the ball entering the second ball entry portion 62b, the probability variation jackpot result is obtained by the distribution based on the ball entry into the first ball entry section 62a. The above-mentioned advantages are given to the distribution mode based on the ball entering the first ball entry portion 62a and the distribution mode based on the ball entry into the second ball entry portion 62b by adopting a configuration that is likely to result in a 1-probability change jackpot. Is making a difference.

The reach random number counter C3 of the third embodiment has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238), the counter returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and when a game ball wins in the operating winning openings 33a and 33b, the game ball flowing into the ball entry portions 62a and 62b is detected by the detection sensors 65a and 65b. It is stored in the holding ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing. And R
It is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the OM 203. However, in the game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low-frequency support mode.

The variation type counter CS of the third embodiment is also configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time on the main display unit 43 and the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, when the symbol display device 41 determines the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation of the symbol, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired.

When determining the fluctuation display time in the symbol display device 41 or the main display unit 43, the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS, and the fluctuation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 are referred to. Further, in the MPU 202, the stop result in the main display unit 43 is determined by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE.
The stop result determination table stored in is used.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 of the third embodiment also has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 249, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249), it returns to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34 is not controlled to the open state.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, in the third embodiment, the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing executed in advancing the game in each game time by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 will be described mainly on the differences from the first embodiment. To do. Also in the third embodiment, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are performed. Although it is executed, description of these various processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The third embodiment is the same as the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment except that the content of the “winning process for the operating port” is different. Hereinafter, the winning process for the operating port of the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 95 and 96 (a).

<Prize processing for operating port>
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 95 and 96 (a).

In step S201b, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the first ball entry portion 62a. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entry unit 62a, the process proceeds to step S202b, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set.

In the following step S203b, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a hold information indicating that the game ball has entered the first ball entry unit 62a to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the ball has entered the first ball entry unit 62a. After that, in step S204b, the hold information acquisition process for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201b that the game ball has not won the first ball entry portion 62a, the process proceeds to step S205b. In step S205b, the game ball is the second ball entry portion 66.
It is determined whether or not the ball has entered (winning) a. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entry unit 62b, the process proceeds to step S206b, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set. The prize ball command set in steps S202b and S206b is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output process S401 (see FIG. 26), which is a normal process described later.

In the following step S207b, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a hold information indicating that the game ball has entered the second ball entry unit 62b to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the ball has entered the second ball entry unit 33e. After that, the hold information acquisition process is performed in step S204b, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in both the processes of steps S201b and S205b, that is, if there is no ball in either the first ball entry portion 62a or the second ball entry section 62b, the main winning process is terminated as it is. To do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 96A, the hold information acquisition process in step S204b will be described.

<Hold information acquisition process>
In the hold information acquisition process, first, in step S301b, the number of start hold balls N stored in the hold number storage area FE of the hold ball storage area 232, specifically, among the first ball entry section 62a and the second ball entry section 62b. It is determined whether or not the number of starting reserved balls N related to the ball entry portion that triggered the holding information acquisition process is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the main hold information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding ball entry portion is incremented by 1 in step S302b. At the same time, the total number of holds stored in the hold number storage area FE (hereinafter referred to as the common hold number CRN) is incremented by 1 in step S303b.

In the following step S304b, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in the above step S103 (see FIG. The first storage area in the storage area, that is, the common hold number CR that is incremented by 1 in step S302b.
Store in the storage area corresponding to N.

In the following steps S305b and S306b, a voice / lamp control device, which is a control device on the sub side (sub side), indicates that a prize has been generated in the operation winning openings 33a and 33b (balls have entered the ball winning portions 62a and 62b). The confirmation process for the hold notice and the hold command setting process, which are the processes for causing the 82 and the display control device 212 to recognize and execute the hold notice, which will be described later, are executed, and the hold information acquisition process is terminated. The hold command includes hold information as to which of the first ball entry section 62a and the second ball entry section 62b is based on winning a prize.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S306b is transmitted to the voice / lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 in the external output process (see step S501 in FIG. 26) of the normal process described later. It will be. By receiving the hold command, the display control device 212 executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da described above in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

Specifically, when the display control device 212 receives the same command in the display control device 212 via the voice / lamp control device 82, the display control device 212 displays the above-mentioned hold display image MP in the hold number display area Da. Execute the process for (for example, adding). In the hold number display area Da, the hold images are sequentially displayed from the left side. For example, if the common hold number CRN is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 at the left end, and the common hold image is displayed. If the number CRN is 8, the hold image is displayed in the eighth unit hold display area Da8, which is the eighth from the left. A detailed description of each process of steps S305b and S306b will be described later.

<Normal processing>
The normal process of the third embodiment is the same as the normal process of the first embodiment except for the following points.
That is, in the normal processing of the third embodiment, the data setting processing constituting the game time control processing is shown in FIG.
The variation start process that is executed based on FIG. 8 and constitutes the game turn control process is executed based on FIGS. 97 and 98. Further, it is different from the first embodiment in that the game state transition process is used by modifying FIG. 32. Hereinafter, the differences between the normal processing of the third embodiment and the normal processing of the first embodiment will be described.

<Data setting process>
FIG. 96B is a flowchart showing the data setting process of the third embodiment. This third
In the data setting process of the embodiment, first, in step S601b, among the start hold ball number N stored in the hold number storage area FE, the one that is the target of the current setting process and the common hold number CRN are set to 1 day. Memory. In the following step S602b, the first hold area RE
The data stored in the area Ra1 is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S603b, a process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in each area Ra1 to Ra8 of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 in order to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Ra1 and the second area Ra2 → 1st area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3 → 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra
4 → 3rd area Ra3, 5th area Ra5 → 4th area Ra4, 6th area Ra6 → 5th
Area Ra5, 7th area Ra7 → 6th area Ra6, 8th area Ra8 → 7th area R
The data in each area is shifted, such as a7.

In the following step S604b, a shift time command, which is hold information for causing the notification / effect control device 82 to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted, is set. After that, this data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S604 is
In step S501 in the normal process (see FIG. 26), the sound is transmitted to the display control device 212 via the voice / lamp control device 82. By receiving the shift command, the display control device 212 executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da in accordance with the decrease in the hold number display area Da.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing constituting the game rotation control processing of the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 97 and 98.

In the variation start process of the third embodiment, first, in step S801b, a win / fail determination process for determining whether or not the hold information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning is executed. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the execution area AE, the hold information for jackpot determination, that is, the hold information acquired from the hold information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the ROM
With reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode stored in the win / loss table storage area 221 of 203, it is specified whether the hold information grasped above is included in the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning, and the win / loss lottery mode is high. In the case of the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to, and whether the above-identified hold information is included in the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning. Identify.

In the following step S802b, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S801b is the result corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, the type determination process is executed in step S803b.

In the type determination process, among the hold information stored in the execution area AE, the hold information for type determination, that is, the hold information acquired from the hold information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, it is specified whether or not the reserved information for the type determination grasped above is included in the reserved information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. For details, when the hold information corresponds to the entry into the first ball entry section 62a, the distribution table for the first entry section 62a is referred to, and the hold information is the second entry section 62b. If it corresponds to the entry into the ball, the type is determined by referring to the distribution table for the second entry section 62b.

In the following step S804b, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is the probability variation jackpot result based on the hold information specified in the type determination process in step S803b. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed in step S805b, and if it is not the probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the normal jackpot is executed in step S806b. If it is determined in step S802b that the jackpot is not won, the stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed in step S807b.

In each stop result setting process of steps S805b to S807b, the main display unit 4
The hold information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in 3 is specified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203, and the specified hold information is stored in the RAM 204. Further, in step S805b and step S806b, it is determined that the winning / failing judgment result of this game round is a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result.
Hold information for identification in U202 is stored in various flag storage areas 235 of RAM 204. Specifically, in step S805b, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and step S
In 806b, a jackpot flag is usually stored.

After executing any of the processes of steps S805b to S807b, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S808b.

<Variable display time setting process>
In the variable display time setting process of the third embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 98,
First, in step S901b, it is determined whether or not the winner or failure lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

If a negative determination is made in step S901b, that is, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a wrong result, the process proceeds to step S902b. In step S902b, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in this game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S902b as the occurrence of reach display. When specifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to.

If an affirmative judgment is made in either step S901b or step S902b, the process proceeds to step S903b, and the current variation display time table for reach generation is referred to in the variation display time table storage area 223 of ROM 203. Variable type counter CS
The fluctuation display time hold information corresponding to the value of set. After that, this setting process ends.

That is, in the third embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the big hit winning result or when the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order and the lottery for generating reach is won. ing.

Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display in which the variable display modes are different from each other. In the variable display time table for reach generation, variable display time hold information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, the variable display time hold corresponding to each reach display is set. Information is retrieved. Regarding the determination of the reach display type, a table corresponding to the reach display type and the value of the variable type counter CS is provided, and by referring to the table, the value of the variable type counter CS this time can be used. The corresponding reach display is determined.

More specifically, the variation display time table for reach generation corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped and displayed in the case of the probability variation jackpot result, and the combination of non-specific symbols can be stopped and displayed in the case of the normal jackpot result. The variable display time is set to.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S902b, the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to in the variation display time table storage area 223 for non-reach, which is stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 in step S905b. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the above is acquired, and the fluctuation display time hold information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area in step S906b. After that, this setting process ends.

The variable display time hold information when reach does not occur is set so that the larger the number of common hold number CRNs, the shorter the variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of common hold number CRNs may be used, and the variable display time may be set to be shorter as the number of common hold number CRNs is smaller. .. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable display time table for generation is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when the reach occurs, and the variable display time that is easy to be selected and the variable display time that is difficult to be selected are different between the time of winning the jackpot and the time of the missed reach. It may be configured. Further, the variable display time table for the probabilistic jackpot, the variable display time table for the normal jackpot, the variable display time table for the missed reach, and the variable display time table for the complete miss may be set individually.

As described above, the fluctuation display time of each game is determined by parameters such as the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the type of reach display, the number of reserved information, and the value of the fluctuation type counter. However, the variable display time of each game is the content of other hold information, specifically, the hold information for jackpot judgment, the hold information for type judgment, and the hold information for reach judgment included in the other hold information. Is determined without using.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 97), after executing the variation display time setting process in step S808b, the variation command and the type command are set in step S809b. The change command includes hold information on whether or not reach has occurred and hold information on the change display time. In addition, the type command includes hold information of the game result. That is, the type command includes the hold information of the probability variation jackpot result, the hold information of the normal jackpot result, the hold information of the missed result, and the like as the hold information of the game result.

The variation command and the type command set in step S809b are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (see FIG. 26). The notification / effect control device 82 determines the light emission pattern of the indicator lamp unit 63 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 64 in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and determines the output pattern of the sound from the determined effect. The indicator lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so that the contents are executed. Further, the notification / effect control device 82 transmits the change command and the type command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the hold information form. Display control device 2
In 12, the variation display pattern in the symbol display device 41 in the game round is determined based on the received variation command and the type command, and the symbol display device 41 is displayed so that the determined variation display pattern is executed. Control. After that, in step S810b, the variation display of the pattern is started on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 43, and then the variation start processing is ended.

<Game state transition process>
In the game state transition process of the third embodiment, the process of step S1105b (not shown) is performed instead of the process of steps S1105 to S1107 instead of the process of steps S1105 to S1107. Different from processing. That is, step S110
In 5b, a value determined according to the jackpot type, specifically, "15" or "4" is set in the round counter area RC provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened. Then, when step S1105b is executed, S1108 is executed.
Move to. The other processes are the same as the game state transition process of the first embodiment.

<About hold notice>
Here, also in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the hold notice suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 is before the game round related to the hold information is started. It is configured to be performed with a predetermined probability at the timing. Such a hold notice is performed by executing a predetermined control on the display control device 212 based on a predetermined command transmitted from the main control device 81.

<Overview of hold notice>
First, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, an outline of the advance notice effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Here, FIGS. 99 and 100 schematically show the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

In the third embodiment, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is one of the entry portions 62a, 62.
Based on winning a prize in b, variable display is started on the corresponding result display units AS and BS.
A predetermined stop result (big hit result or miss result) is displayed, and the above-mentioned fluctuation display is stopped. In the result display units AS and BS, "from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display" corresponds to one game. Then, in the pachinko machine 10, various effect devices, that is, the effect display device (design display device 41) and the light emitting means for lighting (window unit 61) are arranged according to the fluctuation display in the result display units AS and BS. Various lamp units around the window, a display lamp unit 63 above the window unit 61), and voice means (speaker unit 64) that generate sound effects, etc., execute the game effect.

The hold notice is given using the above-mentioned effect device as a part of this game effect. Figures 99 to 1
In 00, an effect display device (design display device 41) is shown as an effect device that gives a hold notice, but in the pachinko machine 10, all the effect devices (effect display device, light emitting means, and voice means) give a hold notice. Execute using. However, the hold notice may be executed by using one type of effect device or two types of effect devices selected from all the effect devices (effect display device, light emitting means, and audio means). Further, also in the third embodiment, as the "hold notice", as in the first embodiment, a normal type hold notice (first notice effect) is executed when the normal execution condition is satisfied.
In addition, a special type of hold notice (second notice effect) that is executed when a special execution condition is satisfied.
Will be explained.

“D1” in FIG. 99 is a situation in which the number of stored information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry portion 62a or the first entry ball portion 62b is “3”. Display 41
Shows the case where the fluctuation display (pre-variation display) is being executed. At this time, the hold number display area Da is displayed to indicate that the number of hold information stored is "3".

In this "D1" situation, it is assumed that the game ball enters the first ball entry section 62a or the first ball entry section 62b, acquires new hold information, and stores it ("D2"). Moreover, it is assumed that it is decided (notice decision) to execute the hold notice based on this prize. Then, based on the hold information acquired based on the winning, the condition establishment lottery (first notice lottery) is performed, and if the condition satisfaction lottery is won, the hold notice (first notice production) is generated. A lottery will be held. Then, when the generation lottery is won, it is determined that the first notice effect will be generated. However, if the first notice lottery is won, the hold notice (first notice effect) may be generated without performing the generation lottery. This point is the same in the second notice lottery described later.

The hold information won in the first notice lottery is the above-mentioned "target hold information", but the number of hold information acquired before this "target hold information" and stored in the hold area Ra for the result display unit. Is three ("D1", "D2"). In this case, using the three fluctuation displays (variation display based on each of the three hold information) started after the fluctuation display shown in "D1" and "D2" is completed, the "target hold information is It is assumed that a hold notice (first notice effect) indicating "the possibility of a grant response result" is executed. Acquisition of new pending information (acquisition of target pending information)
As a result, the number of stored information on hold becomes "4", and the number of stored information on hold is displayed in the hold display area Da as "4"("D2"). The target hold information is displayed as a "double square mark", and other hold information (previously obtained hold information) is displayed as a "hatched mark surrounded by a square".

“D3” in FIG. 99 indicates a case where the variation display shown in “D1” and “D2” ends with displaying the deviation result. Then, when the display time of the disengagement result (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the variable display based on the hold information with the oldest storage order in the hold area RE for the operation winning opening (the first). 1 Variable display) is started, and the hold display area D
The number of stored information indicated by a is reduced to "3" (not shown). Then, when the first variable display is started and a predetermined timing arrives, the "character pattern for the advance notice effect" appears ("D4").

After that, when the first variation display is finished and the display time of the deviation result elapses, the variation display (second variation display) based on the hold information with the next oldest storage order is started in the hold area RE for the operation winning opening (second variation display). Not shown). At this time, the number of stored information stored in the hold display area Da is reduced to "2", and the number of stored information indicated by the hold display area Da is reduced to "2" (not shown).
.. Then, when the second variable display is started and a predetermined timing arrives, a "character pattern for advance notice production" appears ("D5"). Further, during the second variation display, it is assumed that the ball enters the first ball entry unit 62a or the first ball entry unit 62b, and two new hold informations are acquired and stored (“D6). "). Therefore, the number of stored information on hold information indicated by the hold display area Da increases to "4". In the hold display area Da of FIGS. 99 to 100, the hold information acquired after the hold information subject to the hold notice (first notice effect) and is the hold information subject to the hold notice (target). When the change display (target change display) based on the hold information) starts, the hold information (that is, the acquired information) that has been acquired is displayed by a "cross mark surrounded by a square".

After that, when the second variation display is finished and the display time of the deviation result elapses, the variation display (third variation display) based on the hold information whose storage order is the next oldest in the hold area RE for the operation winning opening is started. (Not shown). At this time, the number of stored information stored in the hold display area Da is "3".
The number of stored information in the hold display area Da is reduced to "3". Then, when the third variable display is started and a predetermined timing arrives, the "character pattern for the advance notice effect" appears ("D7"). Then, during the third variation display, the ball is entered into the first ball entry unit 62a or the first ball entry unit 62b "5 times", and five new hold information are acquired and stored. ("D8"). Therefore, the number of stored information stored in the hold display area Da is ".
Increases to "8"("D8").

Subsequently, the third variation display is terminated, and the deviation result is displayed (“D9” in FIG. 100). Then, the hold information (target hold information) that is the target of the hold notice (first notice effect) moves (digested) from the first area of the hold area RE for the result display unit to the execution area RE, and the target change display is started. (D11), but before the target variation display is started, if the result of the target variation display is scheduled to be a "missing result" (when the target pending information is not jackpot information), "obtained information" There is a possibility of executing a hold notice (second notice effect) based on (D10). That is, the information having a high winning probability is preferentially selected from all the acquired information, and a lottery for satisfying the condition of whether or not to execute the second advance notice effect (second advance notice lottery) is performed for the selected acquired information.

Here, in the third embodiment, the following method is illustrated as a process of preferentially selecting a process having a high winning probability, but the following method of this process is not limited. Also in the third embodiment, the jackpot information having the highest winning probability is preferentially selected, but the validity of the acquired information is not determined. However, the effectiveness may be determined also in the third embodiment. Further, also in the present embodiment, when a plurality of jackpot information is stored as acquired information,
Select the jackpot information stored earlier, and select the jackpot information stored later in the "second notice lottery".
Excludes. Then, if the result of the "second notice lottery" is won for the jackpot information, the "second notice lottery" ends at that point. In addition, if the result of the "second notice lottery" for the jackpot information is unsuccessful, if there is already-acquired information stored before the jackpot information, the acquired information (reach information or non-reach information) will be referred to as "No. 1". 2 Notice lottery "will be held,
The "second notice lottery" may not be held.

Further, also in the third embodiment, when the jackpot information is not stored as the acquired information, all the acquired information stored in the hold area (Ra or Rb) for the result display unit is "second" in the order of storage. "Notice lottery" will be held.

In the third embodiment, a "second advance notice lottery" is performed for the predetermined acquired information, and in the case of winning, even if the acquired information stored after the acquired information exists, the acquired information stored after that is the same. It is not subject to the "second notice lottery". In addition, when the "second notice lottery" based on the jackpot information is lost, if there is already obtained information (other than the jackpot information) stored before the jackpot information, it is stored in the destination. Although the "second notice lottery" is performed in the order of storage for the acquired information, the acquired information stored in advance may be excluded from the target of the second advance notice lottery.

In the third embodiment, the "acquired information other than the jackpot information" may also be the target of the "second advance notice lottery" by giving priority to the acquired information having a high winning probability of the "second advance notice lottery".
For example, when the acquired information is reach information (super reach information, normal reach information), it may be subject to a preliminary lottery with priority over non-reach information. Furthermore, when the reach information (super reach information, normal reach information) is prioritized over the non-reach information, the "super reach information" that will perform super reach in the variable display (game production) when showing the result of the grant determination is , It may be the target of the advance notice lottery in preference to the "normal reach information" that will perform the normal reach in the variable display (game effect) when showing the result of the grant determination. Here, as will be described later, the winning probabilities of the first notice lottery and the second notice lottery are that the jackpot information is higher than the reach information, the reach information is higher than the non-reach information, and the super reach information is higher than the normal reach information. Has been done.

To be further described with reference to FIG. 100, the “out-of-order result” is displayed after the target variation display is performed for a predetermined time (“D12”). Next, the variation display (previous target acquired information variation display) based on the acquired information (previous target acquired information) stored before the target acquired information is sequentially performed (“D13”, “D13”, “
D14 "). Furthermore, the variation display based on the target acquired information (target acquired variation display) is started (""
D15 "). When this variation display is finished, the result of the variation display (big hit result or miss result) is displayed (“D16”). Here, in "D12" and "D14" of FIG. 100, it is indicated that seven pieces of acquired information are stored when the target variation display is finished. However, the acquired information processed fourth is the target acquired information, and the acquired information (pending information) processed in the first to third is the previous target acquired information. That is, when a plurality of acquired information is provided, the "previous target acquired information variation display" and the "target object acquired information display" are not always performed based on all the acquired information.

<About the electrical configuration related to the hold notice>
First, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 of the third embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 of the third embodiment.

<Processing related to hold notice executed by the main controller 81>
Next, the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described. As the process related to the hold notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, the confirmation process for the hold notice and the setting process of the hold command are set.

<Confirmation process for hold notice>
First, the confirmation process for the hold notice will be described. The confirmation process for the hold notice is the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 96 (a)) set as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).
Is executed in step S305b of. In this case, the hold information acquisition process is executed when a prize is generated in the first operation winning opening 33a or the second operating winning opening 33b.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice. In the confirmation process for the hold notice, in step S1801b, the hold number storage area FE of the hold ball storage area 232
The start hold storage number N and the common hold number CRN stored in the above are read, and the hold information of the hold number is stored in the register of the MPU 202. After that, steps S1802b to S1806
In b, it is confirmed whether or not the hold information of the jackpot winning is included in the hold information acquired by this winning.

Specifically, first, among the pending information acquired in step S304b (see FIG. 96A) based on the current winning of the operating winning openings 33a and 33b in step S1802b, the pending information for jackpot determination, that is, The value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped.

In the following step S1803b, it is determined whether or not the mode is in the low probability mode. In particular,
By determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, it is determined whether or not the current winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1804b, and the hold information for jackpot determination (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S302b with reference to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode corresponds to the jackpot winning. Identify whether it is included in the pending information group. Further, in the case of the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1805b, and with reference to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, the hold information for jackpot determination (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1802b wins the jackpot. Identifies whether it is included in the pending information set as.

After step S1804b or step S1805b, in step S1806b,
It is determined whether or not the hold information for jackpot determination grasped in step S1802b corresponds to the jackpot winning. When the jackpot winning is supported, in step S1807b, from the pending information acquired in step S304b based on this winning, the pending information for type determination, that is, the pending information updated by the jackpot type counter C2. Grasp the acquired hold information.

In the following step S1808b, with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit or the second result display unit, the hold information for determining the jackpot type grasped in step S1807b is set as the normal jackpot result. Or, it is specified whether it is included in any of the pending information set as the result of the 15R probability variation jackpot. Specifically, when the hold information acquired this time is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry unit 62a, the distribution table for the first result display unit is displayed. With reference to this, if the processing of S1808b is performed and the game ball is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry unit 62b, the distribution table for the first result display unit is referred to. Then, the process of S1808b is performed.

After that, in step S1809b, it is determined whether or not the hold information for the jackpot type grasped in step S1807b corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and in step S1810b, the hold for the jackpot type grasped in step S1807b is determined. Determine if the information usually corresponds to a jackpot result.

As a result, when the 15R probability variation jackpot result is supported, the probability variation jackpot hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1810b. Further, when the 15R probability variation jackpot result is not supported, that is, when the normal jackpot result is supported, the normal jackpot hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1811b. Then, when the process of step S1810b or step S1811b is executed, the confirmation process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1806b that the hold information for jackpot determination grasped in step S1802b does not correspond to the jackpot winning, step S181
Proceed to 2b. In step S1812b, among the hold information acquired in step S304b based on this winning, the hold information for the out-of-reach determination, that is, the hold information acquired from the hold information updated by the reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S1813b, with reference to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 203, the hold information for reach determination grasped in step S1814b is included in the hold information set as the reach winning. Identify if it is. After that, in step S1815b, it is determined whether or not the hold information for reach determination grasped in step S1812b corresponds to the occurrence of reach. When the reach generation is supported, the confirmation process is terminated after the reach generation hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1815b. This reach occurrence hold information also includes a reach type (hold information regarding whether the reach occurrence hold information indicates normal reach occurrence or the reach occurrence hold information indicating super reach occurrence). If the reach is not supported, the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

<Hold command setting process>
Next, the setting process of the hold command will be described. The hold command setting process is a hold information acquisition process (FIG. 96 (a)) set as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).
Is executed in step S306b of. In this case, even if the hold information acquisition process is the hold information acquisition process when a prize is generated in the first operation winning opening 33a or the second operation winning opening 33b, the hold command setting process is executed.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the hold command. First step S2
At 001, it is determined whether or not either the normal jackpot hold information or the probability variation jackpot hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. If either the normal jackpot hold information or the probability change jackpot hold information is stored, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not it is the probability change jackpot hold information. If it is the probability change jackpot hold information, the probability change correspondence hold command is set in the hold command setting area provided in the RAM 204 in step S2003, and if it is the normal jackpot hold information, R in step S2004.
Set the normally supported hold command in the hold command setting area of AM204.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that both the normal jackpot hold information and the probabilistic jackpot hold information are not stored, the process proceeds to step S2005, and whether or not the reach generation hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. To judge. When the reach occurrence hold information is stored, the reach correspondence hold command is set in the hold command setting area of the RAM 204 in step S2006, and when the reach occurrence hold information is not stored, the reach occurrence hold information is not stored in step S2007. Then, a non-reach compatible hold command is set in the hold command setting area of the RAM 204.

Step S2003, Step S2004, Step S2006 or Step S200
After executing any of the processes of 7, in step S2008, the total number of reserved balls (holding information acquired based on the entry into the first entry section 62a and the entry into the second entry section 62b). The process of setting the hold information of the total number of the hold information acquired based on the above, that is, the total number of the hold information stored in the hold area RE for the operation winning) for the above hold command is executed, and the first 3 The setting process of the hold command of the embodiment is completed. Specifically, as the process of step S2008, the hold information of the hold command set above is configured as hold information of a plurality of bytes, and for some of the bits, the hold command itself is a hold command. Hold information and hold information of the type of hold command are included, and hold information of the number of holds can be set.

In step S2008, first, the hold information of the total number of holds stored in the register of the MPU 202 is read in step S1801 in the confirmation process (FIG. 101) for the immediately preceding hold notice, and then the total number of hold commands already set is read. The hold information of the read hold number is stored in the bit for the hold information of the hold number by arithmetic processing such as logical sum. Thereby, with respect to the hold command set in any of the processes of step S2003, step S2004, step S2006 or step S2007, the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command is specified. Will contain pending information for. After executing the process of step S2008 described in detail above, the hold command setting process is terminated.

The hold command including the hold information of the number of holds in step S2008 is the voice lamp control device 8 by the external output process of step S401 in the next normal process (FIG. 26).
It is sent to 2. The voice lamp control device 82 identifies that the hold information has increased by receiving such a hold command. Further, the voice lamp control device 82 adds hold information for hold notice, which will be described later, to the hold command and transmits the hold information to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 executes a process for holding display, holding notice, and the like based on the received hold command.

Further, the method of setting the hold command depends on the hold command in the display control device 212, such as whether or not a jackpot is won, the jackpot type at that time when the jackpot is won, and whether or not reach is generated when the jackpot is not won. It is arbitrary as long as it is possible to specify the variable display mode of the symbol. For example, a combination of a jackpot support hold command, a reach support hold command, and a non-reach support hold command is individually set corresponding to each hold quantity, and in the hold command setting process, a confirmation process for hold notice (Fig.) It is also possible to select one hold command according to the confirmation result in 101). At the end of the hold command setting process, the probability change jackpot hold information, the normal jackpot hold information, and the reach occurrence hold information stored in the MPU 202 register are deleted.

<Command correspondence processing executed by the display control device 212>
Next, the command correspondence process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 is shown in FIG.
This will be described with reference to the flowchart of 3. The command correspondence process of the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S3003a is first performed instead of the process of step S3003. That is, in step S3003a, the notice condition establishment flag (notification condition establishment hold information) is stored in the notice condition establishment flag storage area (notification condition establishment hold information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. If so, erase it.

The notice condition establishment flag is the hold information for specifying in the MPU 252 whether or not the hold information is set to give the hold notice, and when the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied. This is the hold information that is stored in and deleted when the condition for ending the hold notice is satisfied. In the command correspondence process of the third embodiment, step S3003a
Alternatively, the process of step S3003 of the first embodiment may not be performed. That is, in the third embodiment, when the opening command is received as described above, the stored advance notice condition establishment flag is deleted, so that the game ball enters the first ball entry portion 62a or the second entry section 62a. The situation in which the hold information acquired based on entering the ball portion 62b is set to give a hold notice is resolved when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. As a result, the hold notice for the hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry portion 62a or the second entry ball portion 62b is not executed across the open / close execution mode. However, even if the opening command is received, the advance notice condition establishment flag may not be deleted. In this case, the situation in which the hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry section 62a or the second entry section 62b is set to give a hold notice is set to the open / close execution mode. Since it is not resolved at the time of transition, the hold notice can be executed across the open / close execution mode.

<Processing for hold commands on the display control device 212>
First, the hold command correspondence process in step S3012 of FIG. 103 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 104. Here, in the hold command corresponding process of the third embodiment, the process corresponding to the “process of steps S3106 to S3109” in FIG. 55 and the process corresponding to “S31” in FIG. 55
It is different from the hold command corresponding process of the first embodiment in that the process corresponding to "the process of 13 to S3115" is not performed. In addition, the hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry portion 62a and the hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entry portion 62b are controlled. Not distinguished. Hereinafter, the pending command correspondence process of the third embodiment will be described.

If it is determined in step S3101a that the hold command to be read this time is either a probability change support hold command or a normal support hold command, step S310
In 2a, the hold information of the total number of holds included in the command received this time is specified. And
The holding information of the specified total number of holdings is set for the erasing counter area in the counter area 323 provided in the work RAM 254. That is, in the third embodiment, the total of the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first entry section 62a and the hold information acquired based on the entry into the second entry section 62b is added. Identify.

In the following step S3103a, it is determined whether or not the jackpot hold flag (big hit hold information) is stored in the jackpot hold flag storage area (big hit hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. That is, in the third embodiment, the first jackpot hold and the second jackpot hold are not distinguished, and only the jackpot hold flag (big hit hold information) is stored in the flag storage area (big hit hold information storage means). There is.

Further, the erasing counter area 323 is also a measuring means for specifying the timing for erasing the jackpot hold flag when the jackpot hold flag is stored. The hold information of the number of holds set in the erasure counter area is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time a new game round is started, and is stored in the first erasure counter area after the update. When the hold information is "0", which is the initial value, the jackpot hold flag clearing process is executed.

If the jackpot hold flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3103a, and the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the jackpot hold flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3104a.

When the jackpot hold flag is stored as described above, even if the probability change correspondence hold command or the normal correspondence hold command is received, an affirmative judgment is made in step S3103a, and various settings for giving a hold notice are made. The jackpot correspondence setting process (step S3106a) is not executed. As a result, the holding area RE for the operation winning opening of the main control device 81 has already been reached.
(See FIG. 94), in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result is stored, the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first entry section 62a, or the first 2 Even if the hold information acquired based on the entry into the ball entry unit 62b corresponds to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result, various settings for giving the hold notice are not made.

After storing the jackpot hold flag in step S3104a, step S3105a
Determines whether or not the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the notice condition establishment flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3105, and the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is. That is, in the situation where the hold notice is already set, even if a new probabilistic response hold command or the normal response hold command is received, no new setting is made for the hold notice.

If the notice condition establishment flag is not stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3105a, after executing the jackpot correspondence setting process in step S3106a,
Terminates the processing corresponding to this hold command. Here, regarding the jackpot correspondence setting process, FIG. 56 (
This will be described with reference to a) and the flowchart of FIG. 105.

The jackpot correspondence setting process is performed based on FIG. 56 (a). Further, in the jackpot establishment winning process, as shown in FIG. 105, first, in step S3211a, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is a normal correspondence hold command. In the case of the normal response hold command, in step S3212a, the normal jackpot notice flag storage area (normal jackpot notice hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is filled with the normal jackpot notice flag (normal jackpot notice hold information). ) Is stored, and in the case of a probability change correspondence hold command, in step S3213a, the probability change jackpot notice flag (probability change jackpot notice hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is stored. Probability change jackpot notice pending information) is stored.

The normal jackpot notice flag is the hold information that triggered the fulfillment of the hold notice in the situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied (that is, when the execution of the hold notice is permitted). This is pending information for specifying in the MPU 252 that it usually corresponds to the jackpot result. Then, the flag is usually stored when the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, and is deleted when the condition for ending the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information.

In addition, the probability change jackpot notice flag is a hold that triggered the establishment of the condition in the situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied (that is, when the execution of the hold notice is permitted). MPU252 that the information corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result
This is the pending information to be specified in. Then, the flag is stored when the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and is deleted when the condition for ending the hold notice is satisfied for the hold information. ..

After executing the process of step S3212a or step S3213a, step S3
At 214a, the notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. Subsequent step S3
In 215a, the hold information of the total number of holds included in the hold command to be read this time is specified, and the hold information of the specified total number of holds is transmitted to the hold notice counter area 325 provided in the work RAM 254. Set. After that, the jackpot winning process is exited and the jackpot correspondence setting process is completed.

The hold notice counter area is set when the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first ball entry section 62a or the entry into the second entry section 62b is set as an opportunity to execute the hold notice. MPU25 determines which game times the hold information related to the setting corresponds to the hold information.
It is a measuring means for specifying in 2. The hold information stored in the hold area RE for the operation winning opening (see FIG. 94) is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time a new game is started, and after the update, the hold notice counter area When the hold information stored in is set to "0", which is the initial value, the notice condition establishment flag is cleared, and the state set to give the hold notice is released. In addition, step S3215a of FIG. 105,
As shown in parentheses in step S3218a of FIG. 106 and step S3413a of FIG. 107, in the second hold notice, the "target acquired information number" is set in the hold notice counter area instead of the total hold number information. Will be done.

Returning to the explanation of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 104), when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is neither the probability change correspondence hold command nor the normal correspondence hold command (that is, the reach correspondence hold command or the non-reach). (When it is determined that the command is a corresponding hold command), in step S3107a, it is determined whether or not the jackpot hold flag is stored in the work RAM 254. And if the jackpot hold flag is stored,
The process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is.

Here, even when a reach-supported hold command or a non-reach-supported hold command is received, if the jackpot hold flag is stored, the hold command-supporting process is terminated as it is. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result is already stored in the hold area RE (see FIG. 94) for the operation winning opening of the main control device 81. Will give a hold notice even if a ball enters the first ball entry section 62a or a second ball entry section 62b is newly generated, regardless of whether or not the situation is set to give a hold notice. The above settings are not made.

If it is determined in step S3107a that the jackpot hold flag is not stored, it is determined in step S3108a whether or not the notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored, step S31
An affirmative judgment is made at 08a, and the pending command correspondence process is terminated as it is.

Here, as described above, even when a reach-supported hold command or a non-reach-supported hold command is received, if the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored, the hold command-supporting process is terminated as it is. I made it. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, in the situation where the hold notice is set, the hold notice is given even if the ball enters the first ball entry section 62a or the second ball entry section 62b is newly generated. Various settings are not made for this.

If the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3109a, and it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is a reach-compatible hold command. Then, in the case of the reach correspondence hold command, the reach correspondence setting process is executed in step S3110a, and then the present hold command correspondence process is terminated. If it is not a reach-enabled hold command (if it is a non-reach-enabled hold command), step S311
After executing the non-reach correspondence setting process in 1a, the present hold command correspondence process is terminated.

Here, the reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 56 (b) and 106, and the non-reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 57 (a) and 107.

The reach correspondence setting process is executed based on FIG. 56 (b). Further, in the reach winning process, as shown in FIG. 106, first, in step S3311a, the mode in which the hold notice relating to the current setting is actually performed is set among a plurality of predetermined modes. A sorting lottery process for sorting which mode is to be used is executed. As the aspect, the normal jackpot guessing mode that can be selected when the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result is set as the trigger for executing the hold notice, and the hold information corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result are the execution of the hold notice. A probabilistic jackpot estimation mode that can be selected when set as an opportunity and a reach notice mode are set.

When the process of step S3311a is executed, the process proceeds to step S3312a. In step S3312a, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3311a is the reach notice mode. In the case of the reach notice mode, in step S3316a, the reach notice flag (reach notice hold information) is stored in the reach notice flag storage area (reach confirmation notice hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. ..

If a negative determination is made in step S3312a, the process proceeds to step S3313a. In step S3313a, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3311a is usually a jackpot guessing mode. In the case of the normal jackpot guessing mode, in step S3314a, various flag storage areas 3 of the work RAM 254
The normal jackpot guessing notice flag (normal guessing notice holding information) is stored in the normal jackpot guessing notice flag storage area (normal jackpot guessing notice holding information storage means) in 22. If the normal jackpot estimation mode is not used, in step S3315a, the probability variation jackpot guessing notice flag storage area (probability variation estimation advance notice hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is filled with the probability variation jackpot guessing notice flag (probability variation jackpot). Guessing notice pending information) is stored.

When the process of step S3314a, step S3315a or step S3316a is executed, the process proceeds to step S3317a. In the process of step S3317a, the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. In the following step S3118a, the hold information of the total number of holds included in the hold command to be read this time is specified, and the hold information of the specified hold number is transferred to the hold notice counter area in the hold notice counter area 325. And set. After that, the reach-for establishment winning process is exited, the reach-corresponding setting process is terminated, and the hold command-corresponding process is further terminated.

Next, the non-reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (a) and 107.
The non-reach correspondence setting process is executed based on FIG. 57 (a). Further, in the non-reach establishment winning process, as shown in FIG. 107, first, in step S3411a, the work RAM
The reach guessing notice flag (non-reach guessing notice holding information) is stored in the reach guessing notice flag storage area (reach guessing notice hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of 254.

After executing the process of step S3411a, in step S3412a, the work RA
The notice condition fulfillment flag is stored in M254. In the following step S3413a, the hold information of the total number of holds included in the hold command to be read this time is specified, and the hold information of the specified total number of holds is transferred to the hold notice counter area in the hold notice counter area 325. Set for. After that, it exits the non-reach establishment winning process, ends the non-reach correspondence setting process, and further ends the hold command correspondence process.

<Variable display control processing>
As shown in FIG. 108, the variation display control process of the third embodiment is different from the variation display control process of the first embodiment (FIG. 63) in the content of the variation display start process. That is, in the variation display start processing of the third embodiment, after the advance notice effect setting process is executed in step S3603, the flag deletion process is executed in step S3604a, and then the variation start process is terminated.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the hold information (hereinafter referred to as the first hold information) acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry portion 62a and the game ball enter the second ball. The hold information acquired based on entering the ball portion 62b (hereinafter referred to as the second hold information) is not distinguished in terms of control. Then, there is no superiority or inferiority in the processing order between the processing of the first holding information and the processing of the second holding information (the order of processing on the game control such as the execution of the winning / losing lottery or the game round), and each holding information is processed in the storage order. .. Therefore, even in the situation where the first hold information and the second hold information are stored, if the first hold information is stored earlier than the second hold information is stored, the first hold information is processed first. To. Then, the flag erasing process does not include "the first flag erasing process related to the first hold information and the second flag erasing process related to the second hold information" as in the first embodiment, but "the first hold". "Flag erasing process related to information and second hold information" is provided. Hereinafter, the flag erasing process of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109.

In the flag erasing process of the third embodiment, first, in step S3801a, the work RAM 2
It is determined whether or not the jackpot hold flag is stored in 54. If the jackpot hold flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3805a without executing the processes of steps S3802a to S3804a. When the jackpot hold flag is stored, the hold information of the erase counter area is decremented by 1 so that the value stored in the erase counter area in the erase counter area 323 is decremented in step S3802a. To update.

After that, in step S3803a, it is determined whether or not the value of the erasing counter area is "0". If it is "0", after clearing the jackpot hold flag in step S3804a, the process proceeds to step S3805a, and if it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3805a.
The process proceeds to step S3805a without executing the process of step S3804a.

As described above, the jackpot hold flag is a flag stored when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the hold information held and stored in the hold area RE of the main control device 81. In the erasing counter area, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold area RE, the order in which the hold information is the start target of the game round is specified. Hold information is stored. Furthermore, in the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 104), the process of step S3102a is executed at the timing before the process of step S3103a is executed, so that the hold information stored in the hold area RE is included. If there are multiple pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning
The hold information in the order of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning, which is the start target in the later order, is stored in the erasing counter area. Therefore, when the hold information of the erasing counter area becomes "0" as the initial value, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is not included in the hold information held and stored in the hold area RE. In this case, the jackpot hold flag is cleared.

In the flag erasing process of the third embodiment, in step S3805a, the work RAM 2
It is determined whether or not the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in 54. If the notice condition fulfillment flag is not stored, the main erasing process is terminated as it is. When the notice condition establishment flag is stored, the hold notice counter is decremented by 1 in step S3806a so that the value stored in the hold notice counter area 325 in the hold notice counter area 325 is decremented. Update area hold information.

After that, in step S3807a, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold notice counter area is "0". If it is "0", the notice condition establishment flag is deleted in step S3808a, and the notice initialization process is executed in step S3809a.
In the notice initialization process, when any of the normal jackpot notice flag, the probability change jackpot notice flag, the normal guess notice flag, the probability change guess notice flag, and the reach notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254, the stored flag is set. This is the process of erasing.

Here, the notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored when the hold information stored in the hold area RE is set as a trigger for executing the hold notice, as described above, and is used for the hold notice. In the counter area, when the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice is stored in the hold area RE, the order in which the hold information is the start target of the game round is specified. Hold information is stored. Therefore, when the hold information in the hold notice counter area becomes "0" as the initial value, the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice in the hold area RE has already been the start target of the game round. In this case, the notice condition establishment flag is cleared.

When the process of step S3809a is executed, the process proceeds to the process of step S3810a, and it is determined whether or not the game number started with the value of the hold notice counter area set to "0" is the game number based on the jackpot hold information. That is, in step S3810a, the game times (game results and game times that are the target of the advance notice effect of the game effect) are the jackpot hold information (15R probability variation jackpot result and normal jackpot result as the game result). It is determined whether or not the information is on hold to be displayed).

Then, if a positive determination is made in the process of step S3810a, the flag removal process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in the process of step S3810a,
The process proceeds to step S3811a. That is, if the game times targeted for the advance notice effect are not started based on the jackpot hold information, the process proceeds to step S3811a, and it is determined whether or not the acquired information exists. That is, when the advance notice effect is performed for the predetermined hold information, is the hold information acquired after the predetermined hold information already stored at the time of starting the game round that is the target of the advance notice effect? Judge whether or not.

If a positive determination is made in the process of step S3811a, the process proceeds to step S3812a, and the second advance notice effect execution determination flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 (second advance notice effect execution determination pending information). The second notice effect execution determination flag (second notice effect execution determination information) is stored in the storage means), and the flag erasing process is completed. here,
The second notice effect execution determination flag is hold information for specifying in the MPU 252 whether or not it is a situation to search for the hold information to be the target of the second notice effect from the acquired information. Then, the second notice effect execution determination flag determines that the second notice effect can be executed based on any of the acquired information, or the second notice effect can be executed based on the acquired information. This is pending information that will be deleted if it is determined not to be.

When a positive determination is made in the process of step S3810a and a negative determination is made in the process of step S3811a, the flag erasing process is terminated. Further, step S380.
If it is determined in the process of 7a that the value of the hold notice counter area is not "0", the flag erasing process is terminated without executing step S3810a.

Further, the second advance notice effect execution determination process of the third embodiment is executed based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 110 and 111. However, unlike the first embodiment, the process related to the validity of the reserved information is not performed. That is, "process corresponding to step S3906, step S3907, step S3908, and step S3909 in FIG. 69" is excluded. In addition, "Fig. 70
"Process corresponding to step S3920, step S3922, and step S3927" is excluded. Hereinafter, the second advance notice effect execution determination process of the third embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 110 and 111.

As shown in FIG. 110, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated, step S3901
In c, the second notice effect execution determination flag (second notice effect execution determination) is set in the second notice effect execution determination flag storage area (second notice effect execution determination hold information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Determines whether or not the pending information) is stored. Then, if it is determined in step S3901c that the second advance notice effect execution determination flag is not stored, the second advance notice effect execution determination process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored, step S3902c
It is determined whether or not the second search flag is stored in the second search flag storage area (second search hold information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3902c, step S3 in FIG. 111
When the process proceeds to 916c and a negative determination is made in step S3902c, step S390
It shifts to the process of 3c. In the process of step S3903c, the first search flag is the first search flag storage area (1st search flag storage area 322 provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254.
It is determined whether or not the information is stored in the first search pending information storage means).

Here, the first search flag is the hold information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the MPU 252 is in a situation of searching whether or not the jackpot hold information exists in the acquired information. Then, if it is discovered that the jackpot pending information (described later) exists in the acquired information and the lottery for establishing the advance notice condition is won, or if it is confirmed that the jackpot pending information does not exist in the acquired information, it is deleted. To.

In addition, the second search flag indicates that the lottery for establishing the notice condition is performed in the order of storage based on the acquired information (reach hold information, non-reach hold information) other than the jackpot hold information.
It is pending information for identification in 252. This second search flag is "when there is no valid jackpot acquisition hold information even if the search is performed in the order in which all the acquired information is stored" and "the lottery result for establishing the notice condition for one jackpot hold information included in the acquired information" is displayed. Although it was a failure, it is stored in the second search flag storage area when there is already acquired information stored prior to the jackpot hold information. In addition, if the result of the lottery for establishing the advance notice condition based on the reach hold information (reach support hold command) or the non-reach hold information (non-reach support hold command) in the acquired information is won or lost, it is deleted.

If it is determined in step S3903c that the first search flag is not stored in the first search flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S3904c, the process of storing the first search flag in the first search flag storage area, and the first search counter. The process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit value (Cmax) of (Ci) is performed. Then, when the process of step S3904c is performed, the process proceeds to step S3905c. Further, in step S3903c, if it is determined that the first search flag is stored in the first search flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S3905c without going through step S3904c.

Here, the first search counter is provided in the first search counter area in the search counter area 329, and is a measuring means for specifying the timing for deleting the first search flag when the first search flag is stored. Is. The number of acquired information is set to the upper limit value (Cmax) in the first search counter, and the count value of the first search counter is updated so as to be incremented by 1 each time the acquired information is searched in the storage order. To. Then, when the reserved information stored in the first search counter area after the update reaches the upper limit value (Cmax), that is, the number of acquired information, the first search flag is deleted.

In the process of step S3905c, the count value of the first search counter determines that the acquired information of Ci is the jackpot pending information. This step S3905c is performed based on the count value of the first search counter. That is, it is determined whether or not the first acquired information among the acquired information (however, when the number of acquired information is one, the acquired information) is the jackpot pending information. Here, the acquired information acquired first is "acquired information 1", the acquired information stored after "acquired information 1" is "acquired information 2", and the acquired information stored next to "acquired information 2" is acquired. The information is referred to as "obtained information 3", and the acquired information stored next to "acquired information 3" is referred to as "acquired information 4". Also,
The acquired information stored next to the "acquired information 4" is stored next to the "acquired information 5", and the acquired information stored next to the "acquired information 5" is stored next to the "acquired information 6" and "acquired information 6". The acquired information is referred to as "acquired information 7", and the acquired information stored next to the "acquired information 7" is referred to as "acquired information 8".

Here, also in the third embodiment, if the search for whether or not the jackpot hold information exists in the acquired information (first search) is performed based on the count value of the first search counter, and the jackpot hold information is found. , Step S3906c, and a lottery for establishing the notice condition for the big hit is performed. The process of this step S3906c is the same process as S3201 of FIG. 56 (a). Then, when the process of step S3906c is executed, it is determined in step S3907c whether or not the lottery for satisfying the notice condition for big hit is won. Then, if it is determined that the player has won, the jackpot establishment winning process is executed in step S3908c. This jackpot establishment winning process is the same process as in FIG. 105 described above. However, in step S3215a of the "big hit establishment winning process" executed in step S3908c, as shown in parentheses in FIG. 105, a number indicating the order of occurrence of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target acquired information). Is set in the hold notice counter. Specifically, when the acquired information (big hit hold information) won in the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is the acquired information 7, "7" is set in the advance notice counter. For example, even if the number of acquired information acquired is "7", if the advance notice condition is satisfied lottery for the acquired information (big hit hold information) acquired third (in the order of acquisition), the hold notice counter will display 3 ”is set.

When the jackpot establishment winning process of step S3908c is executed, step S3910c
The process for erasing the second notice effect execution determination flag and the first search flag is performed, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is terminated. In the third embodiment, since the jackpot hold information is prioritized in the acquired information and is the target of the advance notice condition establishment process, the second advance notice effect can be executed with a higher probability than the normal advance notice effect.

If the lottery for satisfying the notice condition for big hit is unsuccessful in step S3907c, the process proceeds to step S3909c. In the process of step S3909c, it is determined whether or not the number of existing pending information is "1". That is, when the number of acquired information is one, if the jackpot hold information is, or if the lottery for satisfying the notice condition for the jackpot hold information is unsuccessful, the second notice effect execution determination process is terminated. The purpose. Then, when the number of existing pending information is "1", the process proceeds to step S3910c, the second notice effect execution determination flag and the first search flag are deleted, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is performed. To finish.

When it is determined in the process of step S3909c that the number of acquired information is larger than one (
If a negative determination is made in step S3909c), the process proceeds to step S3911c, and "C.
It is determined whether or not i ≧ 2 ”. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot hold information corresponding to the numerical value of the first search counter (the jackpot hold information that was lost in the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition) has the second or higher acquisition order. Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3911c, the process proceeds to step S3912c. In step S3912c, a process of deleting the first search flag from the first search flag storage area, a process of storing the second search flag in the second search flag storage area, and an upper limit value of the second search counter (Di) ( After performing the process of setting "Ci-1" as Dmax), the second notice effect execution determination process is temporarily terminated. In this case, the second
In the upper limit value (Dmax) of the search counter (Di), the number of acquisition pending information acquired before the jackpot pending information that is the target of the processing of S3905c this time is set. For example, if the acquired information 6 is the jackpot hold information that is the target of the processing of S3905c this time, the acquired information 1 to 5 are set to the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di). Then, when the process of step S3912c is completed, once the second notice effect execution determination process is completed, the process is completed.
When the second advance notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to S3916c in FIG. 111 through the affirmative determinations in steps S3901c and S3902c. If a negative determination is made in step S3911c (when the acquired information 1 is lost in the second notice lottery), step S
Proceed to 3909e and end the second notice effect execution determination process.

If a negative determination is made in the process of step S3905c, step S3913c
The process proceeds to, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value (Cmax). That is, if the jackpot pending information cannot be found even if the process of step S3905c is repeated for the number of acquired information, an affirmative determination is made in step S3913c. More specifically, when the number of acquired information is "3", the acquired information 1 (Ci = 1) and the acquired information 2 (Ci).
= 2) and the acquired information 3 (Ci = 3), if the jackpot pending information cannot be found even after performing the processing of step S3905c in the order of storage, it is positively determined in step S3913c, and the acquired information 3 is still If the process of step S3905c has not been performed for (Ci = 3), a negative determination is made in step S3913c. Further, when the number of acquired information is "1", if the acquired information 1 (Ci = 1) is negatively determined in the process of step S3905c, it is positively determined in step S3913c at that time.

If it is determined in step S3913c that it is not the upper limit value (Cmax), step S391
Proceed to 4c, increment the count value of the first search counter (Ci) by 1, and once the second
The advance notice effect execution determination process is terminated. In this case, when the second advance notice effect execution determination process is restarted, the process proceeds to step S3905c through the affirmative determination of step S3901c, the negative determination of step S3902c, and the affirmative determination of step S3903c. In this case, S39 first
The acquired information acquired following the acquired information that is the target of the processing of 05c (the acquired information that is the target of determining whether or not it is the jackpot pending information) is the target of the processing of S3905c.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3913c that the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value (Cmax), the process proceeds to step S3915c, the first search flag is deleted from the first search flag storage area, and the first step. 2 After performing the process of storing the search flag in the second search flag storage area and the process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di), the second notice effect is executed. The judgment process ends. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is restarted, the affirmative determination in step S3901c and step S3
After the affirmative determination of 902c, the process proceeds to step S3916c of FIG. 111.

In the processing after step S3916c in FIG. 111, the acquired information other than the jackpot hold information (
For reach hold information or non-reach hold information), a lottery for establishing the advance notice condition is performed in the order in which the acquired information (reach hold information or non-reach hold information) is stored. Specifically, step S
In 3916c, the acquired information indicated by the count value of the second search counter (for example, Di = 1).
That is, for the acquired information 1), a lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition is performed. This notice condition fulfillment lottery is
This is the same process as the process of S3301 in FIG. 56 (b) or the process of S3401 in FIG. 57 (a). Therefore, depending on whether the acquisition hold information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is "reach hold information" or "non-reach hold information", the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is won in step S3923. The probability of becoming is different.

The second search counter is provided in the second search counter area in the search counter area 329, and is a measuring means for specifying the timing of deleting the second search flag when the second search flag is stored. is there. Step S39 is added to the second search counter.
An upper limit value is set in 12c or step S3915c, and the count value of the second search counter is updated so as to be incremented by 1 each time the acquired information is searched in the storage order. Then, the information stored in the second search counter area after the update is erased from the upper limit value (Dmax), that is, the upper limit value (Dmax) set in the processing of S3912c or S3915c and the second search flag.

When the advance notice condition establishment lottery is performed at step 3916c, the process proceeds to step S3917c, and it is determined whether or not the result of the advance notice condition establishment lottery is winning. And when it is judged that it is a winner,
In step S3918c, the advance notice condition establishment process is executed. Specifically, when the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is "reach hold information",
The same "reach notice condition establishment process" as in FIG. 106 is executed, and the acquisition pending information is ".
In the case of "non-reach pending information", the same "non-reach notice condition establishment process" as in FIG. 107 described above is executed. However, in step S3318a of the "reach establishment winning process" executed in step S3918c, a number indicating the acquisition order of the winning information (the number of acquired information) is set in the hold notice counter. Further, also in step S3413a of the "non-reach establishment winning process" executed in step S3918c, a number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of acquired information) is set in the hold notice counter. .. Specifically, when the number of acquired information won in the lottery for satisfying the notice condition is "5", "5" is set in the hold notice counter). For example, even if the number of acquired information is "7"
If you win the lottery for establishing the notice condition for the acquired information acquired second (in the order of acquisition),
"2" is set in the hold notice counter.

When the notice condition establishment process is executed in step S3918c, step S3921c
After clearing the second advance notice effect execution determination flag and the second search flag, the advance notice effect execution determination process ends.

If it is determined in step S3917c that the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition has been lost, step S3
Proceed to 919c. That is, the acquired information indicated by the count value of the second search counter (for example, Di).
= 1, that is, when it is determined that the result of the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition for the acquired information 1) is determined to be a failure, the process proceeds to step S3919c.

In step S3919c, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value (Dmax). Here, the process of step S3919c is S3912c or S3.
This is a process in which the lottery for satisfying the notice condition in step S3917c is performed for the upper limit number of times (Dmax) set in the process of 915c, and if the prize cannot be won, the second notice effect execution determination process is terminated. Specifically, when the number of acquired information is "3", the acquired information 1 (Di = 1), the acquired information 2 (Di = 2), and the acquired information 3 (Di = 3) are stepped in the order of their storage. S3
If an affirmative judgment is not made in the process of step S3917b even after the processing of 916c or later is performed, the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value (Dma) in the process of step S3919c.
It is determined that x). Further, still, regarding the acquired information 3 (Di = 3), step S391
If the processing after 6c has not been performed, a negative determination is made in step S3919c.

If the upper limit value (Dmax) has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S3920c, the count value of the second search counter (Di) is incremented by 1, and then the second advance notice effect execution determination process is temporarily terminated. In this case, when the second advance notice effect execution determination process is restarted, the affirmative determination in step S3901c and the affirmative determination in step S3902c are performed before step S391.
It shifts to the process after 6c.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3919c that the count value of the second search counter has reached the upper limit value (Dmax), the process proceeds to step S3921c, and the second notice effect execution determination flag and the second search flag are deleted. After that, the advance notice effect execution determination process is terminated. In addition, S39
The processing after 16c may be performed separately for the reach hold information and the non-reach hold information. That is, until the count value of the second search counter reaches the upper limit value (Dmax), the lottery for satisfying the notice condition for the reach hold information is performed, and when all the lottery is lost, the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value ( Until Dmax) is reached, a lottery may be held to establish the notice condition for the non-reach pending information.

In the third embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, step S380 in FIG. 109
Even when the advance notice initialization process of 9a is performed, the process of step S3908c of FIG. 110 or the process of step S3818c of FIG. 111 is performed based on the acquired information (holding information acquired after deciding to execute the completed advance notice effect). This is done, and the advance notice condition fulfillment flag may be stored in the work RAM 254 again. In this case, in the flag erasing process of FIG. 109, an affirmative determination is obtained in the process of S3805a, and the process proceeds to the processes of S3806a and subsequent steps. At this time, since the number of target acquired information (the total number of the target acquired information and the number of previously acquired information) is set in the advance notice counter, processing such as S3806a and S3807a is performed, and the above-mentioned FIG. 7
The second notice effect is executed based on 2 and FIG. 73 and the like. Further, in the third embodiment, if an affirmative determination is made in the process of S3811a at the end of the second notice effect, the second notice effect may be executed again.

According to the third embodiment, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment.
That is, in a pachinko machine (for example, referred to as 8 chances) in which the hold information tends to be "8", as described above, "when performing the look-ahead effect on the look-ahead hold information sent from the main control, the pre-reading zone is won. , In this state, if you execute the process of not letting another look-ahead zone win, the following problems may occur. That is, in this type of pachinko machine, when the result is displayed as a deviation due to the variable display that is the target of the notice effect, a lottery is performed for the pending information until a maximum of 7 acquired information is processed. However, there will be a non-lottery period for 7 pending information (a period during which the lottery for whether or not the notice can be given cannot be performed).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in order to determine whether or not the second notice effect can be executed when the result is displayed as a deviation due to the variable display that is the target of the notice effect, there is no lottery period (notice). It is possible to prevent the period during which the lottery is not possible.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of the third embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment other than the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(1) As described above, it is effective to apply the aspect of the second embodiment to the third embodiment. That is, in the example of FIG. 90 (c), the acquired information 1 is the reserved information (the fourth rank reserved information) that displays the result of the deviation after the normal reach. Further, the acquired information 2, the acquired information 4, the acquired information 5, and the acquired information 7 are reserved information (held information of the fifth rank) for displaying the deviation result without going through the reach. Then, the acquired information 3 is the reserved information (third rank reserved information) that displays the result of the loss after the super reach, and the acquired information 6 is the reserved information (second rank reserved information) that normally indicates a big hit. .. Then, in the third embodiment, the number of acquired information tends to be larger than that in the second embodiment, but according to the configuration of the second embodiment (the configuration for specifying the acquisition order of the jackpot pending information at the time of acquisition), the acquired information It is possible to find out the pending information that gives priority to the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition without searching sequentially. That is, by giving priority to the acquired information 6 for which the Cp value is specified in the lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition, it is possible to efficiently determine whether or not the second advance notice effect can be executed.

(2) Further, the above-described modification 5 (FIG. 81) can be applied to the third embodiment. That is, also in the third embodiment, the existence or nonexistence of the acquired information is confirmed when starting the game times that are the targets of the advance notice effect, and the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored when the game times are out of order and the result is displayed. The embodiment to be used is illustrated. However, as shown in the modified example 5 of FIG. 81, the existence or nonexistence of the acquired information may be confirmed when the game times that are the targets of the advance notice effect are completed. In addition, it is decided to confirm the existence of acquired information while the game times that are the target of the advance notice effect are in progress (during variable display), or just before the end of the game times that are the target of the advance notice effect (for example, 1 second before). In addition, it may be decided to confirm the existence or nonexistence of the acquired information. In these cases, since the time to confirm the existence of the acquired information is delayed, there is a high possibility that the number of acquired information can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to obtain high-ranked acquired information and to obtain an opportunity for a lottery for satisfying the advance notice condition.

(3) Also in the third embodiment, if the display result of the game times targeted by the advance notice effect is off (including the 2R probability variation jackpot) and the acquired information exists, the second advance notice effect execution determination process is performed. An embodiment of performing many times was illustrated. Therefore, if the display result of the game times targeted by the second notice effect is different and the acquired information exists, the second notice effect execution determination process is performed again. That is, when the advance notice effect is terminated, if an affirmative decision is made in the process of S3811a of FIG. 109, the second advance notice effect may be executed again. However, the number of executions of the second notice effect may be limited. For example, when the display result of the game times targeted by the advance notice effect is off (including the 2R probability variation jackpot), the second advance notice effect execution determination process may be performed only once or only twice. It may be that. For example, in the case of performing only once, if the first second notice effect execution determination process is performed after the normal notice (first suggestion effect), it is prohibited to perform the second notice effect execution determination process again. Set the flag to be. Then, when the normal notice (first suggestion effect) is given again, the flag may be deleted.

(4) In the third actual form, the first ball is a game time based on the game ball entering the first ball 62a and the game time based on the ball entering the second ball 62b. Part 62a or second ball entry part 62
Although the embodiment in which the ball enters b is illustrated, the game times based on the game ball entering the first ball entry 62a and the game times based on the game ball entering the second ball entry 62b are performed in parallel. It may be carried out by the above. For example, the display screen G has an area for displaying the game times based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit 62a and an area for displaying the game times based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit 62b. Provided, the first
It is possible to display in parallel the game times based on the ball entering the ball entry unit 62a and the game times based on the ball entering the second ball entry unit 62b.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. This fourth embodiment is the above-mentioned first embodiment.
It corresponds to a modified example of the embodiment, and is the same as the first embodiment except for the following points.
Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the points different from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the points common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), the execution time of the elimination operation is changed according to the degree of achievement of the elimination operation of the return sphere. That is, if the predetermined elimination operation is performed for a predetermined time, but the elimination operation of the return sphere is insufficient, the execution time of the next elimination operation may be longer than the predetermined time. Hereinafter, the features of the fourth embodiment will be described.

In the fourth embodiment, (a) the return ball elimination process is performed based on FIG. 112 (a), and (b) the return ball elimination process (S508) and the game ball launch control process (b) in the normal process (FIG. 26). S5
The time measurement process after the end of FIG. 112 (b) is added between 09), which is different from the first embodiment, but the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment. Further, in the return ball elimination process of the fourth embodiment, the process of S1603A is performed instead of the process of S1603, and S16.
The process of S1606A is performed instead of the process of 06, which is different from the return ball elimination process of the first embodiment, but the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment.

Here, also in the process of S1603A, a process of setting the elimination operation execution flag, a process of starting the elimination operation, a process of erasing the return ball flag, and a process of setting the elimination operation end timer te are executed. However, in the fourth embodiment, the value set in the resolution operation end timer te differs depending on whether the degree of achievement of the resolution operation is sufficient or insufficient.

Specifically, when the value of the time measurement timer after the end is "0", "450 (1.8 seconds)" is set in the elimination operation end timer te, and the value of the time measurement timer after the end is ". If it is a "positive number", "600 (2.4 seconds)" is set in the elimination operation end timer te. Here, the post-end time measurement timer ts is a timer that measures the elapsed time since the previous return ball elimination operation was performed, and an upper limit value (initial) value is set in the processing of S1606A. That is, S1606A
In the process of, in addition to the process of terminating the elimination operation and the process of erasing the elimination operation execution flag, a process of setting "300 (1.2 seconds)" in the post-end time measurement timer ts is performed.

As shown in FIG. 112B, when the post-end time measurement process of the fourth embodiment is activated, it is determined in step S1650 whether or not the value of the post-end time measurement timer ts is “0”. Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1650, the time measurement process after the end of the fourth embodiment ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1650, the process proceeds to step S1651, the post-end time measurement timer ts is subtracted by "1", and the post-end time measurement process of the fourth embodiment is temporarily terminated. Here, the post-end time measurement process is a part of the normal process (FIG. 26), and 4
It is executed in msec cycles. Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S1650,
The value of the time measurement timer ts after the end is decremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle).

In this fourth embodiment, after "1.2 seconds" have elapsed since the previous elimination operation was performed, the value of the time measurement timer ts after the end becomes "0", and before "1.2 seconds" elapses, The value of the time measurement timer ts after the end becomes a "positive value". Then, after performing the previous return ball elimination operation, "1.2
After "seconds" have elapsed, it is determined that the degree of achievement of the previous resolution operation was sufficient, so that a normal value ("450 (1.8 seconds)") is set in the resolution operation end timer te.

On the other hand, when the value of the time measurement timer ts after the end is a "positive value", that is, "1.2 seconds".
If the return ball is detected before the elapse of, it is determined that the degree of achievement of the previous resolution operation may have been insufficient. For example, it is determined that the game ball (return ball) remaining on the launch rail 74 is detected (see FIG. 37) even after the previous elimination operation is performed.
A value larger than the normal value (“600 (2.4 seconds)”) is set in the elimination operation end timer te.

According to the fourth embodiment, when the return ball is detected after a sufficient time has passed since the previous resolution operation was performed, the degree of achievement of the previous resolution operation is sufficient (the return ball on the launch rail 74). It is determined that the resolution has been resolved), and the execution time of the resolution operation this time is set to the normal time. On the other hand, if a return ball is generated within a short period of time after the previous return ball elimination operation is performed, the degree of achievement of the previous elimination operation may be insufficient (the return ball on the launch rail 74 has not been eliminated). It is determined that there is a possibility, and the execution time of this resolution operation is set long.

In the fourth embodiment, even if the execution time of the current resolution operation is set to be long, if the return ball is detected after a sufficient time has passed since the current resolution operation was performed, the next resolution operation is performed. Execution time is set to normal time. However, even if the execution time of the current resolution operation is set to be long and the return ball is detected after a sufficient time has passed since the current resolution operation was performed, the execution time of the next resolution operation is lengthened. You may do it.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, if the achievement level is insufficient even if the execution time of the elimination operation is set long as shown in FIG. 113A, the execution time of the elimination operation is further increased. It may be set longer (hereinafter referred to as an application example). That is, in the application example, when the return ball is detected within a short period of time (immediately) after the previous resolution operation is performed, the execution time of the current resolution operation is set long (set to 2.4 seconds). However, if the return ball is detected within a short period of time (immediately) after the current resolution operation is performed, the execution time of the next resolution operation is set longer (set to 3.0 seconds). Similarly, when the return ball is detected (immediately) within a short period of time after the next resolution operation is performed, the execution time of the resolution operation following the "next resolution operation" is set to be longer (3.6). It may be set to seconds). That is, the execution time of the elimination operation may be set long until the degree of achievement is sufficient. In this case, after the degree of achievement of the resolving operation is sufficient, the execution time of the resolving operation following the resolving operation may be returned to the normal time, or the "resolving operation with a sufficient degree of achievement" may be returned to the normal time. Execution time"
You can leave it as it is.

Further, in step S1606A of FIG. 112 (a), the time (period) set in the time measurement timer ts after the end may be set to a long time (long term) such as 10 hours, 20 hours, 1 week, 1 month, 1 year, etc. Good. In this case, when the processing of S1603A is performed, the time measurement timer t after the end is completed.
When s is "0", it is determined that the frequency of occurrence of the return sphere is the first frequency (low frequency), and the execution time of the elimination operation is set to the first predetermined time. On the other hand, when the post-end time measurement timer ts is a "positive number", it is determined that the frequency of occurrence of the return sphere is higher than the first frequency (high frequency), and the execution time of the elimination operation is set to the first. It may be set to a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time.

In step S1603A of FIG. 112 (a), when the post-end time measurement timer ts is close to the "upper limit value set in step S1606A" such as "299" and "298", the elimination operation is executed. The time will be substantially extended. In other words, even if the planned "end time of the elimination operation (1.8 seconds)" is reached, if the return ball is detected, the "end time of the elimination operation" is substantially extended (the end time of the elimination operation). It will be extended by 2.4 seconds). Also,
Regardless of the "achievement level of the resolution operation", the execution time of the resolution operation executed next can be made longer or shorter than the execution time of the resolution operation executed first. Further, the elimination operation having a long execution time and the elimination operation having a short execution time may be alternately performed.

According to the fourth embodiment, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment.
That is, in the fourth embodiment, since the execution time of the elimination operation is changed according to the degree of achievement of the elimination operation of the return sphere, the return sphere can be achieved more reliably.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of the fourth embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment other than the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(1) In the first embodiment, the presence or absence of the return ball is detected by the length of the detection interval of the game ball (whether or not it is shorter than the firing cycle). As shown, the ball speed of the game ball passing through the launch rail 74 (the time when the passage detection sensor 74b of the launch rail 74 detects the passage of the game ball, that is, the time when the game ball passes through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b). The presence or absence of a return ball may be detected based on. The return ball detection process of the modified example 11 shows another specific example of the return ball detection process in step S507 of the normal process.

The return ball detection process of the modification 11 is based on the time when the passage detection sensor 74b of the launch rail 74 detects the passage of the game ball (the time when the game ball passes through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b). It detects the presence or absence of occurrence. That is, the launching device 7 from the launching position 74W.
The striking force generated by the striking portion 75b is directly applied to the game ball (hereinafter referred to as a normal launching ball) launched by 5. On the other hand, the return ball that runs backward on the launch rail 74 is the striking portion 7.
Instead of the striking force generated by 5b, the gravity applied to the return ball is used to reverse the launch rail 74.
Therefore, the ball speed (w2) at which the return ball runs backward on the launch rail 74 is slower than the ball speed (w1) at which the normal launch ball passes through the launch rail 74 (detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b). Then, in the modification 11, the passage detection sensor 74b detects the game ball based on the length of time.
The presence or absence of a return ball is detected.

Note that, unlike the first embodiment, the launch rail 74 is installed on a steep slope (for example, a tilt angle;
When a large number of return balls are generated and a game ball at the launch position 74W is launched together with a large number of return balls, the large number of return balls reciprocate within the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b, or If the ball is stopped within the detection range, the time for the passage detection sensor 74b to detect the game ball becomes even longer. Further, the speed at which the return ball passes through the passage detection sensor 74b (detection means) is slower than that of the normal game ball (the game ball launched by the launcher 74 when the return ball does not exist on the launch rail). Is common.

However, depending on the condition of the launch rail (existence of another return ball on the launch rail, etc.), the speed of passing through the passage detection sensor 74b (detection means) may be faster for the return ball than for the normal game ball. There is also. However, the speed of passing through the passage detection sensor 74b (detection means) is the normal speed (
When there is no return ball on the launch rail and there is at least one game ball that is slower than the speed at which the game ball launched by the launcher 74 passes through the passage detection sensor 74b), a return ball has occurred. Can be recognized.

In the return ball detection process shown in FIG. 113 (b), in step S1511, it is determined whether or not the passage detection sensor 74b has detected the game ball. Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1512, and various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 are executed.
The detection time counter TC3 provided in the above is added by "1", and the return ball detection process is temporarily terminated. Here, the return ball detection process is a part of the normal process (FIG. 26) and is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Therefore, when the passage detection sensor 74b detects the game ball, the count value set in the detection time counter TC3 is 1 in a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle).
It is incremented. That is, the detection time counter TC3 is the passage detection sensor 74.
It is a counter that determines the time for detection by b (the period during which detection is continued).

If a negative determination is made in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1513, and it is determined whether or not the value of the detection time counter TC3 is "3" or more. Then, step S1513
When a negative determination is made in, it is determined that the detection time by the passage detection sensor 74b is short and the return ball is not detected. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1515, it is determined whether or not the value of the detection time counter TC3 is "0", and the value of the detection time counter TC3 is "0".
If it is determined, the return ball detection process is terminated as it is. Further, step S151
If a negative determination is made in the process of 5, the process proceeds to the process of step S1516, the value of the detection time counter TC3 is set to "0", and then the return ball detection process is terminated.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, it is determined that the detection time by the passage detection sensor 74b is long and the return ball is detected. Therefore, if the process proceeds to step S1514 and the return ball flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1515. Then, step S15
In step S1515 after passing through 14, since a negative determination is uniformly made, the process proceeds to step S1516, the value of the detection time counter TC3 is set to "0", and then the return ball detection process is terminated. Here, the return ball flag of the modified example 11 is also a flag indicating that a return ball is generated. In the modified example 11, when the count value of the detection time counter TC3 is "3" or more, the mode in which the return ball is determined to exist is illustrated, but the value of the detection time counter TC3 which is the reference of the determination is illustrated. That is, the ball speed of the game ball when it is determined that the return ball exists is not limited to that shown in the modified example 11, and various selections are made according to the angle of the launch rail 74 to be used, the type of the launch device 75 to be used, and the like. it can.

(2) In the first embodiment and the modified example 11, a mode in which the presence or absence of the generation of the return sphere is determined by one passage detection sensor 74b is illustrated, but as in the modified example 12 shown in FIG. It is also possible to exemplify an embodiment in which the presence or absence of the occurrence of a return sphere is determined by using the passage detection sensors 74x and 74y. In this modification 12, the first passage detection sensor 7 is in the middle of the launch rail 74.
4x and the second passage detection sensor 74y are arranged. Of these, the first passage detection sensor 74
x is a sensor arranged at a position close to the launch position 74W, and the second passage detection sensor 74y is a sensor arranged at a position farther from the launch position 74W than the first passage detection sensor 74x. The structures of the passage detection sensors 74x and 74y are the same as those of the passage detection sensor 74b of the first embodiment.

The game ball launched from the launch position 74W passes through the detection hole (through hole) of the first passage detection sensor 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y in this order. Then, the game ball is the first passage detection sensor 7
The presence or absence of a return ball is determined based on measuring the time from passing through 4x to passing through the second passage detection sensor 74y (counting the count value of the counter TC4). Also,
The presence or absence of a return ball can be determined by the order of the passage detection sensors 74x and 74y that detect a predetermined game ball. Specifically, the order of detecting a predetermined game ball is the second passage detection sensor 74.
In the order of y and the first passage detection sensor 74x, it can be determined that the game ball has run backward on the launch rail 74 (determination that a return ball has been generated).

Hereinafter, the return ball detection process of the modified example 12 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 114 (b). Here, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 114 (b), "first detection"
Means that the first passage detection sensor 74x has detected the game ball (when the game ball is detected), and the "first detection flag" means that the first passage detection sensor 74x has detected the game ball. It is a flag to indicate. Further, the "second detection" indicates that the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected the game ball (at the time of detecting the game ball), and the "second detection flag" is the second passage detection sensor 7.
This is a flag indicating that 4y has detected a game ball.

In the return ball detection process of the modified example 12, in step S1521, the first pass detection sensor 74
It is determined whether or not x has detected the game ball (whether or not it is when the first passage detection sensor 74x detects the game ball). Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1521, after setting the first detection flag, the return ball detection process is temporarily terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1521, the process proceeds to step S1523 and the first step is performed.
Determine if the detection flag is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1523, the process proceeds to step S1524, and various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204
The detection interval counter TC4 provided on the Whether or not) is determined. Here, the return ball detection process is a normal process (FIG. 26).
), And is executed in a cycle of 4 msec. Therefore, the count value set in the detection interval counter TC4 is incremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle).
The detection interval counter TC4 is a counter that determines the time from when the first pass detection sensor 74x detects the game ball to when the second pass detection sensor 74y detects the game ball.

If a negative determination is made in step S1525, the return ball detection process is temporarily terminated.
That is, when the game ball is detected by the first pass detection sensor 74x but the second pass detection sensor 74y does not detect the game ball (the game ball is the first pass detection sensor 74x and the second pass detection sensor 74y). (When passing between), the return ball detection process is temporarily terminated.

On the other hand, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S1525 (when the second passage detection sensor 74y detects the game ball), the process proceeds to step S1526, and the "value of the detection interval counter TC4" is ".
It is determined whether or not it is within the permissible range. For example, the game ball at the launch position 74 is the launch device 74.
When the ball is launched in a normal state (when the ball is launched in a state where the return ball does not exist on the launch rail 74), the game ball passes between the first passage detection sensor 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y. Time is "0.1 seconds (the value of the detection interval counter TC4 is 25)". In this case, the "time" is "0.92 seconds (TC4 = 23) to 0.108 seconds (TC4 =).
If it is within the range of "27)", it is regarded as "within the allowable range". On the other hand, if the "time" is less than "0.92 seconds" or exceeds "0.108 seconds", it is regarded as "out of allowable range". In addition, it should be noted.
The "allowable range" of the "time" is not limited to the range shown in the modified example 12, and the installation state of the target pachinko machine, the rattling of the launch position 74, the angle of the launch rail 74 to be used, and the launch device 75 to be used. Various selections can be made according to the type and the like.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1526, the process proceeds to step S1528, a process of erasing the "first detection flag" and a process of setting the value of the detection interval counter TC4 to "0" are performed, and the return ball detection process is completed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1526, step S15
Proceed to the process of 27, and set the return ball flag. Then, the process of step S1528 is performed to end the return ball detection process.

If it is determined in step S1523 that the first detection flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1530, and whether or not the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected the game ball (whether or not the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected the game ball).
Whether or not the game ball is detected by the second passage detection sensor 74y) is determined. Then, if a negative determination is made in step S1530, the return ball detection process is terminated. On the contrary,
If an affirmative determination is made in step S1530, the process proceeds to step S1531 to set the return ball flag, and the return ball detection process ends. Here, when the negative determination in step S1523 is followed and the affirmative determination is made in step S1530, the predetermined game ball is detected in the order of the second passage detection sensor 74y and the first passage detection sensor 74x (that is,). , The game ball ran backwards on the launch rail 74). That is, if the negative determination in step S1523 is followed and the affirmative determination is made in step S1530, the process proceeds to step S1531 and the return ball flag is set.

According to the above modification 12, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment. That is, in order to arrange the two passage detection sensors 74x and 74y on the launch rail 74, the "detection interval of the game ball between the first passage detection sensor 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y" and "
It is possible to recognize the occurrence of the return ball by determining which of the first pass detection sensor 74x and the second pass detection sensor 74y, which pass detection sensor 74x or 74y has detected the game ball first. It's easy. In particular, according to the modified example 12, the presence or absence of the return ball can be reliably recognized by considering the order in which the first pass detection sensor 74x and the second pass detection sensor 74y detect the game ball.

Further, as shown in the modification 13 of FIG. 115 showing still another modification of the first embodiment, only when the game ball is detected in the order of the second passage detection sensor 74y and the first passage detection sensor 74x. , It may be determined that it is a return ball. In this modification 13, the arrangement interval between the first passage detection sensor 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y may be the same as that of the above-mentioned modification 12. That is, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), a certain distance is provided between the first pass detection sensor 74x and the second pass detection sensor 74y, and the “game ball detection range” in the first pass detection sensor 74x is defined. , The "detection range of the game ball" in the second passage detection sensor 74y may be separated. However, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), the two passage detection sensors 74x and 74y may be arranged close to each other in the middle of the launch rail 74. As shown in FIG. 115 (a), when the detection ranges of the passage detection sensors 74x and 74y are close to each other (for example, assuming a distance of 2 mm to 10 mm), the game ball launched from the launch position 74 has no momentum. However, when the game ball passes through the detection range of the first pass detection sensor 74x, it reaches the detection range of the second pass detection sensor 74y. Further, when the game ball traveling in the reverse direction on the launch rail 74 passes through the detection range of the second pass detection sensor 74y, it reaches the detection range of the first pass detection sensor 74x. Therefore, the return ball can be detected more reliably regardless of the ball force of the return ball. In particular, when the first passage detection sensor 74x is arranged at a position close to the launch position 74 (arranged at a distance of one or two game balls), "ball jam" is caused on the launch rail 74. Even if it occurs and is fired
This is effective when a large number of game balls reciprocate in the vicinity of the launch position 74 (when a large number of game balls hardly move).

In the modified example 13, the return ball detection process is performed based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 115 (b). That is, in the modified example 13, in the return ball detection process, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1521, the return ball detection process is temporarily terminated after setting the first detection flag. On the other hand, step S1
If a negative determination is made in 521, the process proceeds to step S1523, and it is determined whether or not the first detection flag is set. Then, if the affirmative judgment is made in step S1523, the process proceeds to step S1524B, and it is determined whether or not the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected the game ball. Then, when a negative determination is made in step S1524B, the return ball detection process is temporarily terminated. On the other hand, when a positive judgment is made in step S1524B, step S1525
Proceed to the process of B, the process of erasing the "first detection flag" is performed, and the return ball detection process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1523, the process proceeds to step S1526B, and whether or not the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected the game ball (whether or not the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected the game ball). Whether or not) is determined. Then, if a negative determination is made in step S1526B, the return ball detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1526B, the process proceeds to step S1527B to set the return ball flag.
The return ball detection process is terminated.

According to the above modification 13, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment. That is, since the two passage detection sensors 74x and 74y are arranged on the launch rail 74, the first
By determining which of the passage detection sensor 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected the game ball first, the occurrence of the return ball can be easily recognized.

(2) In the first embodiment, when the output state of the launch permission signal is the HI level, the elimination operation execution flag is set at the predetermined timing ty3, but the ball feeding device is at the timing tv1 before the timing ty3. It was decided to perform the firing operation when one game ball was sent out on the firing rail 74 by 76, but as shown in the modified example 14 (modified example of the first embodiment) shown in FIG. 45 (b). , It may be possible to prohibit (do not perform) the firing operation after setting the resolution operation execution flag.

This modification 14 is also the same in that the value of the firing cycle counter is cleared to "0" in step S5003 of the firing control process of FIG. 42. However, in step S5003, when the cancellation operation execution flag is set and the output state of the launch permission signal reaches the LOW level, it is determined whether or not the ball has been fed. Then, in step S5003,
When it is determined that the ball has been fed, the ball-fed state is released. In this way, when the output state of the launch permission signal reaches the LOW level based on the elimination operation execution flag being set, if the ball-fed state is reached, the ball-fed state is released. Then, the launching device 75 does not perform the firing operation after the elimination operation execution flag is set.

Further, in the modified example 14, the firing control process may be executed based on FIG. 116. Here, in the launch control process of FIG. 52, the process of step S5003A is performed instead of step S5003, the process of step S5004A is performed instead of step S5004, and the process of step S5008A is performed instead of step S5008. Point and step S5009
The difference is that the process of step S5009A is performed instead of step S5009A, the process of step S5010A is performed instead of step S5010, and the process of step S5010 is omitted, but the other points are the launch control process of FIG. 42. Is similar to.

Also in the launch control process of FIG. 116, first, in step S5001, the main control device 81
Determines whether or not the launch permission signal output to the power supply / launch control device 98 (launch permission reception circuit 98e) is at the HI level. When the launch permission signal is at the HI level, the value of the launch cycle counter (not shown) provided in the power supply / launch control device 98 is added by 1 in step S5002.

When the firing permission signal is at the LOW level, the value of the firing cycle counter is cleared to "0" in step S5003A. However, when the resolution operation execution flag is set and the output state of the launch permission signal reaches the LOW level, whether or not the value of the launch counter (CTS) is positive (
Whether or not the ball has been fed) is determined, and if the value of the firing counter (CTS) is positive, a process of setting the value of the firing counter (CTS) to "0" is performed. As a result, when the value of the launch counter (CTS) is positive (the ball has been fed) and the resolution operation execution flag is set, the launch device 75 may perform the launch operation after setting the resolution operation execution flag. Absent. The game ball in the ball-fed state is removed from the lower end portion of the launch rail 74 when the return ball elimination operation is executed. Here, the firing counter (CTS) is configured using a subtraction type counter.
It is provided in the power supply / launch control device 98. Then, the launch rail 7 by the ball feeding device 76
4 When the supply of one game ball to the top is completed, the upper limit value is set and the counter value is "0".
Then, the game ball on the launch rail 74 is launched.

When the process of step S5002 or the process of step S5003A is executed,
The process proceeds to step S5004A. The process of this step S5004A is the firing counter (CT).
It is determined whether or not the value of S) is positive (whether or not the ball has been fed). Then, when the firing counter (CTS) is "0" (when the ball is not in the fed state), step S5
At 005, it is determined whether or not the value of the firing cycle counter is "150", and if the value of the firing cycle counter is not "150", the firing control process is temporarily terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the firing cycle counter is "150", step S500
6. When the process of step S5008A is performed after the process of step S5007 is executed, the launch control process is temporarily terminated. Here, in step S5008A processing, the firing counter (
Set the upper limit value "50" to the value of CTS).

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S5004A, the value of the firing counter (CTS) is subtracted by 1 in step S5009A. In the following step S5010A, it is determined whether or not the value of the firing counter (CTS) is "0". The count value of the firing counter (CTS) is incremented by 1 in a 4 msec cycle (the same cycle as in normal processing).
When the value of the launch counter (CTS) is "0", it means that 0.2 sec has elapsed after the game ball was supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 74.

If the value of the firing counter (CTS) is not "0", the firing control process is temporarily terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the firing counter (CTS) is "0",
Proceeding to step S5011, the power supply / launch control device 98 sets the variable resistor 8 of the launch handle 8A.
Based on the signal received from 8, the firing intensity according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 8A is grasped. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S5012, and a driving signal for firing according to the firing intensity grasped in step S5011 is output to the launching device 75.

As a result, the game ball supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 74 is the launch handle 8A.
It is fired with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the When the value of the firing counter (CTS) becomes "0", the ball-fed state is released. Further, in the launch control process of FIG. 52, a modified example in which the process of step S5003 of the launch control process of FIG. 42 is performed instead of the process of step S5003A can be exemplified.

(3) Further, in the first embodiment, the detection signals from the touch sensor 87 and the stop switch 89 are input to the main control device 81 via the power supply / emission control device 98, and the main control device 81 receives these signals. Based on this, it was configured to set whether or not to launch, and to input a signal (launch permission signal) to that effect to the power supply / launch control device 98. However, unlike the first embodiment, the detection signals from the touch sensor 87 and the stop switch 89 pass through the power supply / emission control device 98 to a control device (for example, the payout control device 97) different from the main control device 81. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the different control devices are input, set whether or not to launch based on these signals, and input a signal to that effect to the power supply / launch control device 98. Further, in the configuration in which the power supply / emission control device 98 is provided with the MPU, the processing of S5008 in FIG. 42 is performed by storing (setting) a flag indicating the setting of the sent state in the “RAM provided in the MPU”. By erasing the flag from the "RAM provided in the MPU", the process of S5013 in FIG. 42 can be performed. In this case, the process of S5004 can be executed by the MPU determining the state of the flag (whether it is stored or erased). Further, in the modified example 14,
When the resolution operation execution flag is set and the output status of the launch permission signal reaches the LOW level,
By erasing the flag, the process of S5003A in FIG. 48 may be performed.

(4) In the first embodiment, when the return ball flag is set, the mode in which the elimination operation execution flag is set is illustrated, but as in the modified example 10 (modified example of the first embodiment) shown in FIG. 117 and the like. , When the return ball flag is set, it may be set as "stop ball feed (stop ball feed operation and perform launch operation) prior to elimination operation".

As will be described later, in the modified example 15, when the return ball is generated in the state where the return ball is not generated for a predetermined time (for example, 3.0 seconds) or more, the first return ball flag is set and the ball feed stop flag is set. Will be done. That is, if a return ball is generated without producing a return ball for a while, the first return ball flag is set and the ball feed stop flag is set. In the modified example 15, the "predetermined time"
However, the "predetermined time" does not necessarily have to be "3.0 seconds", for example, "6.0 seconds", "12.0 seconds", and "1 hour". , "1 day", "1 week",
It may be another time (period) such as "January". Further, the "predetermined time" is set at the time of designing or manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, and at the stage when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the pachinko hall, the predetermined time (period) is set to one time. You may. Alternatively, at the stage when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped from the manufacturer, a plurality of candidates for the "predetermined time (predetermined period)" are determined, and after the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the pachinko hall, a predetermined selection means is operated. By doing so, one time (period) may be selected from a plurality of "predetermined times (predetermined period)". This selection means may be one that can be operated by the player, or one that cannot be operated by the player (a selection that can be operated by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 or a clerk of the pachinko hall and cannot be operated by the player. Means).

Then, in the modified example 15, if the return ball is generated before the "predetermined time (for example, 3.0 seconds)" elapses after the first return ball flag is set, the second return ball flag is set. , The resolution operation execution flag is set. In addition, after the ball feed stop flag is cleared, the "predetermined time (predetermined time)
For example, if a return ball is generated after "3.0 seconds)" or more, it is determined that "the return ball has not been generated for a while", the first return ball flag is set again, and the ball feed stop flag is set. Set.

Next, the features of the modified example 15 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 117. This timing chart shows the relationship between the ball feed stop flag, the cancellation operation execution flag, the launch permission signal, the ball feed operation performed by the ball feed device 76, and the launch operation performed by the launch device 75.

FIG. 117 shows a case where the condition satisfaction signal input from the power supply / firing control device 98 to the main control device 81 is at the HI level, and the resolution operation execution flag is cleared (the main control device 81 fires). In the case where the output state of the permission signal is set to the HI level), a return ball is generated, and the ball feed stop flag is set at the timing of tw1. In this case, the launch permission signal is maintained at the HI level even after the timing of tw1 has elapsed, and the launch operation performed by the launch device 75 can be performed. However, when the ball feed stop flag is set, the ball feed operation performed by the ball feed device 76 is not performed.

Launch rail 74 while the ball feed stop flag is set (eg, 3 launch cycles)
No new game balls will be sent out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a new game ball is sent out to the launch rail 74 even though a return ball has already been generated on the launch rail 74.
Moreover, since the launching device 75 performs the firing operation while the ball feed stop flag is set, if the game ball remains on the launch rail 74 when the ball feed stop flag is set, this remains. It is possible to launch the game ball along the launch rail 74. In this case, the remaining game balls reach the gap portion 7D (foul ball recovery port) from the upper end of the launch rail 74, and the interval portion 7
There is a possibility that it will fall from D and be discharged to the lower plate 72 through the foul ball passage.

In this way, after setting the ball feed stop flag, the firing operation is performed for a certain period of time (in the modified example 15, in the modified example 15).
(Example of 3 firing cycles) It is made feasible, and there is a possibility that the return ball will be eliminated by this firing operation. Then, when the ball feed stop flag setting period (for example, 3 firing cycles is illustrated) elapses, the ball feed stop flag is erased, and if the return ball is not detected, "ball feed operation and its 0.2.
"The firing operation will be performed later" will be repeated in a cycle of 0.6 sec.

On the other hand, although not shown, after setting the ball feed stop flag, a certain period of time (3 firing cycles)
Even if the firing operation is enabled but the return ball is not resolved, the ball feed stop flag is cleared. However, if the existence of the return ball is confirmed before the predetermined time (for example, 3.0 seconds) elapses after the ball feed stop flag is cleared, the elimination operation execution flag is set and the launch permission signal is HI. From level to LOW level. Then, when the elimination operation execution flag is set, the ball feeding operation and the firing operation are not performed. If a return ball is detected after a predetermined time (for example, 3.0 seconds) has elapsed after the ball feed stop flag is cleared, the ball feed stop flag is set again.

In the modified example 15, in the normal process (FIG. 26), (a) the return ball detection process is performed based on FIG. 54, (b) the return ball elimination process is performed based on FIG. 55, and (c). ) The point that the preparation flag management process of FIG. 56 (a) is performed between the return ball elimination process (S508) and the game ball launch control process (S509), and (d) the game ball launch control process (S509) are shown in FIG. 116. It is different from the first embodiment in that it is performed based on the above, but it is the same as the first embodiment in other points.

Next, the features of the return ball detection process of the modified example 15 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 118. In the return ball detection process of the modified example 15, instead of "when affirmatively determined in the process of step S1506, step S1507 is executed and then step S1508 is executed",
It is different from the first embodiment in that "when affirmatively determined in the process of step S1506, step S1507A or step S1507B is executed and then step S1508 is executed".
The return ball detection process of the modified example 15 is a modified example of the return ball detection process (FIG. 37) of the first embodiment, but the return ball detection process of the modified example 15 is the modified example 11, the modified example 12, and the modified example. It may be a modification of the return ball detection process of 13.

In the return ball detection process of the modified example 15, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1506, the process proceeds to step S1506A to determine whether or not the preparation flag is set. Here, the preparation flag is a flag indicating that the elimination operation is ready to be executed, and is set after the ball feed stop is completed or after the elimination operation is completed, as will be described later.

Then, if a negative determination is made in step S1506A, the process proceeds to step S1507A.
When the first return ball flag is set and an affirmative judgment is made in step S1506A, step S1
Proceed to 507B and set the second return ball flag. Then, when the process of step S1507A or step S1507B is performed, the return ball detection process ends through the process of step S1508. Here, the "first return ball flag" is a flag indicating that the ball feed stop process is being performed, and the "second return ball flag" is a flag indicating that the return ball elimination operation is being performed.

Next, the return ball elimination process of the modified example 15 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 119. In the return ball elimination process of the modification 15, it is determined in step S1611 whether or not the ball feed stop flag is set. Specifically, various flag storage areas 23 of the RAM 204
Step S161 by determining whether or not the ball feed stop flag is stored in step 5.
The process of 1 can be performed. Here, the ball feed stop flag is a flag indicating that the ball feed operation is stopped, and is set when the return ball elimination process is started with the first return ball flag set.

If a negative determination is made in step S1611, the process proceeds to step S1612, and it is determined whether or not the resolution operation execution flag is set. Specifically, the process of step S1612 can be performed by determining whether or not the resolution operation execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Here, the elimination operation execution flag is a flag indicating that the elimination operation is being executed, and is set when the return ball elimination process is started with the second return ball flag set. The significance of the elimination operation is the same as that of the first embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step S1611 and step S1612, step S161
In 3, it is determined whether or not the first return ball flag is set. Then, step S
If an affirmative determination is made in 1613, in step S1614, a process of setting the ball feed stop flag, a process of stopping the ball feed operation, a process of erasing the first return ball flag, and a ball feed stop end timer tf are set. The process of setting "450 (1.8 seconds)" is executed, and the return ball elimination process is completed. Here, the ball feed stop end timer tf is set when the stop of the ball feed operation is started (
When the ball feed stop flag is set), it is a timer that determines when to end the "stop ball feed operation".

If a negative determination is made in step S1613, it is determined in step S1615 whether or not the second return ball flag is set. Then, if a negative determination is made in step S1615, the return ball elimination process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1615, the process of setting the resolution operation execution flag and the process of setting the resolution operation execution flag in step S1616.
The process of starting the elimination operation, the process of erasing the second return ball flag, and the elimination operation end timer t
The process of setting "450 (1.8 seconds)" in e is executed, and the return ball elimination process is completed. Here, the resolution operation end timer te is a timer that determines when the resolution operation is terminated when the resolution operation is started (when the resolution operation execution flag is set).

When it is determined in step S1611 that the ball feed stop flag is set, the value of the ball feed stop end timer tf is decremented by 1 in step S1620. That is, since the return ball elimination process is a part of the normal process and is executed in a cycle of 4 msec, the count value set in the elimination operation end timer te is decremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle).

When step S1620 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1621. In step S1621,
It is determined whether or not the value of the ball feed stop end timer tf is "0". Then, when the value of the ball feed stop end timer tf is not "0", the return ball elimination process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the ball feed stop end timer tf is "0", in step S1622, the process of ending the "stop ball feed operation" and the process of clearing the ball feed stop flag. After performing the process of setting the preparation flag and the process of setting "750" in the post-end time measurement counter tv, the return ball elimination process is terminated. Here, the counter tv for time measurement after the end is
It is a counter for measuring the time after the ball feed stop flag or the cancellation operation execution flag is cleared. Here, the return ball detection process is a part of the normal process (FIG. 26) and is 4 mse.
Since it is executed in the c cycle, the value set in the time measurement counter tv after the end is decremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle).

If a negative determination is made in step S1611 and an affirmative determination is made in step S1612,
The process proceeds to step S1617. In step S1617, the value of the elimination operation end timer te is decremented by 1. Then, when step S1617 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1618. In step S1618, it is determined whether or not the value of the elimination operation end timer te is "0". Then, if the value of the elimination operation end timer te is not "0", the return ball elimination process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the resolution operation end timer te is "0", in step S1619, a process of ending the resolution operation, a process of erasing the resolution operation execution flag, and a preparation flag are set. After performing the process and the process of setting "750" in the time measurement counter tv after the end, the return ball elimination process is ended. Also in the return ball elimination process of the modified example 15, the process of ending the elimination operation (solenoid 77a) in step S1619.
If the excitation of the above is stopped, the support member 77 is lowered, and the game ball at the launch position 74W can be supported) is not performed, a warning sound is generated or a warning lamp is displayed. May be good.

The preparation flag management process of the modified example 15 will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (a). When this preparation flag management process is activated, it is determined in step S1671 whether or not the preparation flag is set. Then, when a negative determination is made in step S1671, the preparation flag management process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S1671, step S167
The process proceeds to 2, the time measurement timer tv is subtracted by "1" after the end, and the process proceeds to step S1673.

Then, in step S1673, it is determined whether or not the value of the post-end time measurement timer tv is "0", and if the value of the post-end time measurement timer tv is not "0", the post-end time measurement process ends. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the time measurement timer tv after completion is determined in step S1673, the process proceeds to step S1674, the preparation flag is cleared, and then the preparation flag management process is terminated.

That is, in the modification 15, the preparation flag is set to "after the ball feed stop is completed (after the ball feed operation is stopped, but after the state in which the firing operation is continued is completed)" or "after the elimination operation is completed".
A predetermined time (for example, 3 firing cycles) is set, but the relevant time (for example, 3 firing cycles)
Will be erased after the passage of time. Therefore, when the return ball is detected after the lapse of the predetermined time (for example, 3 firing cycles), the first return ball flag is set and the ball feed is stopped.

Next, the features of the game ball launch control process of the modified example 15 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. In the game ball launch control process of the modification 15, the process of step S1705 is followed by step S1705B.
, Step S1705C and step S1705D are added, which is different from the game ball launch control process of the first embodiment.

That is, in the game ball launch control process of the modification 15, when step S1705 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1705B. In this step S1705B, it is determined whether or not the ball feed stop flag is set. Then, when the ball feed stop flag is set, S17
After executing the process of 05C, the game ball launch control process is terminated, and if the ball feed stop flag is not set, the process of S1705D is executed and then the game ball launch control process is terminated.
Here, the process of S1705C is a process of setting the output state of the ball feed stop signal to the HI level based on the setting of the ball feed stop flag, and the process of S1705D is a process of setting the ball feed stop flag. This is a process of setting the output state of the ball feed stop signal to the LOW level based on the fact that there is no ball feed stop signal. When the main control device 81 sets the output state of the ball feed stop signal to the HI level or the LOW level, the launch permission signal is input to the power supply / launch control device 98 (launch permission reception circuit 98e shown in FIG. 16). It has become. The power supply / launch control device 98 stops the ball feed operation based on the ball feed stop signal being at the HI level.

Next, the launch control process of the modified example 15 will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (b). When the process of S5006 is performed, the point that the process of S5006A is performed is different from the launch control process of the first embodiment.

In the firing control process of the modified example 15, if it is determined in the process of step S5006 that the value of the firing cycle counter is "150", the process proceeds to S5006A and the ball feed stop signal is H.
It is determined whether or not the level is I. When it is determined that the ball feed stop signal is not at the HI level, in step S5007, a drive signal for ball feed is output to the ball feed device 76, and then the launch control process is performed through step S5008. To finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball feed stop signal is at the HI level, step S5
The process of 007 is skipped, and the launch control process is terminated through step S5008. That is, although the ball feed device 76 does not shift one game ball to the launch position of the launch rail 74, it sets the ball feed completed state and ends the launch control process. As described above, in the modification 15, when the launch permission signal is at the HI level, but the ball feed stop signal is at the HI level, the process of step S5007 is skipped. In this case, the ball feed operation is prohibited and the launch rail 7
Although a new game ball is not sent out to 4, it is set to the ball-fed state, so step S5
The processes 009 to 5013 are executed (see FIG. 42).

By the way, in a conventional game machine, if the ball feeding operation is continued even if a return ball is generated, a large number of game balls are accumulated on the launch rail 74, causing ball clogging on the launch rail 74 or the degree of ball clogging. It can get worse and worse. On the other hand, in the modified example 15, when the return ball is generated, the ball feeding operation is first stopped and the firing operation is continued. That is, the ball feeding operation is stopped, and the return ball is eliminated (excluded from the launch rail 74) by launching the game ball existing on the game ball to the launch rail 74. Then, when the return ball is eliminated, the normal game is continued as it is, and when the return ball is not eliminated, the return ball elimination process is performed. That is, in the modification 15, even if the return ball flag is set, the "ball feed operation is stopped" is first performed.
Since the execution frequency of the return ball elimination process is reduced, it is possible to contribute to the smooth progress of the game. In the modified example 15, the execution time of the elimination operation may be changed according to the degree of achievement of the elimination operation of the return sphere, as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 112) described above. For example, the execution time of the resolution operation executed after the resolution operation may be longer than the execution time of the resolution operation that is first executed after the ball feed operation is stopped.

Further, the launch control process of the modified example 15 is used as a modified example of the launch control process of the first embodiment, but as shown in FIG. 120 (c), the launch control process of the modified example 15 is modified to the modified example 14 (FIG. 52). It may be a modification of the firing control process of. That is, when it is determined in the process of step S5006 that the value of the firing cycle counter is "150", the process proceeds to S5006A, and it is determined whether or not the ball feed stop signal is at the HI level. When it is determined that the ball feed stop signal is not at the HI level, in step S5007, a drive signal for ball feed is output to the ball feed device 76, and then the launch control process is performed through step S5008A. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball feed stop signal is at the HI level, step S500
The process of 7 is skipped, and the launch control process is terminated through step S5008A. In other words
The ball feeding device 76 does not shift one game ball to the firing position of the launch rail 74, but sets the ball feeding state to the launched state and ends the launch control process. As described above, in the modification 15, when the launch permission signal is at the HI level, but the ball feed stop signal is at the HI level, the process of step S5007 is skipped. In this case, the ball feed operation is prohibited, and the launch rail 74
No new game ball is sent out to, but because the process of step S5008A is being executed.
The processes of steps S5009A, S5010A, 50111, 5012 are executed (FIG. 1).
16).

(4) Further, as shown in the modified example 16 (modified example of the first embodiment) shown in FIG. 122 (a),
A notch 74E may be provided at the lower end (rear end) of the launch rail 74 to facilitate the discharge of the game ball from the launch rail 74. That is, by retracting the support member 77 from the rear of the game ball F, the game ball F on the launch rail 74 can be discharged from the lower end of the launch rail 74, but the discharge passage at that time is the lower end of the launch rail 74. It becomes wider by the amount of notch 74E provided in. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the discharge of the game ball from the launch rail 74. As the notch 74E, an arc-shaped notch 74E having a radius of curvature larger than the diameter of the game ball can be exemplified, but the shape and size of the notch 74E should be such that at least a part of the game ball can enter. It doesn't matter if.

If the lower end of the launch rail 74 is substantially linear in a plan view, the launch rail 7 is used when the distance between the lower end of the launch rail 74 and the tip of the launch device 75 (striking portion 75b) is narrowed.
By providing the notch 74E at the lower end of 4, the lower end of the launch rail 74 and the launcher 75
It is possible to secure a distance from the tip portion (striking portion 75b) of the. When the notch 74E is provided at the lower end of the launch rail 74, it is desirable that the center of gravity position GW of the game ball supported by the support member 77 from the rear on the launch rail 74 exists on the launch rail 74.

(5) Further, in the first embodiment, the support member 77 is operated to execute the return ball elimination operation, but the return ball elimination method is not limited to the method shown in the first embodiment. For example, FIG. 122 (
As shown in the modified example 17 (modified example of the first embodiment) of b), the lower end side (rear end) 74F of the launch rail 74 is made rotatable with reference to the hinge 74G, and the lower end side (rear end) 74F. May be rotated in the clockwise direction in front view to discharge the game ball F on the launch rail 74. Also,
As shown in the modified example 18 of FIG. 123 (modified example of the first embodiment), the launching device 75 is made movable (retractable) in a direction away from the launching rail 74, and the support member 77 is moved and the launching device 75.
The game ball F on the launch rail 74 may be discharged by retreating.

(6) Further, as shown in the modified example 19 (modified example of the first embodiment) of FIG. 124 (a), the launch rail 74 can be moved in the launch direction (direction close to the guide rail portion 5E). To do.
As a result, the lower end side (rear end) W1 of the launch rail 74 moves in the launch direction (direction close to the guide rail portion 5E), and the game ball is between the lower end side (rear end) W1 and the support member 77. A gap portion W2 through which the game ball F can pass may be provided, and the game ball F may be discharged through the gap portion W2.
That is, the launch rail 74 is moved in a predetermined direction, and the distance between the lower end side (rear end) W1 (launch position 73) of the launch rail 74 and the support member 77 exceeds the diameter of the game ball. The game ball on the rail 74 can be discharged to the outside of the launch rail 74.

(7) Further, as shown in the modified example 20 (modified example of the first embodiment) of FIG. 124 (b), the rotation center W3 (the surface parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine 10) is located on the upper end side of the launch rail 74. A center of rotation that can rotate inside) is provided. Then, it rotates with reference to the rotation center W3 of the launch rail 74 (rotates in the clockwise direction in front view), and a gap portion through which the game ball can pass between the lower end side (rear end) W1 and the support member 77. W4 may be provided and the game ball F may be discharged through the gap W4. In the modified example 20, the rotation of the launch rail 74 is executed until it comes into contact with the stopper W5.

Similarly, as shown in the modified example 21 (modified example of the first embodiment) of FIG. 124 (c), the launch rail 74 is provided in a plane substantially perpendicular to or intersecting the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. It is made rotatable based on W6. Then, the launch rail 74 is rotated with reference to the rotation center W6, and the launch rail 74 is rotated.
By tilting the groove 74M of the launch rail 74 so as to be inclined downward, the game ball F on the launch rail 74 may be discharged in the direction in which the groove 74M is tilted. That is, modification 1
As shown in 9 to 20, by rotating the launch rail 74, the game ball F on the launch rail 74 can be discharged to the outside of the launch rail.

(8) Further, as shown in the modified example 22 of FIG. 125, the launch rail 74 has a retractable structure, and the lower end side (rear end) W7 of the launch rail 74 is in the launch direction (direction close to the guide rail portion 5E).
A gap W8 through which the game ball can pass is provided between the lower end side (rear end) W7 and the support member 77, and the game ball F may be discharged through the gap W8. For example, the lower end side portion W9 of the launch rail 74 is composed of a lower end side portion of the first rail portion 74A and a second rail portion 74B slidably arranged on the first rail portion 74A. Then, when the return ball is not generated, the lower end side portion of the second rail portion 74B protrudes in the direction opposite to the firing direction from the lower end side of the first rail portion 74A. Further, a launch position 74W is provided on the upper surface of the lower end side portion of the second rail portion 74B, but when a return ball is generated, the second rail portion 74B is moved to the first rail portion by using a driving means such as a soleidoid. It slides on the 74A in the launch direction. This will
The "protrusion amount from the first rail portion 74A" of the lower end side portion of the second rail portion 74B is reduced.
Then, a gap portion W8 through which the game ball can pass may be provided between the lower end side portion of the second rail portion 74B and the support member 77, and the game ball F may be discharged through the gap portion W8. An inclined surface W10 that descends to the side of the first rail portion 74A is provided on the upper end side of the second rail portion 74B.
It is possible to eliminate a step between the upper end side of the second rail portion 74B and the upper surface of the first rail portion 74A. Therefore, the game ball launched from the launch position 74W and passing through the upper surface of the second rail portion 74B smoothly shifts toward the upper surface of the first rail portion 74A.

(9) In the first embodiment, a penetration type proximity switch is used as the passage detection sensor 74b, but the passage detection sensor 74b may be configured by an optical sensor as in the modification 18 of FIG. 59. For example, a light emitting element 74m (light emitting unit) composed of an LED and a light receiving element 74n (light receiving unit) composed of a phototransistor are arranged to face each other on both sides of the firing rail 74. Then, when the game ball passing through the launch rail 74 blocks the light emitted from the light emitting element 74m (passing through the passage detection sensor 74b), a HI level detection signal is output and the game ball passing through the launch rail 74 emits light. If the light emitted from the element 74m is not blocked (passing through the passage detection sensor 74b), a LOW level detection signal may be output. However, also in this case, when the game ball passing through the launch rail 74 blocks the light emitted from the light emitting element 74m, a LOW level detection signal is output and the game ball passing through the launch rail 74 is emitted from the light emitting element 74m. If the light is not blocked, the HI level detection signal may be output.

Also in the case of this modification 22, when the cycle for detecting the detection signal of the HI level by the passage detection sensor 74b is shorter than the firing cycle, it can be determined that the return ball has occurred. Or
When the time during which the passage detection sensor 74b outputs the HI level detection signal is the normal time,
It is determined that the game ball is normally launched from the launch position 74w, and the passage detection sensor 74b is H.
If the time during which the I-level detection signal is output is longer than the normal time, it can be determined that the ball is a return ball. Further, if the passage detection sensor 74b is composed of an optical sensor, the passage detection sensor 74b is likely to be in a non-contact state with the launched game ball. That is, when the passage detection sensor 74b of the first embodiment is used, the game ball passes through the detection hole 74c of the passage detection sensor 74b, but in the passage detection sensor 74b of the modified example 18, the launch rail 74 is used. Since there is no contact with the passing game ball, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the launched game ball is affected by the passage detection sensor 74b.

(10) Instead of the passage detection sensor 74b of the first embodiment and the modified example 18, the launch rail 74
A modified example using a weight sensor for detecting the weight of the above (a modified example of the first embodiment) can also be exemplified. The weight sensor is provided with a support portion below the launch rail 74 or the like to support the weight of the launch rail 74 and the weight of the game ball arranged on the launch rail 74. This support portion shall be compressed and deformed in proportion to the weight of the launch rail 74 and the weight of the game ball arranged on the launch rail 74. Then, a strain gauge is attached to the peripheral wall portion of the support portion. This strain gauge is configured by using an element that reduces electrical resistance with respect to strain in the compression direction, and is connected to the MPU 202 constituting the main control board 201 via a bridge circuit (not shown).

Then, when the support portion is compressed and the strain gauge is distorted, the electric resistance changes according to the amount of strain of the strain gauge. Therefore, the voltage output from the bridge circuit is input to the MPU 202 according to the amount of strain of the strain gauge. Then, in the main control device 81, the signal level (hereinafter referred to as the first signal level) when one game ball is mounted on the launch rail 74 is predetermined, and from this first signal level and the bridge circuit. Output signal level (hereinafter referred to as the second
Signal level) is compared. Then, if it is determined that a plurality of game balls are mounted on the launch rail 74, it may be determined that a return ball has been generated, and the return ball elimination process may be executed. As described above, when the weight of the game ball on the launch rail 74 is larger (more) than the predetermined value by the weight sensor, it may be determined that the return ball has occurred. In this case, the presence or absence of the return ball can be more reliably determined by the weight of the game ball on the launch rail 74. The form and structure of the weight sensor is not particularly limited as long as it can measure the weight of the game ball on the launch rail 74. For example
A support portion that supports the entire area of the launch rail 74 may be provided below the launch rail 74, and a strain gauge may be provided on this support portion.

(11) In the first embodiment, the launch position 74w of the launch rail 74 is set to the inner frame 13 (resin base 2).
1) The front part, below the attachment part of the game board 24, is provided at a position to the right, and the launch rail 74 is gently raised from the right side to the left side and arranged in an inclined shape (inclination angle of about 25 to 35). doing. Then, the game ball that has passed through the launch rail 74 has an inner frame 13 (resin base 21).
It is guided to the guide rail portion 5E provided on the left end side of the. However, as in the comparative example of FIG. 126 (a), the launch rail 574 is the front portion of the inner frame 13 (resin base 21), and the inner frame 13 (resin base) is located below the attachment portion of the game board 24. 21) is provided approximately in the center (shown by a solid line) or near the left end of the inner frame 13 (resin base 21) (shown by a broken line) along the left-right direction, and the launch rail 574 is steeply inclined from the right side to the left side (shown by a broken line). A game machine provided at an inclination angle of about 50 to 80) has also been proposed.

In the launch rail 574, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the thick portion 574a arranged below and having a large wall thickness and the thin portion 574z arranged above and having a small wall thickness are substantially continuous diagonally. It has a configuration in which it is arranged. Further, the rail width (width orthogonal to the launch direction of the game ball) excluding the lower end side of the launch rail 574 is a width through which one game ball can pass, but the rail width is on the lower end side of the thick portion 574a. Is provided with a reduced diameter portion 574c that gradually narrows downward.

Near the lower end of the reduced diameter portion 574c, the rail width becomes substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball that has entered the launch rail 574 is supported from below by the inner wall surface 574d near the lower end of the reduced diameter portion 574c. .. That is, the inner wall surface 574d constitutes a specific example of the launch position 574e. Further, the reduced diameter portion 574c includes a left side forming portion 574m arranged on the left side and a right side forming portion 574n arranged on the right side. Further, a striking hole 574f is opened at the lowermost end of the reduced diameter portion 574c (the lowermost end of the launch rail 574).

Further, in the front portion of the inner frame 13 (resin base 21), a striking mallet 574 g is provided on the right side of the reduced diameter portion 574c, and the striking mallet 574 g is rotationally driven in the clockwise rotation direction with reference to the rotation point 574h. Then, 574 g of the batting mallet can hit the game ball supported at the launch position.

The launch rail 574 has a substantially bag shape in which the launch rail 574 opens upward while having a steep inclination angle. Therefore, when a return ball is generated, there is a high possibility that two, three, or four game balls will be accumulated on the launch rail 574. In particular, when the amount of rotation operation applied to the launch handle 8A is reduced and a so-called "choro strike" is attempted, the game ball is launched on the launch rail 57.
It may be difficult to continue the game because it accumulates in 4. In this case, it is necessary to manually eliminate the game ball in the launch rail 574 by the pachinko hall clerk.

On the other hand, in the modified example 23 (modified example of the first embodiment) shown in FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (b), the lower side of the left side forming portion 574 m can be operated in an oblique direction (in a direction substantially orthogonal to the firing direction). The movable part is 574k. Then, a solenoid 574j constituting the drive source of the movable portion 574k is provided, and the plunger 574p protruding from the solenoid 574j is provided with the movable portion 574.
Attach to k. Then, when the solenoid 574j (built-in coil) is excited, the amount of protrusion of the plunger 574p is reduced, and when the excitation of the solenoid 574j (built-in coil) is stopped, the amount of protrusion of the plunger 574p is increased.

Further, a passage detection sensor 574b for detecting a game ball passing through the launch rail 574 is provided near the lower end of the thin-walled portion 574z. Various types of the passage detection sensor 574b can be selected. For example, the magnetic detection type proximity sensor exemplified in the first embodiment and the like, the optical sensor exemplified in the modification 18 and the like, the weight sensor and the like can be used.

In the normal state (when the game ball is supported at the launch position), as shown in FIG. 127 (a), the excitation of the solenoid 574j (built-in coil) is stopped, and the amount of protrusion of the plunger 574p is reduced. At this time, since the inner wall surface of the movable portion 574k and the inner wall surface of the right side forming portion 574m are at a distance that can hold the game ball (because the distance is smaller than the diameter of the game ball), the game ball is launched. It can be supported by 574e. On the other hand, when a reverse sphere is generated (specifically, when the passage detection sensor 574b detects a return sphere), the solenoid 574j is excited as shown in FIG. 127 (b), and the protrusion amount of the plunger 574p is increased. Is reduced. Therefore, the movable part 5
Since the inner wall surface of 74k and the inner wall surface of the right side forming portion 574m exceed the distance that can hold the game ball (because the distance is larger than the diameter of the game ball), the game ball on the launch rail 574 is the movable part 5.
It passes through the upper part of 74k and is discharged from the lower end of the launch rail 574. Then, it passes through a connecting passage (not shown) and is guided to the lower plate 72.

As described above, according to the modification 23, since the discharge means (processing of step S1702 performed by the main control device 81 based on the detection result of the passage detection sensor 74b, solenoid 574j for operating the movable portion 574k, etc.) is provided. Even if the launch rail 574 is arranged on a steep slope or the launch rail 574 has a structure that easily causes ball clogging, the return ball is automatically ejected.
Smooth progress of the game can be ensured.

In the modified example 23, the movable portion 574k formed of a part of the thick portion 574 m was operated to discharge the return ball, but various locations to be the movable portion 574k can be selected. For example, the thick portion 574a is composed of a lower end surface portion (bottom surface portion) and other portions (hereinafter, main body portion), and a striking hole 574f (see FIG. 62) is provided in the lower end surface portion (bottom surface portion). Then, the lower end surface portion (bottom surface portion) is supported by a hinge or the like with respect to the main body portion, and the lower end surface portion (bottom surface portion) is used as a movable portion.
It is possible to realize a used state in which the lower end of the main body is closed (however, the striking hole 574f is open) and a non-used state in which the lower end of the main body is opened (however, the striking hole 574f is open). And. Then, when the passage detection sensor 574b does not detect the return ball, the solenoid 57
Excite 4j (or stop excitation), configure the non-use state, and pass detection sensor 574.
When b detects the return ball, the excitation of the solenoid 574j is stopped (or excited).
, The unused state may be configured.

Further, in the modified example 23, the firing rail 574 (particularly, the thick portion 574a) is opened and closed with a discharge hole through which the game ball can pass (drop) and a portion whose outer peripheral surface faces downward. Provide a shutter. Then, when the passage detection sensor 574b does not detect the return ball, the solenoid 574j is excited (or the excitation is stopped), the discharge hole is closed by the shutter, and the passage detection sensor 574b detects the return ball. In addition, the excitation of the solenoid 574j may be stopped (or excited), the shutter may be operated, and the discharge hole may be opened.

(12) In the first embodiment and its modifications, the driving means (actuator) of the discharging means is configured by the solenoid, but other driving means (actuator) such as a motor may be used. Further, in the first embodiment and its modification, the solenoid is excited when the return ball discharge operation (elimination operation) is executed, and the solenoid excitation is stopped when the return ball discharge operation (elimination operation) is stopped. (
The embodiment of non-excitation) is illustrated, but the solenoid is de-energized when the discharge operation (elimination operation) is executed, and the solenoid is excited when the discharge operation (elimination operation) of the return sphere is stopped. You can also.

(13) In the first embodiment, the end time of the return ball discharge operation (return ball elimination operation) is uniformly set.
Although "1.8 seconds" was set after the start of the return ball discharge operation, the end time may be changed depending on whether or not the player was in a normal gaming state at the start of the return ball discharge operation. That is, in the modification 24 of FIG. 128 (the modification of the first embodiment), when the return ball discharge operation is started, the main control device 81 receives the “LOW level condition satisfying signal” at the start of the return ball discharge operation. If you are (
When the player does not touch the firing handle 8A or operates the stop switch 89), the end time of the return ball discharge operation (return ball elimination operation) is set to "after the return ball discharge operation starts". It is set to "1.8 seconds".

However, if the main control device 81 receives the "HI level condition satisfying signal" when the return ball ejection operation is started, "after the time obtained by subtracting the predetermined time from 1.8 seconds has elapsed". The return ball discharge operation (return ball elimination operation) may end.

For example, as shown in the modified example 24 of FIG. 128, a predetermined firing cycle (hereinafter referred to as the first firing cycle) is started at the timing T1, and the timing T2 is 0.2 seconds after the first firing cycle starts.
The firing operation is executed in. Then, it is assumed that the elimination operation is started at the timing T3 of 0.3 seconds after the start of the first firing cycle. In this case, the firing cycle that should have started after the first firing cycle (hereinafter referred to as the second firing cycle) and the firing cycle that should have started after the second firing cycle. Assuming that (hereinafter, referred to as a third firing cycle) is executed in sequence, the return ball discharge operation (return ball elimination operation) is terminated at the timing T4 at which the third firing cycle ends.

That is, even if the main control device 81 continues to receive the HI level condition satisfying signal during the first firing cycle to the third firing cycle, the elimination operation execution flag is set, so that the main control device 81
Sets the output state of the launch permission signal to the LOW level. Then, at the timing T4 when the third firing cycle ends, the cancellation operation execution flag is released, and the output state of the firing permission signal is changed to HI.
Set to level. Then, when the timing T5 when 0.6 seconds have passed from the timing T4, the ball feeding operation is performed, and when the timing T6 has passed after 0.2 seconds, the firing operation is performed.

Next, the “periodic elapsed time measurement process” will be described with reference to FIG. 129 (a). This "time elapsed time measurement process within the cycle" is a process for measuring the time from the start of the firing cycle when the predetermined firing cycle is being executed. This "in-cycle elapsed time measurement process" is performed as the normal process of FIG. 26, and is executed following the process of S509. Then, when the in-cycle elapsed time measurement process is performed, the process proceeds to step S510. The normal process of the modified example 24 is the same as the normal process of the first embodiment except that the in-cycle elapsed time measurement process is added and a part of the return ball elimination process is different.

Also in the in-cycle elapsed time measurement process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the output state of the launch permission signal has been changed (see FIG. 41). That is, when the output state of the launch permission signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level or changed from the LOW level to the HI level, an affirmative determination is made in step S1901. Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1905, and the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time in the cycle is cleared to "0".

Here, the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time in the cycle is a counter that measures the elapsed time after starting the predetermined firing cycle, and whether the firing cycle starts (step S1902 described later).
When the output state of the launch permission signal is changed to the HI level (when the affirmative judgment is made in step S1901), "0" is cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the value of the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time in the cycle is "150". This in-cycle elapsed time measurement process is a part of the normal process (FIG. 26), and as will be described later, the count value of the counter TC5 for in-cycle elapsed time measurement is incremented by 1 in a 4 msec cycle. Moreover, when the output state of the firing permission signal is the LOW level and the firing cycle has not started, the count value of the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time within the cycle is "0". The value of the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time in the cycle is "150", which means that the value of the counter TC5 is 0 after the start of the predetermined firing cycle.
.. It indicates that 6 seconds have passed (end of the predetermined firing cycle). Therefore, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1905, and after clearing "0" of the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time in the cycle, the process of measuring the elapsed time in the cycle is temporarily terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step 1903, and it is determined whether or not the output state of the launch permission signal is at the LOW level. Then, when the output state of the launch permission signal is the LOW level, the in-cycle elapsed time measurement process is terminated as it is, and when the output state of the launch permission signal is the HI level, the in-cycle elapsed time measurement is performed. The value of the counter TC5 is added by "1", and the in-cycle elapsed time measurement process is terminated.

Next, the feature of the return ball elimination process of the modified example 24 will be described with reference to FIG. 129 (b). In the return ball elimination process of the modified example 18, step S1603B is used instead of the process of step S1603.
Is different from the return ball elimination process of the first embodiment in that the process is performed. This step S1603B
In the process of, as in the process of step S1603, the process of setting the resolution operation execution flag, the process of starting the resolution operation, the process of erasing the return ball flag, and the process of setting the resolution operation end timer te are performed. Do. However, in the process of step S1603B, the set value of the elimination operation end timer te is selected depending on the state of the condition satisfying signal.

Specifically, when the condition satisfaction signal received from the power supply / launch control device 98 is at the LOW level (the player does not touch the launch handle 8A, or the stop switch 89
(When operating), set "450 (1.8 seconds)" in the elimination operation end timer te. Further, when the condition satisfying signal is at the HI level, the value of the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time in the cycle described above is acquired. Then, after the start of the cycle, the elimination operation end timer te is set to "4.
Set the value of "50-TC5".

According to the above modification 24, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment. That is, even if the player touches the firing handle 8A and starts the elimination operation while the stop switch 89 is not operated, the player is less likely to feel a sense of discomfort. That is, even if the player is touching the firing handle 8A and the elimination operation is started without operating the stop switch 89, the firing operation is paused for a period that is a positive multiple of the firing cycle (0.6 seconds). Will be done.

A player with abundant game experience feels the firing interval (interval of firing operation), and remembers that this firing interval is "0.6 seconds". Therefore, the player who is touching the launch handle 8A hears that the game ball is fired or the foul ball is guided to the lower plate 72 every time the firing interval (0.6 seconds) elapses. If you do not, you will feel a sense of discomfort. And modification 2
In 4, the player who keeps touching the launch handle 8A hears the sound of the foul ball being guided to the lower plate 72 in one cycle and two cycles of the launch operation that should be periodically executed during the elimination operation. ,
After that, since the firing operation is restarted regularly, there is no sense of discomfort even if the elimination operation is performed. In other words, the player who keeps touching the launch handle 8A will perform the launch operation in a rhythmic manner before and after the pause, except that the launch motion is paused several times in the middle. It is unlikely that you will have a different feeling.

(14) In the modified example 24, an embodiment in which the final stage of the resolving operation is determined according to the situation is illustrated, but the method for determining the final stage of the resolving operation is not limited to the method shown in the modified example 24. For example, as shown in the virtual line of FIG. 9, when a sensor 874b for detecting the game ball discharged from the launch rail 74 is provided and the game ball discharged from the sensor 874b is not detected for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds). It may be determined that the discharge operation has been completed. Further, a launch rail 74 and a weight sensor for detecting the weight of the game ball are provided, and the weight sensor is in a state where the game ball on the launch rail 74 is not detected (a state in which only the weight of the launch rail 74 is detected) and is constant. After a lapse of time (for example, 2 seconds), it may be determined that the discharge operation is completed.

(15) Further, in the first embodiment and its modified example, an embodiment in which the return ball canceling operation is automatically performed is illustrated, but even if the return ball canceling operation is manually started based on the player's operation. Good. For example, the return ball may be eliminated by an input action performed by the player on a predetermined input means provided in the game machine. Here, as the input means, "contact type input means in which the player touches and performs an input action like a button", "non-contact type input means in which the player reacts when the player holds his hand", and " An example of a voice-type input means that responds to a player's voice. Then, when the input timing of the input means arrives, the notification means may notify (warn) or prompt the input means for input. As the input timing, "timing when the return ball is detected", "timing when a predetermined time has elapsed (that is, every fixed time)" and the like can be exemplified. Further, in the embodiment in which the notification is performed at the "timing when the predetermined time has elapsed", for example, the main control device 81 may be provided with a time measuring means or a real-time clock (RTC), and the notification may be performed every time the predetermined time elapses. Here, as the notification means, "notification means using voice such as speaker unit 64", "notification means using display of symbol display device 41 or the like", "light emitting means (for example, various types around the window unit 61". Examples include "notifying means using a lamp unit, etc." and "notifying means using vibration". Further, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous resolution operation) based on the timing result such as the timing means or the real-time clock (RTC), the resolution operation is performed. May be done.

Further, in the embodiment in which the input means is input to perform the return ball elimination operation, the input means may be input at each of the start and end of the elimination operation. At this time, the input mode at the start and the input mode at the end may be the same or different. Here, as the input mode of the input means, for example, when the input means is a button, the input mode is specified by the number of times of pressing, or the input mode is specified by the type of the button to be pressed (when a plurality of buttons are present). Etc. can be exemplified. Further, when the elimination operation of the return sphere is completed, a notification means for notifying the end of the elimination operation may be provided. Examples of the notification means include "notification means using voice", "notification means using display", "notification means using light emitting means", "notification means using vibration" and the like.

Further, in a gaming machine that performs an operation of eliminating a return ball by inputting an input to an input means, it is not necessary to provide a sensor such as the passage detection sensor 74b or 574b described above. Further, the mode in which the input means is input to perform the return ball elimination operation is not limited to the first embodiment, and can be applied to other modes (variants 16 to 22, etc.). For example, in the modified example 17, by applying input to the input means, the lower end side (rear end) 74F of the launch rail 74 rotates in the clockwise direction with respect to the hinge 74G, and the game ball F on the launch rail 74. May be discharged.

In the first embodiment, the embodiment in which the launch path forming means is composed of the launch rail portion is illustrated, but the launch rail portion is provided with a groove portion in which the launch path forming means is raised toward the launch direction and the game ball is passed in an inclined manner. , A specific example may be exemplified in which the configuration includes a guide rail portion that guides the game ball that has passed through the launch rail portion to the game area. In this specific example, the guide rail portion is provided in the vertical direction on the left side of the game area, and the game ball that has passed through the launch rail portion is received from the end portion along the launch direction at the lower end portion. May be composed of a gap portion provided between an end portion of the launch rail portion along the launch direction and the guide rail portion. In this case, the gap portion can discharge the game ball that runs in the direction opposite to the launch direction of the guide rail portion.
In this case, the groove portion of the launch rail portion is arranged at an inclination angle of 25 to 35 degrees toward the launch direction, and the lower end portion of the guide rail portion has an inclination angle substantially the same as the inclination angle along the launch direction of the groove portion. It may be provided in. In this way, since the launch rail portion is not arranged on a steep slope, it is possible to prevent a phenomenon in which a plurality of game balls are accumulated in the launch rail portion (ball accumulation phenomenon).

(Fifth Embodiment)
The fifth embodiment also shows a modification of the first embodiment. Also in this fifth embodiment, an embodiment of the “pachinko machine” will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. This pachinko machine 10 has a launch rail 674
The mode of the above is changed so that the return ball discharge operation (return ball elimination operation) can be performed without electrical control. Although FIGS. 1 to 4 are used as they are in the fifth embodiment,
In order to distinguish it from the pachinko machines of other embodiments, the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment is referred to as "pachinko machine 10" for convenience (see parentheses in FIGS. 1 to 4).

The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment has an outer frame 11 similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a game machine main body 12, and a game board 24. Further, the "configuration of the front door frame 14" and the "rear side configuration" of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment are the "configuration of the front door frame 14" and the "rear side configuration" of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Is the same as. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Hereinafter, the features of the launch rail 674 of the fifth embodiment will be mainly described. Here, FIG. 130 (
a) and (b) are schematic plan views for showing the launch rail 674, and FIG. 131 (a) is FIG.
30 (a) is a 5-5 cross-sectional view, and FIG. 131 (b) is a 6-6 cross-sectional view of FIG. 130 (a). Further, FIG. 130 (a) shows how the game ball moves on the launch rail 674 in the launch direction, and FIG. 130 (b) shows how the game ball moves on the launch rail 674 in the direction opposite to the launch direction. ..

The launch rail 674 of the fifth embodiment has a resin pedestal portion 6 as shown in FIG. 131 (a).
It includes a 74a and an exterior portion 674b that covers the pedestal portion 674a. In addition, the exterior part 674b
Is configured by bending an aluminum plate into a substantially M shape, and covers the front surface portion, the upper surface portion, and the back surface portion of the pedestal portion 674a. Further, the upper surface portion of the pedestal portion 674a is covered, and a groove portion 674c on which the game ball is mounted and launched is formed by a portion having a substantially V-shaped vertical cross section (vertical cross section that vertically traverses the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction). Then, the firing position 674 is formed by the lower end side of the groove 674c.
W is configured (see FIG. 130). Although the structure and the like of the launch rail 74 have been briefly described in the first embodiment, the launch rail 74 of the first embodiment also has the launch rail 674 of the fifth embodiment.
The pedestal portion and the exterior portion that covers the pedestal portion are provided as described above, and the exterior portion is formed by bending an aluminum plate into a substantially M shape, and the front surface portion, the upper surface portion, and the back surface portion of the pedestal portion are formed. It is covered. Further, the upper surface of the pedestal portion is covered, and the vertical cross section (vertical cross section that vertically traverses the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction) is substantially V-shaped to form a groove portion 674c for mounting and firing a game ball, and the groove portion 674c. The firing position 674W is configured by the lower end side of the.

As shown in FIG. 131 (a), the groove portion 674c has a pair of edge edges (a pair of edge edges along the elongated direction) 674d and 674e along the firing direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 130A, the groove portion 674c is provided with a notch portion 674f in the vicinity of the firing position 674W. The cutout portion 674f is the edge 67 located at the rear of the pair of edge edges 674d and 674e.
It is provided from a part of 4d toward the vicinity of the groove bottom portion 674 g.

As shown in FIG. 131 (a), the groove portion 674c has a forward inclined portion 674j which is inclined upward from the groove bottom portion 674 g toward the front of the game machine 10 (see the arrow FR in the figure), and the game machine 1
It is provided with a rearward inclined portion 674k that inclines upward toward the rear of 0. And FIG. 131
As shown in (b), the notch portion 674f is a part of the rear inclined portion 674k (launch position 674).
(Near W) is cut out to the vicinity of the groove bottom portion 674 g. In the following description, for convenience, the portion of the launch rail 674 that is not provided with the notch portion 674f is referred to as the complete rail portion 674A, and the portion provided with the notch portion 674f is referred to as the incomplete rail portion 6.
It is called 74B.

The vicinity of the launch position 674W is, for example, the launch position 674W of the notch portion 674f.
This refers to the case where the edge on the side is at a distance of 1.5 to 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball from the launch position 674W, and the vicinity of the groove bottom portion 674 g is along the launch direction of the notch portion 674f. The edge, which is the edge close to the groove bottom 674 g, is 0.1 to 0.2 times the diameter of the game ball from the groove bottom 674 g.
Refers to the case where the distance is doubled (1.1 to 2.2 mm). Further, a case where the width of the cutout portion 674f along the firing direction is 1.5 to 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball can be exemplified.

As described above, the groove portion 674c of the launch rail 674 includes a front inclined portion 674j and a rear inclined portion 674k. As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the complete rail portion 674A, the front inclined portion 674j and the rear inclined portion 674k are symmetrically arranged with the groove bottom portion 674d in between. However, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), in the incomplete rail portion 674B, the rear inclined portion 674k is shorter than the front inclined portion 674f. Regarding the forward inclined portion 674f, the complete rail portion 674A and the incomplete rail portion 674B have the same size.

As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the complete rail portion 674A, in the groove portion 674c having a substantially V-shaped cross section composed of the front inclined portion 674j and the rear inclined portion 674k, “about 1 /” from the bottom of the game ball F. Accept the part of "4". At this time, the front inclined portion 674j and the rear inclined portion 67
4k has the same size, and the game ball passing through the groove 674c can be evenly supported from the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 131 (b), in the incomplete rail portion 674B, the rear inclined portion 674
The length of j (the length from the groove bottom portion 674 g to the edge) is shorter than the length of the front inclined portion 674 k (the length from the groove bottom portion 674 g to the edge). Therefore, the incomplete rail portion 674
The groove portion 674c of B has a substantially L-shaped cross section, and can accept the game ball F. However, the game ball passing through the groove 674c cannot be evenly supported from the front-rear direction. The length of the rear inclined portion 674k constituting the incomplete rail portion 674B is set to be about "1/4" of the length of the front inclined portion 674j.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), a portion located below and behind the notch portion 674f in the pedestal portion 674a constituting the launch rail 674 and a portion located behind the notch portion 674f in the exterior portion 674b. However, it constitutes a recess 675a into which the game ball can enter. Further, in the base member 678, an opening 67 is provided at a portion located behind the recess 675a.
8b is provided, and a recess 21b is provided in a portion of the inner frame 13 (resin base 21) located behind the opening 678b. The space portion 675a, the opening portion 678b, and the recess 21
b communicates with each other to form a discharge passage 675h capable of discharging the game ball toward the lower plate 72. The means for discharging the return ball from the launch rail 674 is not limited to the discharge passage 675h. For example, it may be a discharge passage that discharges the return ball directly below the launch rail 674.

Further, as shown in FIG. 130A, the game ball F arranged at the launch position 674W of the launch rail 674 is supported by the support member 677 arranged diagonally rearward, and the launch position 674.
It is fixed to W. That is, the base member 678 is screwed into the base member 678 with a screw (not shown) inserted into a mounting hole (not shown) that penetrates the support member 677 in the front-rear direction.
It is fixed to. However, since the mounting hole (not shown) of the support member 677 is a long hole, the base member 678 of the support member 677 can be loosened by loosening the screwed screw (not shown).
The mounting position can be finely adjusted.

When the game ball F at the launch position 674 W is launched by the launch device 675 in a state where the return ball does not exist on the launch rail 674, the game ball F passes through the launch rail 674 and the guide rail portion 5
Reach E (see FIG. 7). That is, the game ball F launched from the launch position 674W includes a complete rail portion 674A (a portion below the launch rail 674 below the notch portion 674f), an incomplete rail portion 674B (a portion in which the notch portion 674f is formed), and It passes in the order of the complete rail portion 674A (above the launch rail 674 from the notch portion 674f). At this time, since the return ball does not exist on the launch rail 674 and the game ball F launched from the launch position 674W has momentum (because the ball speed is high), the cutout portion 674f is formed in the middle of the launch rail 674. Despite its existence, the game ball F passes through the launch rail 674 and reaches the guidance rail portion 5E.

That is, since the game ball F launched from the launch position 674W is evenly supported from the front-rear direction by the complete rail portion 674A, the complete rail portion 674A is in a stable state.
Pass through. Further, the game ball F launched from the launch position 674W has an incomplete rail portion 674.
Although it is not evenly supported from the front-back direction in B, since the game ball F has momentum (because the ball speed is high), it does not fall toward the notch 674f and the incomplete rail portion 674B.
Pass through.

Since the return ball running backward on the launch rail 674 and the game ball F launched from the launch position 674W together with the return ball in the state where the return ball exists on the launch rail 674, there is no momentum (because the ball speed is slow). , There is a high possibility that it will fall toward the notch 674f. That is, FIG. 130 (
As shown in a) and (b), since the game ball F is not evenly supported from the front-rear direction by the incomplete rail portion 674B, there is a high possibility that the game ball F will fall toward the cutout portion 674f. For example, a game ball having no momentum loses its balance (balance between the front and rear) when passing through the incomplete rail portion 674B, and is likely to fall toward the cutout portion 674f.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), the return ball reciprocates on the launch rail 674, and the momentum of the return ball becomes weaker, or the momentum of the return ball increases as the number of return balls increases. If it becomes weaker, the possibility that the return ball will fall toward the notch 674f is further increased.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, "electrical configuration (FIGS. 15 and 16)" and "symbol display device 4"
Display contents of 1 (FIG. 17), "various counters (FIG. 18)", "win / fail table (FIG. 19)",
"Distribution destination of game results to jackpot type counter C2 (FIG. 20)", "Matters related to reach display (reach state)", "Reserved ball storage area 232 (FIG. 21)", "Timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 22 to 22)" 25) ”is the same as that of the first embodiment. However, the "5th embodiment"
In the "electrical configuration (FIGS. 15 and 16)", the passage detection sensor 74b and the solenoid 77a
(Drive source of support member) is not required. Further, in the "normal process" of the fifth embodiment, the first embodiment is performed except that the "return ball detection process" and the "return ball elimination process" are not executed and the contents of the "game ball launch control process" are different. It is the same as the "normal processing" of the form.

That is, the “game ball launch control process” of the fifth embodiment is the same as the “game ball launch control process (FIG. 42)” of the first embodiment, except that the process of step S1702 is omitted.
The "launch control process" of the fifth embodiment is the same as the "launch control process" of the first embodiment.

According to the above fifth embodiment, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment. That is, according to the fifth embodiment, it is not necessary to drive the support member 77 by the "drive source (solenoid 77a or the like of the first embodiment" or the like, or to perform electrical control to process the return ball. , The mechanical structure of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, a large number of return balls are accumulated on the launch rail 674, and the return balls that have lost momentum move on the launch rail 674 and are discharged from the notch portion 674f. Smoothness can be ensured. Further, according to the fifth embodiment, the discharging means (notch 6).
Since the 74f) is provided, the launch rail 674 is arranged on a steep slope, or the launch rail 67 is provided.
Even if 4 has a structure in which ball clogging is likely to occur, the return ball can be smoothly discharged and the smooth progress of the game can be ensured. In the fifth embodiment, the incomplete rail portion 674B may be provided with a discharge port including the groove bottom portion 674 g, and the return ball may be dropped from this discharge port. However, when the discharge port is provided, a step is generated at the discharge port in the incomplete rail portion 674B, and the launch rail 67 is provided.
4 There is a possibility that the game ball (normal launch ball) arranged at the launch position 674W in the state where the return ball does not exist is affected by the discharge port. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the incomplete rail portion 674B is provided with a groove bottom portion of 674 g and has a short rearward inclined portion of 674j.
Because it is equipped with, a normal launch ball can be launched in a stable state.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of the fifth embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment other than the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(1) In the fifth embodiment, as shown in the modified example 25 of FIG. 132 (b), the incomplete rail portion 6
The tip portion 674s of the rear inclined portion 674g constituting the 74B may be rounded. According to this modification 25, discharge (guidance to the notch portion 674f) can be performed more smoothly.

(2) As a modification of the fifth embodiment, the support member 7 that can operate without requiring electrical power 7
An example of a method of processing a return sphere using L can be illustrated. For example, as shown in the modified example 26 of FIG. 133 (a), the support member 7L may be operated by using the urging force of the urging means 7H (for example, a coil spring) to process the return ball. That is, in the modified example 26, the support member 7L is movable to the left and right along the guides 7P and 7P arranged above and below the support member 7L. That is, the support member 7
L is movable to the left and right while sliding the outer peripheral surface of the right portion 7M on the guides 7P and 7P. Further, an urging means 7H is arranged between the right side portion 7M of the support member 7L and the wall portion 7J arranged on the right side thereof. Further, the left portion 7N of the support member 7L is a guide 7
It is located on the left side of P and 7P.

The left end portion of the support member 7L can support the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 76 at the launch position 74W. That is, if there is one game ball existing on the launch rail 74 (launch position 74W), the required amount of the left portion 7N of the support member 7L is placed on the right side of the guides 7P and 7P (launch position 7).
It protrudes by the amount (amount required to support one 4W game ball from behind). However, the urging force of the urging means 7H is set so as to "can support one game ball, but cannot support two or more game balls (move to the right)". There is. And FIG. 133 (
As shown in b), when a return ball is generated on the launch rail 74 and a plurality of game balls are arranged on the launch rail 74, the weight of the plurality of game balls is loaded on the support member 7L. Therefore, the support member 7L moves to the right along the guides 7P and 7P. Then, since an empty space is created by the amount that the support member 7L moves to the left side, the game ball on the launch rail 74 is discharged from the lower end of the launch rail 74.

According to the modified example 26, as in the fifth embodiment, since no electrical control is used to process the return ball, the mechanical structure of the pachinko machine is not complicated, and the control device constituting the pachinko machine is not complicated. It is possible to reduce the control burden of. In the modified example 26, the launch rail 74
When a plurality of game balls exist on the launch rail 74 and the support member 7L moves to the right, all the game balls existing on the launch rail 74 may be ejected from the launch rail 74, or one game ball may be ejected. The game ball may be left on the launch rail 74 and other game balls may be ejected from the launch rail 74.
Further, in the modified example 26, a mode in which the support member 7L moves in the left-right direction (a mode in which the support member 7L appears and disappears in the left-right direction from the guides 7P and 7P) is illustrated, but the support member 7L appears and disappears up and down or appears and disappears in the front-rear direction. You may do it. Further, in a mode in which the support member 7L appears and disappears in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, a predetermined actuator (driving means) for driving the support member 7L and a drive control means are provided, and the predetermined detecting means returns the ball. When it is detected, it drives the support member 7L and launches the launch rail 7.
The return ball may be ejected from 4.

(3) In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in order to provide the notch portion 674f in the rearward inclined portion 674j, the game ball (return ball) is directed rearward (toward a direction away from the player).
Can be discharged. However, the notch portion 674f may be provided in the front inclined portion 674j or may be provided in the groove bottom portion 674g.

(4) In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the cutout portion 674f is left open from beginning to end, and the return ball enters the cutout portion 674f without touching the return ball.
The configuration in which the water is discharged from the discharge passage 675h is illustrated. However, as shown in the modified example 27 shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, a discharge portion (cutout portion 674f or opening) for discharging the return ball).
An opening / closing member 674n for opening / closing may be provided. Here, the opening / closing member 67 of the modified example 27
The 4n includes a main body portion 674p and a base portion 674q arranged in an inclined manner.

A solenoid 674r constituting the driving means is attached to the opening / closing member 674n. That is, a part of the plunger 674s protrudes from the solenoid 674r, and an opening / closing member 674n is attached to the tip of the plunger 674s. And solenoid 674r
When the (built-in coil) is excited, the amount of protrusion of the plunger 674s is reduced, and when the excitation of the solenoid 674r (built-in coil) is stopped, the amount of protrusion of the plunger 674s is increased. The solenoid 674r is connected to a main control device 81 as a drive control means. Further, in the modified example 27, the solenoid is exemplified as the driving means for driving the opening / closing member 674n, but the mode of the driving means is not limited to the solenoid. For example, other actuators such as motors can also be used.

In the normal state (when the game ball is supported at the launch position 74W), FIGS. 134 (a) and 135.
As shown in (a), the excitation of the solenoid 674r (built-in coil) is stopped, and the amount of protrusion of the plunger 674s is increased. At this time, the main body portion 674p has a notched portion 674f.
The notch 674f is closed by fitting into. Further, when the main body portion 674p is fitted into the cutout portion 674f, the upper surface of the main body portion 674p is flush with the upper surface of the groove portion 674c.
Then, the game ball moving on the launch rail 674 does not enter the notch portion 674f and is held on the launch rail 674.

On the other hand, when it is desired to allow the game ball on the launch rail 674 to enter the discharge passage 675h through the cutout portion 674f, the solenoid 674r is excited. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 134 (b) and 135 (b), the amount of protrusion of the plunger 674s is reduced, and the opening / closing member 67
Since 4n moves backward, the notch portion 674f is opened.

According to the modified example 27, for example, when the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 determines that a return ball has not occurred, the excitation of the solenoid 674r (built-in coil) is stopped and the notch 674f is closed. Make it a state. On the other hand, when the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 determines that a return ball has occurred, the solenoid 674r (built-in coil) is excited to excite it.
The cutout portion 674f is opened.

In this modification 27, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the fifth embodiment. That is, when a return ball has not been generated and a normal launch is desired by the launcher 675, the notch 674f is closed, so that the game ball launched by the launcher 675 is accidentally cut. It is possible to reliably prevent a situation such as entering the notch portion 674f. Further, when a return ball occurs, the notch portion 674f is opened, so that the return ball is cut out at the notch portion 674f.
Can be entered into and processed. That is, the cutout portion 674f can be opened and closed flexibly.

(5) In the modified example 27, the embodiment in which the opening / closing member 674n is electrically driven and controlled is illustrated, but the opening / closing member 674n may be manually driven based on the operation of the player. For example, the return ball may be eliminated by an input action performed by the player on a predetermined input means provided in the game machine. Here, as the input means, "contact type input means in which the player touches and performs an input action like a button", "non-contact type input means in which the player reacts when the player holds his hand", and " An example of a voice-type input means that responds to a player's voice. Then, when the input timing of the input means arrives, the notification means may notify (warn) or prompt the input means for input.

<About the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

Features A1.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is stored. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the special information of
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting correspondence result that the special information to be granted is corresponding to the granting information.
The change display of the identification information is started based on the result of the grant determination, the change display is ended when a predetermined change time elapses, and the identification information change that displays the result of the grant determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information. Means (for example, first result display unit AS, second result display unit BS) and
A first indicating that the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means may be determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination.
The first prior identification means for identifying the prior identification information before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, and
The first suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting the content of the first pre-determination information with a determination probability based on the type of the specific target special information.
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special target specific target by the first prior identification means is started. The first suggestion effect is executed before or before the change display ends (for example, the first suggestion effect is performed by an effect device such as a symbol display device 41, a display lamp unit 63, and a speaker unit 64). (Execute) 1st suggestion effect execution means and
It is a game machine equipped with
When it is displayed that the special information is a non-granting result that does not correspond to the given information by the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior specific means. In the case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage means,
A selection means for preferentially selecting the special information having the lowest determination probability from the stored special information.
The second pre-specified information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the special information selected by the selection means is the target of the grant determination is the target of the grant determination. The second pre-identification means to identify before becoming
With the second suggestion effect execution decision means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect suggesting the content of the second prior determination information based on the determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information. ,
When the second suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the second suggestion effect, the change display is performed before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display. It is characterized in that the second suggestion effect execution means for executing the second suggestion effect is provided before the end of.

Feature A1 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned first to third embodiments. This feature A1
According to the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10), the second suggestion effect execution decision means has a decision probability based on the type of special information (big hit hold information, reach hold information, non-reach hold information, etc.), and the first suggestion effect (notice). Decide whether or not to execute the production). Then, even if the first suggestion effect (notice effect) is performed, if the non-granting result (disappearance result) is displayed, the type of special information (acquired information) already stored in the acquired information storage means. Whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect (second notice effect) is determined with the determination probability based on (big hit hold information, reach hold information, non-reach hold information, etc.).

The decision as to whether or not to execute this second suggestion effect (second notice effect) is prioritized for the special information (obtained information) already stored in the acquired information storage means, for which the decision probability is not the lowest. Therefore, the second suggestion effect can be executed with high frequency. For example, when the special information is "holding information corresponding to the grant determination result (for example, jackpot holding information)", the first suggestion effect (notice effect) or the second suggestion effect (second notice effect) can be executed. Increase the probability of being determined (that is, the above-mentioned probability of determination) (use high-ranked pending information). here,
In the present specification, "indicating the possibility of being determined to be the grant determination result" includes, for example, "notifying that the grant determination result is confirmed (100%)" and "grant determination result". "Notify the presence or absence of the possibility of becoming", "The possibility of becoming a grant judgment result is A% (however, A)
Is an arbitrary numerical value selected from 0 to 100), etc., to directly notify the possibility of a grant determination result, and to appear when the grant determination result is obtained. It refers to one or both of indirectly notifying the high or low possibility of a grant determination result through "the effect of performing or the appearance of cats".

If there are a plurality of "holding information indicating the grant determination result" and the plurality of holding information have superiority or inferiority, the higher-ranked holding information is further ranked in the order of advantage, and the "above" is given in the order of the ranking. The "decision probability" may be increased. For example, there are multiple types of jackpot results that generate a high-frequency winning mode. When the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode after the end of the execution mode, the hold information (special information) that generates one jackpot result linked to the high-probability mode is the other jackpot result linked to the low-probability mode. It may be ranked higher than the pending information (special information) to be generated (hereinafter, referred to as the first aspect). Similarly, there are multiple types of jackpot results that generate high-frequency winning modes, but if the number of open / close execution modes (number of rounds) executed after the jackpot result is generated is different, the number of open / close executions (number of rounds) is large. The higher the rank of the pending information (special information) that generates the jackpot result linked to the mode, the higher the rank (hereinafter referred to as the second aspect). In addition
There are multiple types of jackpot results that generate high-frequency winning modes, but if one of these jackpot results is generated, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, and the other jackpot results. When is generated, when the support mode is a jackpot result that becomes the low frequency support mode, the pending information (special information) that generates one jackpot result that leads to the high frequency support mode is linked to the low frequency support mode. It may be ranked higher than the pending information (special information) that generates the jackpot result (hereinafter referred to as the third aspect). It should be noted that any two or three of the above first to third aspects can be combined.

The probability (that is, the above-mentioned decision probability) that the first suggestion effect (notice effect) or the second suggestion effect (second advance notice effect) is determined to be executed can be determined, for example, as follows.
The same applies to the case of "holding information indicating the grant determination result" (hereinafter referred to as the former case) and the case of "holding information indicating the grant non-judgment result" (hereinafter referred to as the latter case). Aspect (
For example, the change display of reach) (change display of identification pending information) may be executed,
When the appearance rate of the "former case" is higher than that of the "latter case", the embodiment (for example,
The reserved information (special information) linked to the reach) may be ranked higher than the reserved information (non-reach that is not linked to the reach in the change display) that is not linked to the aspect. Furthermore, even in the aspect (for example, reach), the possibility of appearing with the "change display linked to the grant determination result (so-called jackpot fluctuation)" is more likely to appear in the "change display linked to the non-grant determination result (so-called deviation)". When it has a mode (for example, super reach) that is more likely to appear with "variation)"
A mode (for example, super reach) that is likely to appear with the "change display (so-called jackpot fluctuation) linked to the grant determination result" may be ranked higher than other modes (normal reach).

Feature A2.
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the special information having the lowest determination probability is the given information.

In feature A2, the special information preferentially selected by the selection means is "granted information" having a high probability (decision probability) of determining the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the highest), and therefore the second suggestion effect Can be executed more frequently.

Feature A3.
The first suggestion effect is based on the special information already stored in the acquired information storage means when the special information specified by the first prior specific means is stored in the acquired information storage means. Based on at least the already stored special information of the change display of the identification hold information to be executed and the change display of the identification hold information related to the special information specified by the first prior identification means. It is executed according to the change display of the identification pending information to be executed.
The second suggestion effect is an identification hold executed based on the special information previously stored in the acquired information storage means when the special information selected by the selection means is stored in the acquired information storage means. With the change display of the information and the change display of the identification hold information executed based on at least the previously stored special information among the change display of the identification hold information related to the special information selected by the selection means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that it is executed.

Feature A3 describes the display result in the game times (hereinafter referred to as the target game times) executed based on the hold information that is the target of the advance notice effect and the content of the effect executed in association with the target game times from the target game times. May be performed only during the execution of the previously started game times (hereinafter referred to as pre-game times), or the advance notice effect may be performed in accordance with the pre-game times and the target game times (the fluctuation).

Feature A4.
The acquisition condition is that the game ball has a first starting ball entry section (upper operating port 33) or a second starting ball entry section (upper operating port 33).
Established based on entering the lower operating port 34),
As the acquired information storage means
When a game ball enters the first starting ball entry unit (upper operating port 33), the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored as the first acquisition information storage means up to the first specified number. ,
When a game ball enters the second starting ball entry unit (lower operating port 34), the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored as a second acquisition information storage means up to a second specified number. ,
Is equipped with
The transition determination means is any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the grant determination is performed for each of the first acquisition information storage means and the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means. The game machine described in.

Feature A4 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned first embodiment to the second embodiment and the like. In other words
Hold information acquired based on the entry of the ball into the first start ball entry section (upper operating port 33) (first hold information)
Also in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) that distinguishes between the holding information (second holding information) acquired based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 34), the acquired information (first). Hold information, second
When the pending information) is generated, the second suggestion effect can be executed with high frequency. In feature A4, when special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means and the second acquired information storage means, it is stored in one of the first acquired information storage means and the second acquired information storage means. The special information may be processed (game processing such as grant determination and game times) in preference to the special information stored in the other. Especially when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the second
It becomes easier to enter the starting ball entry section (lower operating port 34), and when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it becomes difficult to enter the second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 34). When it is practically impossible to enter the ball, when special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means and the second acquired information storage means, the special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is stored. It is meaningful to give priority to the special information stored in the first acquired information storage means for processing.

Further, regardless of whether or not the special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means and the second acquired information storage means, the processing may be performed in the order in which the special information is stored.

Feature A5.
A first ball entry section where a game ball can enter, a second entry section different from the first entry section, and
A distribution means capable of alternately distributing the destination of the game ball that has passed through the predetermined entry port to the first entry portion and the second entry portion.
Equipped with
As the acquired information storage means
A first acquired information storage means that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a first specified number when a game ball enters the first ball entry unit (first ball entry unit 62a). When,
A second acquired information storage means that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a second specified number when a game ball enters the second ball entry unit (second ball entry unit 62b). When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

Feature A5 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned third embodiment. That is, the first ball entry section (first
Hold information (first hold information) based on the entry into the ball entry section 62a) and the second entry section (second entry section 6).
Since it is possible to alternately acquire the hold information (second hold information) based on the entry into 2b), the number of acquired information (first hold information, second hold information) tends to be particularly large. Therefore, features A1 to
In the gaming machine having the feature described in any one of A3, the second suggestion effect can be executed with high frequency.

In the feature A5, the transition determination means may make the grant determination for each of the first acquisition information storage means and the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means.

Feature A6.
The second suggestion effect execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect before the change display of the identification pending information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A5.

Feature A6 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned first to third embodiments, and specifically indicates a time for deciding whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect.

Feature A7.
The second suggestion effect execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect before the change display of the identification pending information based on the special information selected by the selection means ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that it is present.

Feature 7 also specifically indicates the time when it is decided whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect. In this case, since the determination time may be later than that of A5 described above and more acquired information may be stored, the probability that the second suggestion effect is executed can be further increased.

Feature A8.
A variable ball entry means that can switch the opening through which the game ball can enter between an open state and a closed state,
A variable ball entry control means that switches the state of the variable ball entry means to the closed state after setting the state to the open state, and
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
With
The benefits granted by the privilege granting means are
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result.
The game state of the game machine is changed from the privilege non-granting state, which includes maintaining the state of the variable ball entry means to the closed state, to the closed state after the state of the variable ball entry means is changed to the open state. It is a privilege to shift to the privilege granting state that the content is to return it a predetermined number of times.
In the case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage means when the gaming state of the gaming machine is returned from the privilege-giving state to the privilege-non-granting state, among the stored special information. It is possible to determine the grant determination result when the second selection means for preferentially selecting the special information whose determination probability is not the lowest and the special information selected by the second selection means are the targets of the grant determination. A third pre-specificing means for specifying the third pre-specific information indicating the sex before the selected special information is subject to the grant determination, and
With the third suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the third suggestion effect suggesting the content of the third prior determination information based on the determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information. ,
When the third suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the third suggestion effect, the change display is performed before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the third suggestion effect execution means for executing the third suggestion effect is provided before the end of.

In feature A8, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is returned from the privilege granting state to the privilege non-granting state,
In the case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the third suggestion effect (third notice effect)
Can be executed, so that the suggestion effect can be executed even more frequently.

Feature A9.
The second suggestion effect execution means
When it is displayed that the special information is a non-granting result that does not correspond to the given information by the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior specific means. Based on the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the second suggestion effect is executed and the second suggestion effect is executed.
In the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means includes the special information stored after the predetermined special information.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the second suggestion effect being executed is changed to a second suggestion effect based on the special information stored later.

In the feature A9, since the second suggestion effect being executed is replaced with the second suggestion effect having other contents, the game entertainment can be further enhanced.

Feature B1.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is stored. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the special information of
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting correspondence result that the special information to be granted is corresponding to the granting information.
The change display of the identification information is started based on the result of the grant determination, the change display is ended when a predetermined change time elapses, and the identification information change that displays the result of the grant determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information. Means (for example, first result display unit AS, second result display unit BS) and
A first indicating that the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means may be determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination.
The first prior identification means for identifying the prior identification information before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, and
The first suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting the content of the first pre-determination information with a determination probability based on the type of the specific target special information.
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special target specific target by the first prior identification means is started. The first suggestion effect is executed before or before the change display ends (for example, the first suggestion effect is performed by an effect device such as a symbol display device 41, a display lamp unit 63, and a speaker unit 64). (Execute) 1st suggestion effect execution means and
It is a game machine equipped with
A case where the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means when the result of the grant determination is displayed by the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior identification means. In the case where the selection means for preferentially selecting the special information having the lowest determination probability from the stored special information and the special information selected by the selection means are the targets of the grant determination. A second pre-identifying means that specifies the second pre-specific information indicating the possibility of being determined as a determination result before the selected special information is subject to the grant determination, and
With the second suggestion effect execution decision means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect suggesting the content of the second prior determination information based on the determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information. ,
When the second suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the second suggestion effect, the change display is performed before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display. It is characterized in that the second suggestion effect execution means for executing the second suggestion effect is provided before the end of.

In feature B1, the result of the change display of the identification pending information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior identification means is the grant non-correspondence result (disappearance result) or the grant correspondence result (big hit result). Since there is a possibility that the second suggestion effect (second notice effect) is executed regardless of the presence or absence, the second suggestion effect can be executed more frequently. Further, in the case of the grant response result (big hit result), the second suggestion effect (second notice effect) may be executed, so that the so-called "ren-chan" can be notified. The gaming machine of feature B1 may have the features of A2 to A7 described above.

Feature B2.
A variable ball entry means that can switch the opening through which the game ball can enter between an open state and a closed state,
A variable ball entry control means that switches the state of the variable ball entry means to the closed state after setting the state to the open state, and
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is stored. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the special information of
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information of the grant determination target corresponds to the grant information, the game state of the game machine is changed to the variable ball entry means. From the non-granting state of the privilege, which is to maintain the state of the above, to the closed state, after the state of the variable ball entry means is changed to the open state, the privilege of returning to the closed state is performed a predetermined number of times. Benefit granting means to shift to the grant state,
The change display of the identification information is started based on the result of the grant determination, the change display is ended when a predetermined change time elapses, and the identification information change that displays the result of the grant determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information. Means (for example, first result display unit AS, second result display unit BS) and
A first indicating that the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means may be determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination.
The first prior identification means for identifying the prior identification information before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, and
The first suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting the content of the first pre-determination information with a determination probability based on the type of the specific target special information.
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special target specific target by the first prior identification means is started. The first suggestion effect is executed before or before the change display ends (for example, the first suggestion effect is performed by an effect device such as a symbol display device 41, a display lamp unit 63, and a speaker unit 64). (Execute) 1st suggestion effect execution means and
It is a game machine equipped with
In the case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage means when the gaming state of the gaming machine is returned from the privilege-giving state to the privilege-non-granting state, among the stored special information. The selection means for preferentially selecting the special information whose determination probability is not the lowest and the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the special information selected by the selection means is the target of the grant determination. 3 Pre-specific information is specified before the selected special information is subject to the grant determination, and a third pre-specific means.
With the third suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the third suggestion effect suggesting the content of the third prior determination information based on the determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information. ,
When the third suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the third suggestion effect, the change display is performed before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display. It is characterized in that the third suggestion effect execution means for executing the third suggestion effect is provided before the end of.

In feature B2, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is returned from the privilege-giving state to the privilege-non-granting state, a third suggestion effect (third notice) is provided in a case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Since there is a possibility that the effect) is executed, the third suggestion effect can be executed more frequently. It should be noted that the gaming machine of the feature B2 is the "selection means" of the feature A1, the "second prior identification means" of the feature A1, the "second suggestion effect execution determination means" of the feature A1, and the "second suggestion effect execution determination means" of the feature A1. A "suggestion effect execution means" may be provided. In this case, at least one of the features A1 to A6 may be provided.

Feature C1.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is stored. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the special information of
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting correspondence result that the special information to be granted is corresponding to the granting information.
The change display of the identification information is started based on the result of the grant determination, the change display is ended when a predetermined change time elapses, and the identification information change that displays the result of the grant determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information. Means (for example, first result display unit AS, second result display unit BS) and
A first indicating that the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means may be determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination.
The first prior identification means for identifying the prior identification information before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, and
Whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect that suggests the content of the first prior specific information is determined by the change display of the identification information that is executed based on the type of the special information that is the specific target. The first suggestion effect execution decision means to decide according to the degree of expectation (rank),
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special target specific target by the first prior identification means is started. The first suggestion effect is executed before or before the change display ends (for example, the first suggestion effect is performed by an effect device such as a symbol display device 41, a display lamp unit 63, and a speaker unit 64). (Execute) 1st suggestion effect execution means and
It is a game machine equipped with
When it is displayed that the special information is a non-granting result that does not correspond to the given information by the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior specific means. In the case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage means,
A selection means for preferentially selecting the special information having the lowest determination probability from the stored special information.
The second pre-specified information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the special information selected by the selection means is the target of the grant determination is the target of the grant determination. The second pre-identification means to identify before becoming
Whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect that suggests the content of the second matter specific information is executed based on the type of special information selected. The change display of the identification pending information is the degree of expectation (rank) for the grant determination result. ), And the second suggestion effect execution decision means
With the second suggestion effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect suggesting the content of the second prior specific information based on the determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information. ,
When the second suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the second suggestion effect, the change display is performed before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display. It is characterized in that the second suggestion effect execution means for executing the second suggestion effect is provided before the end of.

Feature C1 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned first to third embodiments. This feature C1
According to the pachinko machine (pachinko machine 10), the selection means depends on the above-mentioned expectation (rank).
Since one special information is preferentially selected, the same effect as that of the above-mentioned feature A1 can be obtained. For example, in the gaming machine of feature C1, it may be determined whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect in the order of the degree of expectation (rank). However, it has multiple types of special information that will be the result of the grant judgment.
If there is superiority or inferiority between multiple types of special information (for example, when one has multiple types of jackpot results that generate a high frequency winning mode), even if both are of the same rank, one is ranked higher than the other. May be done. For example, the hold information (hereinafter referred to as high probability discrimination information) that results in a big hit in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Hold information (hereinafter referred to as low probability information)
If it is provided with, it may be ranked higher than the former or the latter. However, in this case, since the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode is generated, the selection means preferentially selects the special information with the earliest acquisition order from the high-probability information and the low-probability information. Alternatively, the special information having a high rank may be preferentially selected. The gaming machine of feature C1 is the above-mentioned A.
It may have the characteristics of 2 to A7.

Feature D1.
The game area provided on the game board and
Predetermined launching means (launching device 75) and
Launch path construction means that constitutes the launch path of the game ball, and
With
A game machine in which a game ball launched by using the launching means passes through the launching path forming means in a predetermined launching direction, reaches the gaming area, and flows down.
A gaming machine comprising: a discharge means for discharging a game ball in which the launch path forming means runs in the direction opposite to the firing direction from the launching path forming means.

Feature D1 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned first to fifth embodiments. This feature D1
According to the game machine, the game ball that runs in the direction opposite to the launch direction of the launch path forming means can be ejected by the ejection means.

Here, the discharge means is mainly composed of (a) a movable member, and the movable member operates.
A game ball that has run backwards through the launch path-building means can be discharged outside the launch path-building means (see the first embodiment, etc.), (b) is provided in the launch-path-building means, and runs backwards through the launch path-building means. Examples thereof include those having a discharge portion (opening or cutout portion) capable of discharging the game ball to the outside of the launch path forming means (see the fifth embodiment and the like). By discharging the game ball on the launch path forming means by the discharging means, the game ball can be guided to, for example, the discharging path.
Then, the game ball guided to the discharge path can be discharged to, for example, the lower plate or out of the game machine. That is, the game ball (return ball or the like) on the launch path forming means can be discharged toward the discharge path instead of the path toward the game area (for example, the above-mentioned guide rail portion 5E). That is, in the feature D1, "discharging the game ball by the discharging means" means, for example, that the "game ball on the launch path forming means" cannot reach the direction other than the "guide rail portion 5E described above" (the game area cannot be reached). Refers to discharging to the route). Further, as the launch path, for example, "a substantially linear path", "a substantially arcuate path", "a path combining a substantially linear path and a substantially arcuate path" and the like can be exemplified.

Feature D2.
A detection means for detecting the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is provided.
The discharging means performs a predetermined operation based on the detection of the detecting means that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is a predetermined state different from the normal state.
The game machine according to feature D1, wherein the game ball on the launch path forming means can be discharged to the outside of the launch path forming means.

According to the feature D2, based on the detection result of the detecting means being in a predetermined state, the discharging means may discharge the game ball (return ball) running in the reverse direction of the launching path forming means to the outside of the launching path forming means. it can. Here, the "predetermined state" includes, for example, (1) a state in which the "interval in which the detection means detects the game ball" is shorter than usual (see the first embodiment), and (2) "the detection means is the game". It is possible to exemplify a state in which the "time for detecting a sphere" is longer than usual (modification example 1 of FIG. 113 (b)).
See 1). Further, the launch path forming means (launch rail 74) is provided with two detection means along the passing direction of the game ball, and a return ball is determined depending on which of the two detection means detects the game ball first. It is also possible to determine the presence or absence of (see the modified example 13 in FIG. 114, the modified example 14 in FIG. 115, and the like). That is, when it is a normal state that the game ball launched by the launching means is detected in the order of the first detecting means and the second detecting means, the game ball is detected in the order of the second detecting means and the first detecting means. Is the "predetermined state".

Feature D3.
The discharging means is
Support means (support member 77 shown in FIG. 9 and the like) capable of supporting the game ball arranged at the launch position provided in the launch path forming means, and
A driving means that operates the supporting means to perform a shunting operation of shunting the game ball at the launching position from a position that supports the game ball.
A drive control means for controlling the drive of the drive means and
With
The drive control means drives the drive means so as to perform the shunting operation based on the detection means that the detection means detects that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is the predetermined state. Control and
The game machine according to feature D2, wherein the game ball on the launch path forming means can be discharged to the outside of the launch path forming means based on the execution of the shunting operation.

Feature D3 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned first embodiment. In the game machine of this feature D3,
Based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball is in a predetermined state, the drive of the drive means is controlled so that the support means performs the shunting operation. Then, when the support means performs the shunting operation, the game ball on the launch path forming means is not supported by the support means, so that the game ball (return ball) can be discharged to the outside of the launch path forming means.

Feature D4.
A second path in which the upper end side is rotatably supported by a rotation fulcrum provided on the lower end side of the first path portion and a first path portion arranged so as to rise and slope toward the launch direction. The launch path forming means (launch rail 74) including the portion, and
A support means capable of supporting a game ball arranged at a launch position provided in the launch path forming means, and a support means capable of supporting the game ball.
With
The second path portion is
A first state, which is arranged on substantially the same straight line as the first path portion and constitutes a launch path of a game ball launched together with the first path portion.
A second state in which the rotation fulcrum is rotated with reference to the rotation fulcrum can be selectively executed so as to be in a downwardly inclined or hanging state from the rotation fulcrum.
The second path portion is rotated with reference to the rotation fulcrum, and the state of the second path portion is changed to the first path portion.
And the driving means for changing from the second state to the second state, or from the second state to the first state.
A drive control means for controlling the drive of the drive means and
With
In the drive control means, the state of the second path portion is the first state based on the detection means that the detection means detects that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is the predetermined state. The drive of the drive means is controlled so as to change from the second state to the second state.
The feature D2 is characterized in that the game ball on the launch path forming means can be discharged to the outside of the launch path forming means based on the state of the second path portion changing to the second state. Described game machine.

Feature D4 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned modification 17 {see FIG. 112}. This feature D
According to the game machine of No. 4, the second path portion is the second based on the state of the game ball being a predetermined state.
The drive is controlled so as to change to the state of. That is, since the second path portion is in a state of descending inclination or hanging with respect to the rotation fulcrum, the game ball (return ball) running in the reverse direction of the launch path forming means can be discharged to the outside of the launching path forming means.

Feature D5.
The launch path forming means (launch rail 74), which is arranged so as to rise in the launch direction and has at least the lower end side as a movable portion that can move toward the launch direction.
A support means capable of supporting a game ball arranged at a launch position provided in the launch path forming means, and a support means capable of supporting the game ball.
A moving means for moving the movable portion in the firing direction, and
A movement control means that controls the drive of the movement means, and
With
The movement control means causes the movable portion to move toward the launch direction based on the detection of the detection means that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is in the predetermined state. Controls the drive of the drive means
Based on the movement of the movable portion toward the launch direction, the game ball on the launch path forming means can pass through the lower end portion of the launch path forming means and be discharged to the outside of the launch path forming means. The gaming machine according to feature D2, characterized in that it becomes.

Feature D5 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned modified example 22 (see FIG. 125). This feature D
According to the game machine No. 5, the movable portion is driven and controlled to move in the firing direction based on the state of the game ball being in a predetermined state. As a result, the game ball on the launch path forming means can pass through the lower end of the launch path forming means and be discharged to the outside of the launching path forming means, so that the return ball can be discharged to the outside of the launching path forming means. ..

Feature D6.
The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the launch path forming means (launch rail 74) is the movable portion.

Feature D6 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned modification 22 {see FIG. 125}, and in the game machine of this feature D6, since the entire launch path configuring means (launch rail 74) is a movable part, the launch path configuration It is easy to discharge the game ball (return ball) on the means from the lower end of the launch path forming means to the outside of the launch path forming means.

Feature D7.
The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the launch path forming means (launch rail 74) has a lower end side as the movable portion.

In this feature D7, since the total length of the launch path forming means (launch rail 74) is shortened along the launch direction, it is easy to discharge from the lower end portion of the launch path forming means to the outside of the launching path forming means.

Feature D8.
The launch path forming means (launch rail 74) includes a first path portion that rises toward the launch direction and is arranged in an inclined manner.
A second path portion slidably arranged in the first path portion above or below the first path portion is provided.
The second path portion is arranged so as to protrude by a predetermined amount from the lower end portion of the first path portion on the lower end side of the first path portion.
In the movement control means, the second path portion moves toward the launch direction based on the detection of the detection means that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is the predetermined state. The gaming machine according to feature D7, characterized in that the driving of the driving means is controlled so as to be performed.

Feature D8 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned modified example 22 (see FIG. 125). This feature D
According to No. 8, the launch path configuring means (launch rail 74) can easily obtain a configuration in which the lower end side expands and contracts.

Feature D9.
The discharging means
A discharge portion composed of a notch or an opening provided in the launch path forming means (launch rail 74) and capable of discharging a game ball running in the reverse direction of the launch path forming means to the outside of the launch path forming means.
An opening / closing means that selectively executes an open state in which the discharge unit is opened and a closed state in which the discharge unit is closed.
A drive means for opening and closing the opening / closing means and
A drive control means for controlling the drive of the drive means and
With
The drive control means sets the closed state of the opening / closing means into the open state based on the detection of the detection means that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is in the predetermined state. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the driving of the driving means is controlled as described above.

Feature D9 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned modified example 27 (see FIGS. 134 and 135).
According to this feature D9, the drive of the drive means is controlled so that the discharge unit is in the open state based on the state of the game ball being in a predetermined state. As a result, the game ball (return ball) that runs backward in the launch path forming means can be discharged to the outside of the launching path forming means.

Feature D10.
The launch path forming means (launch rail 74), which rises toward the launch direction and is arranged in an inclined manner,
A launching means for launching a game ball at the launching position and
A launch moving means that moves the launching means in a direction opposite to the firing direction, and a launching moving means.
A launch movement control means that controls the drive of the launch movement means, and
With
The launch movement control means directs the launch means in a direction opposite to the launch direction based on the detection of the detection means that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is in the predetermined state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D9, characterized in that the driving of the driving means is controlled so as to move toward.

Feature D10 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned modified example 22 (see FIG. 125). According to this feature D10, since the launching means moves in the direction opposite to the launching direction based on the state of the gaming ball being in a predetermined state, the gaming ball (returning ball) on the launching path forming means Discharge to the outside of the launch path constructing means becomes easier.

Feature D11.
Based on the detection means that the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is the predetermined state, the discharging means configures the game ball on the launching path forming means. The discharge operation of discharging to the outside of the means is executed for the first hour, and the discharge operation is performed.
The discharge is based on the detection means that the detection means detects that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is the predetermined state before the second time elapses after the discharge operation is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D10, wherein the operation is performed again over the first time.

In the case of feature D11, even if the discharge operation is performed for the first hour, the occurrence of the return ball is detected before the second time elapses, or the return ball is not resolved even if the discharge operation is performed for the first hour ( When the game ball remains on the launch path forming means), the ejection operation is performed again, so that the return ball can be reliably processed. In the feature D11, the number of times of the re-discharging operation may be one time, but may be a plurality of times. In the latter case, after executing the discharge operation again, the second and subsequent discharge operations may be executed on the condition that the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball is a predetermined state. A uniform predetermined number of times (for example, any number of 2 to 5 times) may be executed again.

Feature D12.
Based on the detection means that the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is the predetermined state, the discharging means configures the game ball on the launching path forming means. The discharge operation of discharging to the outside of the means is executed for the first hour, and the discharge operation is performed.
The discharge is based on the detection means that the detection means detects that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is the predetermined state before the second time elapses after the discharge operation is completed. Features D2 to D, characterized in that the operation is performed over a third time, which is longer than the first time.
The gaming machine according to any one of 10.

In the case of feature D12, even if the discharge operation is performed for the first time, if the return ball is generated before the second time elapses, the discharge operation is performed for the third time, which is longer than the first time. The return ball can be processed more reliably. In the feature D12, the number of times of the re-discharging operation may be one time, but may be a plurality of times. In the latter case, after executing the discharge operation again, the second and subsequent discharge operations may be executed on the condition that the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball is a predetermined state. A uniform predetermined number of times (for example, any number of 2 to 5 times) may be executed again. Further, when the re-discharging operation is performed a plurality of times, even if the cumulative number of re-discharging operations increases, even if the execution time of the re-discharging operation is constant, it becomes longer as the cumulative number increases. Good.

Feature D13.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D10 to 12, wherein the second time is shorter than the first time.

According to the feature D13, it is effective when the return ball occurs frequently (when the discharge operation is performed but the return ball occurs immediately).

Feature D14.
The discharging means is
Based on the detection means that the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is the predetermined state, the game ball on the launching path forming means is discharged to the outside of the launching path forming means. When the discharging operation is executed for the first time and the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is the predetermined state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D11 to D13, wherein the discharging operation is further continued for a predetermined time.

According to the feature D14, even when the ejection operation is executed for the first time, when the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is a predetermined state, that is, that is, If the return ball is incompletely discharged, the discharge operation is further executed. Therefore, the complete discharge operation can be expected.

Feature D15.
Described in any one of the features D2 to D14 provided with a warning means for giving a predetermined warning based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is the predetermined state. Game machine.

According to the feature D15, since the player can be warned, it is possible to call attention to the occurrence of the return ball.

Feature D16.
The discharging means is provided in the launching path forming means (launching rail 74), and is composed of a notch or an opening capable of discharging the game ball out of the launching path forming means (launching rail 74). The gaming machine according to the feature D1.

Feature D16 is a feature extracted from the above-mentioned fifth embodiment. According to this feature D16
A notch or opening can be used to expel the return ball out of the launch path construct. Moreover, since it is not necessary to perform electrical control to process the return ball, it is possible to simplify the mechanical structure of the game machine and reduce the control load.

Feature D17.
The discharging means
It is composed of a notch or an opening provided in the launch path forming means (launch rail 74), and discharges a game ball on the launch path forming means (launch rail 74) to a flow path outside the launch path forming means. With possible discharge parts
An open state in which the discharge unit is opened so that the game ball on the launch path constructing means can be guided to a flow path outside the launch path constructing means, and a game in which the discharge portion is closed and the game on the launch path constructing means is closed. An opening / closing means for selectively executing a closed state in which the ball cannot be guided to a flow path outside the launch path forming means, and
With
The gaming machine according to feature D1, further comprising an operating means capable of performing an opening operation for changing the closed opening / closing means to the open state.

According to the feature D17, the player performs an opening operation on the operating means to form a launch path constructing means (
The game ball (return ball) on the launch rail 74) can be discharged to the outside of the launch path forming means. Moreover, since it is not necessary to perform electrical control to process the return ball, it is possible to simplify the mechanical structure of the game machine and reduce the control load.

Feature D18.
The discharging means is
A support means that can be changed into a support state that supports the game ball arranged at the launch position provided in the launch path forming means and a non-support state that does not support the game ball.
An operating means for operating the supporting means in the supported state so as to be in the non-supported state,
With
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the game ball on the launch path forming means can be discharged to the outside of the launch path forming means based on the support means being in the unsupported state. ..

According to the gaming machine of the feature D18, when the player operates the operating means, the game ball (return ball) on the launching path forming means (launching rail 74) can be reliably discharged to the outside of the launching path forming means. Moreover, since it is not necessary to perform electrical control to process the return ball, it is possible to simplify the mechanical structure of the game machine and reduce the control load.

Feature D19.
The launch path forming means (launch rail 74) is
The first path portion, which rises toward the launch direction and is arranged in an inclined manner,
The rotation fulcrum provided on the lower end side of the first path portion is provided with a second path portion on which the upper end side rotatably supports the rotation fulcrum.
The second path portion is
A first state, which is arranged on substantially the same straight line as the first path portion and constitutes a launch path of a game ball launched together with the first path portion.
It is possible to selectively execute the second state in which the rotation fulcrum is rotated so as to be in a downwardly inclined or hanging state from the rotation fulcrum.
An operating means for operating to change the state of the second path portion from the first state to the second state is provided.
The feature D1 is characterized in that the game ball on the launch path forming means can be discharged to the outside of the launch path forming means based on the state of the second path portion becoming the second state. Game machine.

According to the gaming machine of the feature D19, when the player operates the operating means, the game ball (return ball) on the launching path forming means (launching rail 74) can be reliably discharged to the outside of the launching path forming means. Moreover, since it is not necessary to perform electrical control to process the return ball, it is possible to simplify the mechanical structure of the game machine and reduce the control load.

Feature D20.
The launch path forming means (launch rail 74), which is arranged so as to rise in the launch direction and has at least the lower end side as a movable portion that can move toward the launch direction.
A support means capable of supporting a game ball arranged at a launch position provided in the launch path forming means, and a support means capable of supporting the game ball.
The movable portion is provided with an operating means that is operated to move the movable portion in a direction opposite to the firing direction.
Based on the movement of the movable portion toward the launch direction, the game ball on the launch path forming means can pass through the lower end portion of the launch path forming means and be discharged to the outside of the launch path forming means. The gaming machine according to feature D1, which is characterized in that it becomes.

According to the gaming machine of the feature D20, when the player operates the operating means, the game ball (return ball) on the launching path forming means (launching rail 74) can be reliably discharged to the outside of the launching path forming means. Moreover, since it is not necessary to perform electrical control to process the return ball, it is possible to simplify the mechanical structure of the game machine and reduce the control load. Feature D
19 may have any of the same features as the feature D6, the same features as the feature D7, and the same features as the feature D8.

Feature D21.
The launch path forming means (launch rail 74), which rises toward the launch direction and is arranged in an inclined manner,
A launching means that launches a game ball at the launching position and can move in a direction opposite to the launching direction.
An operating means operated to move the launching means in a direction opposite to the firing direction, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D17 to D20.

According to the gaming machine of the feature D21, when the player operates the operating means, the game ball (return ball) on the launching path forming means (launching rail 74) can be reliably discharged to the outside of the launching path forming means. Moreover, since it is not necessary to perform electrical control to process the return ball, it is possible to simplify the mechanical structure of the game machine and reduce the control load.

Feature D22.
A detection means for detecting the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means, and
A warning means that gives a predetermined warning based on the detection means that the detection means detects that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is a predetermined state different from the normal state.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D17 to D21.

According to the feature D22, since the player can be warned, it is possible to call attention to the occurrence of the return ball. In particular, in the mode of performing the opening operation on the operating means, the player can perform the opening operation based on the warning. Therefore, the game ball (return ball) on the launch path forming means (launch rail 74) can be more reliably discharged to the outside of the launch path forming means.

Feature E1.
The game area provided on the game board and
Predetermined launching means (launching device 75) and
Launch path construction means that constitutes the launch path of the game ball, and
The first control means (main control device 81) and
Second control means (power supply and launch control device 98),
With
A game machine in which a game ball launched by using the launching means passes through the launching path forming means in a predetermined launching direction, reaches the gaming area, and flows down.
The first control means can transmit a enable signal corresponding to the launch permission or a rejection signal not corresponding to the launch permission to the second control means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
The second control means sends a game ball to the launch position of the launch path forming means by the ball feed means (ball feed device 76) based on receiving the enable signal, and the ball feed operation to the launch position. The firing operation of launching the sent game ball by the launching means can be executed in this order.
A detection means for detecting the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means, and
Based on the detection of the detecting means that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is a predetermined state different from the normal state, the discharging operation of discharging to the outside of the launching path forming means is performed. Action execution means and
With
The first control means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the discharge operation execution means is driven, the negative signal is transmitted to the second control means regardless of the success or failure of the predetermined condition.

In the gaming machine of feature E1, the first control means is used regardless of whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied.
By transmitting a negative signal to the second control means, the discharge operation can be smoothly performed. Further, the second control means can perform the firing operation, the ball feeding operation, and the discharging operation only by determining whether the signal transmitted from the first control means is a valid signal or a negative signal. Therefore, the structure of the second control means is not complicated and the control load is not increased.

Feature E2.
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein if the ejection operation is started after the ball feeding operation is performed and before the firing operation is performed, the firing operation is prohibited.

According to the feature E2, it is possible to surely prevent the launching means from performing the firing operation on the game ball remaining in the firing path forming means after the start of the discharging operation.

Feature E3.
A support means that can be changed to a first state that supports the game ball arranged at the launch position and a second state that does not support the game ball is provided.
The discharge operation executing means changes the state of the support means to the second state based on detecting that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is the predetermined state. The ejection operation of ejecting the game ball of the launch path forming means is performed.
A state determining means for determining whether the state of the supporting means is the first state or the second state is provided.
After the support means is in the second state, when a predetermined condition (for example, the passage of a predetermined time) is satisfied and the state determination means determines that the state of the support means is the second state, the firing The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that operation is prohibited.

According to the feature E3, it is possible to prevent the firing operation from being performed when the state of the supporting means has not returned to the first state after the discharging operation is performed. Here, the firing operation can be prohibited, for example, by the first control means transmitting a negative signal to the second control means regardless of the success or failure of the predetermined condition.

Features F1.
The game area provided on the game board and
Predetermined launching means (launching device 75) and
Launch path construction means that constitutes the launch path of the game ball, and
The first control means (main control device 81) and
Second control means (power supply and launch control device 98),
With
A game machine in which a game ball launched by using the launching means passes through the launching path forming means in a predetermined launching direction, reaches the gaming area, and flows down.
The first control means can transmit a enable signal corresponding to the launch permission or a rejection signal not corresponding to the launch permission to the second control means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
The second control means sends a game ball to the launch position of the launch path forming means by the ball feed means (ball feed device 76) based on receiving the enable signal, and the ball feed operation to the launch position. The firing operation of launching the sent game ball by the launching means can be executed in this order.
A detection means for detecting the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is provided.
Based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is a predetermined state different from the normal state, the second control means said over the first time. A gaming machine characterized in that the ball feeding operation is prohibited among the ball feeding operation and the firing operation.

In the case of feature F1, when the state of the game ball on the launch path constructing means becomes a predetermined state (when a return ball is generated), the ball feeding operation is prohibited during the first period, so that the launch path constructing means It is possible to prevent the game balls from accumulating. That is, if the firing operation is continued in the state where the ball feeding operation is prohibited, the game ball on the launching path forming means does not exist on the launching path forming means, and the return ball may be eliminated.

For example, when a plurality of game balls existing on the launch path forming means are launched by the launch means, the ball force is weaker than when one game ball existing at the launch position is launched. It is not possible to get over the above-mentioned gap (the gap 7D between the launch rail 74 and the guide rail 5E, that is, the foul ball recovery port), and there is a possibility of entering the gap (foul ball recovery port). .. Then, in this case, since the plurality of game balls existing on the launch path forming means are collected, there is a possibility that the return balls can be collected.

Feature F2.
After the ball feeding operation is prohibited for the first time, the launch path is based on the detection means that the detection means detects that the state of the game ball on the launch path constructing means is the predetermined state. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that it includes a discharge operation executing means for performing a discharge operation for discharging the game ball on the constituent means to the outside of the launch path constituent means.

In the F2 game machine, the ejection operation is performed when the returning ball cannot be collected even if the ball feeding operation is prohibited for the first period. That is, it is possible to reliably process the return ball while suppressing the execution frequency of the discharge operation.

Features G1.
The game area provided on the game board and
Predetermined launching means (launching device 75) and
Launch path construction means that constitutes the launch path of the game ball, and
A movable member (support member 77 in FIG. 9) that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball on the launch path forming means is held on the launch path forming means and a second state in which the game ball can be discharged to the outside of the launch path forming means.
, The opening / closing member 674n in FIG. 70, etc.)
With
A game machine in which a game ball launched by using the launching means passes through the launching path forming means in a predetermined launching direction, reaches the gaming area, and flows down.
A detection means for detecting the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is provided.
The state of the movable member is changed to the second state based on the detection by the detection means that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is a predetermined state different from the normal state. Then, the game ball on the launch path forming means can be discharged to the outside of the launching path forming means.
A state determining means for determining whether the state of the movable member is the first state or the second state is provided.
When a predetermined condition (for example, the passage of a predetermined time) is satisfied after the state of the movable member is changed to the second state, the state determining means determines that the state of the movable member is the second state. Then, the gaming machine characterized by prohibiting the firing operation.

According to the feature G1, after the state of the movable member is changed to the second state, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, even if the end time of the second state is reached), the state of the movable member is changed to the first state. The purpose is to prevent the firing operation from being performed if it does not return.

Feature G2.
The game area provided on the game board and
Predetermined launching means (launching device 75) and
Launch path construction means that constitutes the launch path of the game ball, and
A first state in which the game ball on the launch path forming means is held on the launch path forming means, and a movable member capable of changing to a second state in which the game ball can be discharged to the outside of the launch path forming means.
With
A game machine in which a game ball launched by using the launching means passes through the launching path forming means in a predetermined launching direction, reaches the gaming area, and flows down.
A detection means for detecting the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is provided.
The state of the movable member is changed to the second state based on the detection by the detection means that the state of the game ball on the launch path forming means is a predetermined state different from the normal state. Then, the game ball on the launch path forming means can be discharged to the outside of the launching path forming means.
A state determining means for determining whether the state of the movable member is the first state or the second state is provided.
When a predetermined condition (for example, the passage of a predetermined time) is satisfied after the state of the movable member is changed to the second state, the state determining means determines that the state of the movable member is the second state. Then, a game machine characterized by being provided with a warning means for giving a warning.

According to the gaming machine of the feature G2, after the state of the movable member is changed to the second state, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, even if the end time of the second state is reached), the state of the movable member is the second state. When the state does not return to one state, the warning means gives a warning, so that the player, the pachinko hall clerk, or the like can be alerted.

Feature G3.
The movable member is configured by a support means capable of changing from a support state in which the game ball arranged at the launch position is supported to a non-support state in which the game ball is not supported by performing an operation of a predetermined mode.
The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein the first state is configured by the supported state, and the second state is configured by the non-supported state.

According to the feature G3, when the state of the support means has not returned to the first state, the firing operation can be prohibited (when the feature G1 is quoted) or a warning can be given (when the feature G2 is quoted). ..

The present invention can be used in fields such as manufacturing and selling pachinko machines.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... Actuating port, 34 ... Acting port, 74 ... Launch rail as launch path construction means, 75 ... Launch device, 77 ... Support member, 77a ... Solenoid, PE ... Game area, 2
12 ... Display control device (first suggestion effect execution determination means, first suggestion effect execution means, selection means, second suggestion effect execution determination means, second suggestion effect execution means).

Claims (1)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is stored. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the special information of
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting correspondence result that the special information to be granted is corresponding to the granting information.
The change display of the identification information is started based on the result of the grant determination, the change display is ended when a predetermined change time elapses, and the identification information change that displays the result of the grant determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information. Means and
Regarding the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the first prior specific information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is provided. The first pre-identification means for specifying the predetermined special information before the subject of the grant determination, and
The first suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting the content of the first pre-determination information with a determination probability based on the type of the specific target special information.
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special target specific target by the first prior identification means is started. Before, or before the change display ends, the first suggestion effect execution means for executing the first suggestion effect, and
It is a game machine equipped with
When it is displayed that the special information is a non-granting result that does not correspond to the given information by the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior specific means. In the case where the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the selection means for preferentially selecting the special information having the lowest determination probability from the stored special information.
The second pre-specified information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the special information selected by the selection means is the target of the grant determination is the target of the grant determination. The second pre-identification means to identify before becoming
With the second suggestion effect execution decision means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect suggesting the content of the second prior determination information based on the determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information. ,
When the second suggestion effect execution determining means decides to execute the second suggestion effect, the change display is performed before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display. The second suggestion effect execution means for executing the second suggestion effect before the end of
With
Further, the acquisition condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting ball entry section or the second starting ball entry section.
As the acquired information storage means
When a game ball enters the first starting ball entry portion, the first acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to the first specified number, and the first acquisition information storage means.
A second acquisition information storage means that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a second specified number when a game ball enters the second start ball entry unit.
Is equipped with
The transition determination means is a gaming machine characterized in that the grant determination is performed for each of the first acquisition information storage means and the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means.

Images